To hold that kicker or not—that is the question

By John Grochowski

It’s always tempting to go for the big jackpot, and often in video poker that’s just what we do. We’ll break up a flush, straight or high pair for a one-card draw to a royal flush, tossing away smaller payoffs for a chance at a bonanza.

Still, in Double Double Bonus Poker, the best play is to discard a low-card kicker when holding three aces, a play that sometimes confuses fans of the game. Several readers have e-mailed me to say they understand drawing two cards instead of one would increase their chances of drawing the fourth ace. Still, they wondered, would they be better off to keep a low-card kicker since drawing the fourth ace then would bring them a 2,000-coin jackpot, while four aces without a 2, 3 or 4 as the fifth card pays only 800 coins.

One fellow who had been holding the kicker came up lucky twice in one day. He had been playing 9/6 Double Double Bonus on a 50-cent Triple Play Poker machine. After holding three aces and a deuce, he had to settle for three of a kind on two hands, but pulled the fourth ace on the third. That’s a 2,030-coin hit, the kind of hand that can make your day at the casino.

He didn’t stop there. About 20 minutes later, he was playing some more Double Double Bonus on a 25-cent Five Play game. Again, he held three aces and a deuce, and again, he drew the fourth ace on one hand. Bam! A 2,060-coin jackpot.

And he went a step further, to a strategic territory where few players venture. Dealt three deuces with an ace, he held that kicker, too. Sure enough, on one hand he drew the fourth two, for an 800-coin jackpot instead of the usual 400 for four deuces, while settling for three of a kind on the other two hands.

Naturally, that set him to wondering, and he emailed to ask if it’s really the best play to discard the kicker. Sure, you’re twice as likely to draw the fourth ace with a two-card draw, but four aces plus a low card pay 2.5 times as much as four aces with a five or higher. And if you fail to draw the fourth ace, doesn’t holding the kicker increase your chances of drawing a full house?

He applied the same reasoning to the deuces hand. You’re half as likely to draw the fourth two if you hold the ace kicker, but if you succeed, the payoff is twice as much.

The problem with that little analysis is that you don’t toss away all chances at the bigger bonanza discarding one 2, 3 or 4 with the aces, or by discarding one ace, 2, 3 or 4 with three 2s, 3s or 4s.. When you hold just the three aces, there are still 11 potential kickers among the 47 cards remaining in the deck. Same deal with low cards. When you discard one kicker to go with 2s, 3s or 4s, there are still 11 more in play.

To give the scenario with the lowest difference in average payback between holding or discarding the kicker, I’m going to assume that full houses pay 9-for-1. Some Double Double Bonus machines pay only 8-for-1 or even (ugh!) 7-for-1 on full houses, but those lower paybacks move the percentages farther in favor of holding just the three aces.

Let’s take care of three low cards first.

The hand described in the email was three 2s with an ace, but it just as easily could have been three 4s with a 3, three 3s with a 2 or any other combination of three 2s, 3s or 4s with either an ace, 2, 3 or 4 as a potential kicker.

In any case if you hold three matched low cards and a kicker, you have 47 possible draws. Just one will give you the fourth low card to go with the kicker and the 800-coin jackpot. Three remaining cards match the kicker and would bring a full house. The other 43 cards are no help, and leave you with three of a kind. The average return in a Double Double Bonus game that pays 9-for-1 on full houses is 33.6 coins per five coins wagered.

What if you hold the twos alone? Then there are 1,081 possible draw. The biggest share, 969, will leave you with three of a kind. Sixty-six bring full houses, and 46 bring four of a kind. Of those 46 quads, 11 also will have a kicker for the 800-coin payday. Average return: 37.3 coins, making it a stronger play to toss the kicker.

The key is that if you hold the kicker, only 2.1 percent of your draws will bring four of a kind. If you hold just the three 2s and take a two-card draw, then 4.3 percent of your draws bring the fourth. You draw quads twice as often.

Four aces with the kicker bring a bigger bonanza. A 2,000-coin hit makes your day. But the arithmetic is similar.

Hold the three aces plus the kicker, and there are 47 possible draws. Just one will give us four aces plus kicker for that 2,000-coin bonanza. Three will bring full houses for 45 coins and 43 will leave three of a kind for 15 coins. The average return per hand is 59.15 coins.

If you hold just the three aces, there are 1,081 possible two-card draws. Eleven of them will give you four aces plus a 2, 3 or 4 for 2,000 coins, another 35 will give you four aces without the kicker for 800 coins, 66 will brings full houses for 45 coins and the remaining 969 will leave us with three of a kind for 15 coins. The average return per hand is 62.45 coins per hand.

A couple of things to note. Just as in the example with 2s, you draw ace number four twice as often with a two-card draw. If you hold the kicker, you draw the fourth ace only once per 47 hands, but when drawing two cards, you we get the fourth ace once per 23.5 hands. And nearly a quarter of those will also include a low card kicker, meaning there’s still a decent shot at the 2,000-coin jackpot.

Also, the difference in the probability of drawing full houses is much lower than you might think. When we hold the kicker, we’ll draw a full house once per 15.7 hands. When we hold just the three aces, we pull a full house once per 16.4 hands.

Of course, it’s hard to argue with luck, and if I were in the player’s position, I’d be plenty happy with two 2,000-coin hits. Would he have done anywhere near as well if he’d made the “right” play?

Maybe. For certain, he still would have had four aces for 800 coins at least once on each draw. Video poker cards are dealt serially, off the top of the electronic deck. Since the ace was the next card off the top in two of his hands, it would have been the next card off the top even if he’d held the kicker. Beyond that, there’s no way to tell if he would have drawn a low-card kicker on either big win, or if he’d have pulled the fourth ace on another hand or two.

Either way, it’s a nice hit. As for me, I’ll stick with the percentages and discard the kicker. Playing video poker is not a one-shot deal. I know I’ll be back for more, and with repeated casino visits, playing the percentages will help more often than it hurts.

Learn to expect the expected

By Henry Tamburin

I often use the term expected value (or EV) when I’m writing about the best video poker playing strategies. Even though EV is foreign to most players, smart players know what that term means and how it is determined.

EV is a mathematically precise term that represents the average return that you can expect when holding a group of cards in a hand. You’ll always do better playing video poker (meaning win more or lose less money) if you choose the holding that has the highest EV.

The math used to calculate EV is not very complicated and I’ll show in the following example how it’s done.

Suppose you are playing 9/6 Jacks or Better and you are dealt the following hand. How would you play it?

There are two possible holds:

Hold #1: Hold the grouping 5-6-7-8 and draw one card, hoping for a straight or

Hold #2: Hold the grouping 2-5-7-8 and draw one card, hoping for a flush.

Assuming you bet five coins, here’s how to calculate the EVs for the two holds. (Note: Remember that the hand began with a virtual deck of 52 cards, five cards were randomly selected from this shuffled deck for your initial hand, leaving 47 unplayed cards for the subsequent draw.)

Hold #1

We hold the four-card straight 5-6-7-8 and draw one card. We are hoping to draw either a 4 or a 9 that would give us a straight. In the 47 unplayed cards, there are four 4s and four 9s. Therefore, the probability of drawing a 4 or 9 is the ratio 8 over 47 (8/47). The payoff for a straight is 20 coins. The EV is the product of the probability of getting the cards you need (8/47) times the payoff (20 coins). When you do the multiplication, you arrive at an EV of 3.40, which means, on average, you will get back 3.40 coins from the 5 coins you wagered. Therefore, eight times out of every 47 times on average that you draw to this hand, you stand to win 20 coins each time, whereas 39 times you will win nothing (meaning your draw card won’t be a 4 or 9). Therefore, think of the 3.40 EV for this hold as an average payback you can expect after an infinite number of trials.

Hold #2

This time we are going to hold the four-card flush (2-5-7-8) and draw one card from the 47 unplayed cards. We need any diamond-suited card to give us a flush, and there are nine left in the 47 cards. (There are 13 diamond-suited cards per deck minus the four diamond cards in our initial hand leaving nine diamond-suited cards). Therefore, the EV for this one card draw is the probability of drawing a diamond-suited card (9/47) times the payoff for the flush (30 coins), yielding an EV of 5.74, meaning, on average, you can expect to win 5.74 coins after many trials.

If you are a dollar player, the above EV’s mean you can expect a return of $5.74 on average for your $5 bet when you hold the four-card flush, and only $3.40 for holding the four-card straight. Clearly, holding the four-card flush is a more profitable play in the long run because it has a higher EV than holding the four-card straight.

Often times, we are faced with several options as to which cards to hold or to simply hold them all. Take this hand, for example.

The majority of video poker players would hold the five-card flush for the guaranteed 30-coin payoff. The EV for this hold is simply 30. If instead you held hold the four-card royal flush, you, of course, would be hoping to get the ten of hearts for a royal flush. However, you could draw a different suited heart for a flush, or another picture card or ace to form a high pair, or a ten of a different suit for a straight. In fact, the table below lists the possible number of final hands that could occur with a one-card draw, the probability of getting each of these final hands, and the payoff for each final hand.

One Card Draw Hands

To calculate the EV for holding the four-card royal flush and drawing a single card, you multiply the probability of getting the specific winning hand times its payoff. You do this for all the possible final hands and then add up the result, which computes to 92.13. This means you will win $92.13 for every five-dollar bet after many trials if you break up the paying flush, hold the four-card royal instead, and draw one card. Winning $92.13, on average, is much better than winning $30; therefore, the best strategy for this hand is to hold the four-card royal flush. (This is an example where in the long run, you’ll win more money by not holding a guaranteed paying hand.)

The calculation of EV for a two-card draw is more complicated because there are 1,081 combinations of winning hands (for a three-card draw, it is 16,215). However, high-speed computers can easily compute the EV for different holds in milliseconds. (In fact, the popular Video Poker For Winners software training program computes the EV for different holds in any selected hand by using the “Analyze This Hand” function.)

It’s not necessary to memorize the EVs for different holds. Strategy tables and strategy cards rank the card holdings from highest EV to lowest. All you have to do is to select the holding that is highest in the table for any hand and you’ll always be making the correct play. It’s that easy.

Tamburin Tip of the Month

How would play these hands if you were playing Jacks or Better?

Both hands contain a four-card inside straight with three-high cards (i.e., the A-K-Q.) For the top hand, the card combination with the highest EV is to hold the 10-Q-K-A (EV 2.66). In the bottom hand, you have two choices. You can either hold the four-card inside straight (10-Q-K-A) or hold the two suited high cards (K-Q). The EV for these two holds is 2.66 and 2.89 respectively; meaning, holding the two-suited high cards is the better play because it has a slightly higher EV. The general rule when you are dealt the above hand is this: Hold the four-card inside straight with three high cards unless two high cards are suited. If the latter is the case, you should hold the two suited high cards.

————————————————————————————————————-

Henry Tamburin is a blackjack and video poker expert. He is the host of the smartgaming.com website and the editor of the Blackjack Insider newsletter (for a free three-month subscription, visit www.bjinsider.com/freetrial).  For a free copy of his Casino Gambling Catalog, which contains books, strategy cards, and software for video poker players, call toll free 1-888-353-3234, or visit the web store at smartgaming.com.

The unwritten slots rules to live by

By Scobe’s Slant

Somewhere around 80 percent or so of casino players are slot players. They dominate the landscape. Casinos are monstrous forests of slots with a smallish village of table games. Prior to 1984 both Atlantic City and Las Vegas made most of their money at table games; after that year slots became the prince and princess; then the king and queen, and finally the emperor and empress of the casino empire.

Just travel around the country and visit casinos in state after state. Slots rule. Had slot machines not existed I doubt if casino gambling would have spread to almost every corner in the United States. Indeed, there are even some casinos that are all slot machines; I doubt you’ll find a casino that is all table games. (If you do find such a casino write me a line.)

Now with all those slot players spread throughout the length and breadth of our great nation, you would think that all of them would know the manners of their chosen delight and also what was true or not true about those machines. Sadly some small percentage of slot players violates these unwritten rules or hold totally erroneous opinions that they try to foster on other players. Here are some of the typical slots “nots” to know:

1. “I left the machine to go to the bathroom, came back and you won my jackpot! You stole it from me!” No one can win your jackpot because no jackpot is slated for you. The RNG (random number generator) is selecting sequences in less than a second and even if the person pushed your hand aside and pressed the “play” button what came up is not what would have come up for you. So do not, not, not think that anyone can steal your wins.

2. “That machine is cold. But that one over there is hot.” Sorry slot machines are neither cold nor hot. They may have been cold or hot up to this point but from this point into the future you cannot tell if a machine will warm up or cool down or be inconsistent. In point of fact, just based on winning decisions slot machines tend to be “cold” because players lose more decisions than they win. However, should a big hit or two occur, even though the player has lost many more decisions, he will still think the machine is hot. In such cases money talks, so do not, not, not think in hot and cold terms when it comes to the machines. They are just machines.

3. The Secret Button. My brother-in-law once informed me that an unemployed slot mechanic who hangs out on the beach with him explained that you could win on the slots by pressing a certain button in the back of the machine. That mechanic had been out in the sun too long. There is no “okay, give away the money” button at the back of any slot machine. It is not, not, not true. You have to be off your rocker to think that such buttons exist.

4. Changing the Game. Some slot players believe that machines will change their programming if someone has won too much money on those machines. Or they believe that if they use their players’ card the machine will tighten up or loosen up (take your pick) by so doing. Both are not, not, not so.

5. Don’t Ask, Don’t Tell. Never ask a slot player whom you do not know, “So how are you doing? Are you winning or losing?” That’s bad manners. My mother used to tell me never to ask anyone how much they made at their occupation. My mother was right. Do not, not, not ask anyone how much they have won or lost. (The exception can be a relative or friend or spouse who might need something to gloat over.)

6. Don’t Hover. Do not stand over another player’s shoulders and watch them play (unless you are with each other). Do not kibitz with them either. Such a thing is uncomfortable for the other player. No one wants a stranger’s body easing up on them, then hovering over them, and annoying them with chit-chat. Most slot players enjoy a certain solitude when they play; that’s why some play the machines, to get away from it all. Do not, not, not intrude on their solitude.

7. Be Proud. Never feel bad when you tell a table-game player that you play the slot machines. You don’t have to be defensive about your choice of enjoyment. If you enjoy slots then that’s your game. I have heard too many slot players meekly say they play the slots as if that is somehow a character flaw on their part. Do not, not, not feel inferior because you prefer the machines to the tables.

8. Winners & Losers. Slot machine wins do not mean there is something special about you. You won; you are great; sorry, no. Slot machine losses do not mean you are a hopeless pariah; sorry, no. These machines are random; a monkey could play and win; a monkey could play and lose; Albert Einstein could play and win; Albert Einstein could play and lose. (Of course, the real miracle would be Albert Einstein doing either one since he is dead.) Do not, not, not think that winning or losing on the slots has any other meaning than winning or losing on the slots.

So there are eight “nots” that will stand you in good stead when you venture into the wonderful world of slot machines. Have fun!

Frank Scoblete’s newest books are Everything Casino Poker: Get the Edge at Video Poker, Texas Hold’em, Omaha Hi-Lo and Pai Gow Poker!; Casino Conquest: Beat the Casinos at Their Own Games!; and Slots Conquest: How to Beat the Slot Machines! Frank Scoblete and his partner Casino Player columnist Jerry “Stickman” teach private lessons in dice control. All books available from Amazon.com, at your favorite bookstore, or by mail-order by calling 1-800-944-0406.

From gold to crystal to fantasy tales, Aruze’s Innovator series is redefining the reel-spinner

By Frank Legato

The first thing you notice is the reels—color-changing, bright reels moving at different speeds, and even in different directions.

When the slot games of Aruze Gaming America first appeared in U.S. casinos around four years ago, they were exclusively of the video variety. When the slot-maker decided to move into the reel-spinning genre, its game designers followed the same credo as they had in the video arena—that is, the games would be like nothing before them.

“Most of our designers are gamers themselves,” comments Kelcey Allison, Aruze’s senior vice president for sales and marketing in the Americas. “Their thought processes are, let’s do everything out of the box. Let’s copy no one.”

Aruze’s new reel-spinning series, called “Innovator with Radiant Reels,” is definitely “out of the box.” The reels are “radiant” thanks to light, color and motion that one just doesn’t see in the average reel-spinner. “There are 240 LEDs behind each reel,” notes Paul Omohundro, Aruze’s director of marketing. “The reels have 10 different movements, as well as speeds ranging from 3 RPM to 200 RPM.” The reels also are over-sized, adding to the overall effect.

The differing reel speeds and changing colors are all part of a package that “drives the fun factor,” Omohundro says. Another part of that fun factor is that the games are generally packed with bonuses, played out on an LCD video screen in the top box.

Games like Catch the Money, Seven Rush, D’Artagnan and the Musketeers and King of Dragons have quickly established Aruze as much more than just a video slot specialist. The most recent additions to this growing stable of reel-spinning games—to this point exclusively multi-line, video-style games in pennies and other low denominations—is a move into a more traditional style of slot. This year, the first three-reel versions of the Innovator reel-spinner are appearing in casinos.

Aruze is introducing a new group of three-reel, single-line Innovator games, in more traditional dollar, $5, $10 and higher denominations. There also is Rose Chance, a five-line, three-reel game featuring a double progressive jackpot and a frequent free-spin bonus event.

Innovator Deluxe

Aruze has won a ton of converts with its “G-Deluxe” series of video slots, which feature beautiful, sculpted cabinets and elaborate bonus events housed in huge top-box displays. The top-box bonus games in this series are much more than your average pick-em bonuses—games like “Chinese Queen,” “Franken Mama” and “The Four Heavenly Kings” tell a story with the top-box bonus, in multi-level episodes that are as much a performance as a bonus.

The hottest new products from Aruze transfer this “Deluxe” treatment to the Innovator reel-spinning series. The Innovator Deluxe series is shaping up to be a home run for the company, as the combination of the Radiant Reels and episodic top-box bonuses similar to G-Deluxe is already resulting in games that are among the slot maker’s most popular.

Take The Gold and Crystal, two of the first new five-reel, 30-line reel-spinners in the Innovator Deluxe series. The bonuses are relatively simple with picks in a top-box display. But the video displays, combined with the Radiant Reels, have turned them into Aruze’s most popular slots.

“The Gold is our number one game,” says Omohundro. “Players love it, as do the casino operators. Crystal is right behind it.”

While these games are popular, the first two Innovator Deluxe games released earlier this year, Aladdin and the Magic Lamp and Alibaba capture the essence of what Aruze’s signature elaborate top-box bonus adds to the Innovator series.

Alibaba and Aladdin and the Lamp take the top-box bonus to new heights. The Aladdin game employs a sculpted object located just above the reels—Aladdin’s Lamp. This isn’t some cheap plastic lamp or video simulation; it’s a nice representation of the legendary Aladdin’s lamp, and it’s interactive.

Even if you’re not engaged in the game, go ahead and rub the lamp. The genie will appear on the top screen and invite you to play. During game play, you can be invited to rub the lamp to release multiple genies, which fly down to the physical reels and transform them into wild reels. The genies perform various acrobatics between the top screen and the reels before the physical reels turn to display three wild symbols.

Other events have the genie awarding free games, multipliers or a “pick the door” bonus to reveal credit awards or one of the free-spin bonuses.

Alibaba, its theme dedicated to the medieval Arab adventure tale “Alibaba and the Forty Thieves,” uses a physical device that combines with the LCD top-box monitor to achieve various special effects. The technique, called “RVL Technology” (it’s pronounced “reveal”), adds a physical “Random Visual Layer” to the interactive top box containing physical devices that slide in front of the LCD monitor in various game situations.

During the bonus, the physical device will close and open, either partially or completely, like cave doors. Holes in the rock wall of the cave allow you to see “thieves” peeking out from behind, or Alibaba, who fights the thieves to accumulate bonus awards.

These bonuses go on for a long time, providing for the accumulation of big wins. “The featured hit frequencies are high in a lot of cases, again, to provide entertainment—that fun factor, on which Aruze prides itself,” says Omohundro.

The Radiant Reels themselves contribute to the overall effect of these games, not only through color and light, but with other little nuances—for instance, periodically the backing lights will go completely out on the main reels. If you’re not in the bonus that means something big is about to happen, such as a bonus trigger, according to Omohundro. Alternatively, the lights will go out to allow you to focus exclusively on the top box, to watch for thieves, Aladdin, or whatever else happens to be the subject of the game.

Omohundro says everything Aruze does in the slot arena goes back to the corporate philosophy one finds on the company website, on its game brochures, and in its corporate headquarters: “All In The Name Of Fun.”

There’s definitely more fun to come. •

Don’t Miss…

The Innovator Deluxe series is only one part of what is an extensive collection of all types of slots from Aruze. The company has great games in just about every slot genre. To get an idea of what’s available, just go to the Venetian in Las Vegas, which is a veritable Aruze showcase. “About nine percent of the floor at the Venetian is all our products,” says Omohundro, “in all of our product lines.”

Here’s a few that are not to be missed:

Rich Life

This game, in the “G-Link” series, is what the company calls a “two-pod versus” game. Two video slots are situated under a big game board. At the start of the game, you select one of four characters to represent you. The bonus is the story of your life as that character. You collect bonuses as your character traverses the board through higher education, picking a job, investing in the stock market, etc. When the bonus switches into “Versus Mode,” you compete against the other player in the two-person setup—in contests ranging from bowling to fishing to shopping, even to a hot dog-eating contest. It’s a blast.

Paradise/Amazon Fishing

Also part of the G-Link series, these two games—Paradise Fishing and Amazon Fishing—place a bank of six video slots in front of a giant video display formed by three huge, connected video monitors. The bonus is a fishing contest, with each player manipulating a joystick to go for big fish, and thus, big awards. The joystick employs something called “Reel Feel” technology—when a fish bites, you feel the tension on the line. This is one of Aruze’s most popular games, and it’s easy to see why.

Franken Mama

A female version of the Frankenstein monster is the main character in this game, in the G Deluxe series. The elaborate top-box bonus has you opening up doors to find bonuses themed as any of a collection of famous monsters, including a vampire, a mummy and a werewolf.

Cherry Chance

This series of six titles features high hit frequencies, lots of “7” wins, and a feature that has been one of Aruze’s most player-friendly—when you bet the maximum, the overall return goes up and the chances of winning are better.

G-Station

Aruze has a remarkable collection of multi-player electronic table games in the G-Station series. Shoot to Win Craps, Lucky Big Wheel and Lucky Sic Bo can all be found at the Venetian. In The Big Wheel game, the players physically spin the wheel with a slot handle. The automated baccarat game includes a feature that lets players “squeeze” the virtual cards, an action popular in Asia as a way to purportedly summon the luck gods. The odds are exactly the same as in the live games, making any of these multi-player games a great way to learn a live table game without any intimidation.

The value of using simplified video poker strategy

By Jerry “Stickman” Stich

Many regular readers of this publication and Strictly Slots are aware of the paybacks of popular video poker games. For example, full-pay Jacks or Better returns 99.54 percent, full-pay Bonus Poker returns 99.16 percent, full-pay Double Bonus Poker returns 100.17 percent, and full-pay Double-Double Bonus Poker returns 98.98 percent.

These returns are calculated based on what is called “perfect play.” Playing “perfectly” means for each hand that is dealt, the mathematically highest paying combination of cards are saved. It takes into account all possible combinations of held cards and all possible combinations of hands possible for each saved combination. Of course the result of each hand played will vary wildly, but after thousands and thousands of hands, the actual returns will very closely match the mathematical return. How is the “perfect” strategy determined?

Computer programs churn through every conceivable hand and come up with the probability of each hand appearing during each possible hold combination. The program then multiplies the probability of each hand occurring by the amount that is paid for that hand to calculate the contribution of each possible hand. The contributions are summed and compared for each hold combination and the combination with the highest return is determined to be the “perfect” hold.

This may sound simple in theory, but putting the results of the computer calculations into a playable strategy can get pretty complex. The difference of just one rank in one of the cards can alter the results enough to change the strategy.

The strategy for some games such as Jacks or Better can be fairly straightforward, while others such as Double-Double Bonus can be fairly complex; the more complex the strategy the better the chance for error. Serious video poker players practice long and hard to master the strategies of their chosen games no matter how complex they may be.

But what about the more casual player, the ones who do not put in the scores of hours of practice needed to master perfect strategy?

Most video poker strategy programs as well as several strategy cards have different levels of strategy. Some have as many as four different levels. Does it make sense to use a strategy that has been simplified and by so doing relegate some of the possible edge to the casino?

Remember, the stated return for a video poker game is based on perfect play. Every mistake made shifts more money toward the casino. Some mistakes may only amount to a fraction of a cent, but most mistakes cost the player much more—from several cents to potentially over a dollar.

Using a simpler strategy streamlines the learning process while only minimally reducing the return—in many cases only a tenth of a percent or so. The strategy charts can be dramatically different, however.

Consider the two different versions of strategy (basic and advanced) generated by a popular video poker strategy program. The basic version of strategy for Jacks or Better has 45 separate lines. The advanced version weighs in at almost twice that amount at 87 lines of strategy. As another example, compare the two versions of strategy for Double Bonus Poker. The basic version has 58 lines of strategy while the advanced version has 94 lines.

Learning all the additional lines of strategy comes at a price. More time is needed to master the strategy and there are many more opportunities to make a mistake while playing. Is all the added complexity worth the additional fraction of a percent return?

Only you can answer that question.

Any casual player who doesn’t have the time or inclination to practice a complex strategy should seriously consider learning a simplified strategy. It may be just what the video poker doctor ordered. Even though the return is slightly lower, it is still better than misplaying the complex strategy or, even worse, playing by hunch with no formal strategy.

SIDEBAR: Video Poker Strategy: How Would You Play This Hand?

Since this month’s article talks about using simplified video poker strategy, let’s look at an example of a simplified strategy dictating a different play.

Playing a full pay Jacks or Better game (9/6) with max coin-in of five quarters, you are dealt the following hand: A♦ Q♦ 10♦ 8♦ 9♠

How would you play it?

This hand contains three cards of a royal flush and four cards of a flush. It also contains four cards of an inside straight.

A popular video poker strategy computer program has two versions of strategy available, a basic strategy and an advanced strategy.

Using the basic version of the strategy there is only one strategy line for three of a royal and it returns about one-tenth of a unit more than the one line in the basic version for four of a flush. So, using the basic version of the strategy the proper play is to hold the three of a royal (A♦Q♦10♦).

The advanced version of the strategy has 20 strategy lines for three cards of a royal and three lines for four of a flush. According to the advanced strategy, the proper play is to save the four of a flush having two high cards over a suited Ace, Queen, and 10 when there is also an additional card of a flush (8♦) and an additional card that could form a straight (9♠). The former hold returns about one one-hundreth of a unit more than the latter. In this case the proper hold would be the four of a flush.

Notice how this advanced play improves the return by only a very slight amount and the strategy involved in making the decision has 23 lines versus two in the basic strategy. This is an excellent example of a lot of added complexity for very little gain.

• It’s fiesta time at Dick’s Last Resort inside Excalibur Hotel & Casino. They’ll be serving specialty drinks and food specials all night long for Cinco de Mayo. This includes 2-for-1 $10 El Jimador specialty drinks, all served in a 16oz. cup. There are also $15 food combo specials, each paired with a 16 oz. Dos Equis draft, plus taco salad and nachos.  For more information or to make a reservation, call (702) 597-7991. Doors open at 11 a.m. Guests under the age of 21 must be accompanied by an adult from 11 a.m. to 10 p.m. Guests must be 21 years of age or older after 10 p.m.

• The best comedy value in Las Vegas: The Riviera Comedy Club. Voted Best Comedy Club six years in a row, Las Vegas’ original comedy showcase features America’s funniest comics in an intimate nightclub setting.  Enjoy comedy seven days a week with some of your favorite comedians. One show nightly at 8:30 p.m. Enjoy more laughs for your dollar with a $19.99 admission when you purchase tickets at the Riviera Box Office.

• Station Casinos is No. 1 when it comes to prices on their buffets. Now a new barbeque station has been added to the Texas Station food lineup, offering unlimited meats including  smoked ribs, turkey, chicken, sausage and pork. The team at Texas Station had started offering smoked meats at the regular carving station, and the feedback was so positive, that a decision was made to expand the offerings and make the variety of meats available daily. Lunch is $4.99 per person, dinner is $7.99 per person, and Sunday brunch (including sparkling wine) is $8.99 per person.

• The Coasta Cantina at the Suncoast Hotel and Casino has a two-for-$25 weekend special. This includes your choice of one shared appetizer, taquitos, Mexican potato skins, or a Mexican sampler. The “Build Your Own” combo features a choice of any two including: chile relleno; beef, pork, or chicken enchilada; chicken, shredded beef, or ground beef taco; beef or chicken flautas; beef or chicken taquitos; or shredded beef enchilada.  This comes with a choice of one shared dessert including tequila flan, churros, or fried banana.  Available Friday-Sunday from 4:30 p.m. to 9 p.m.

• There is also a Coasta Cantina at the Orleans Hotel and Casino that offers early bird specials from 4 to 6  p.m. daily, and late night specials on Wednesday, Thursday & Sunday from 8  to 10 p.m. and Friday & Saturday from 9 to 11 p.m.

• In the Market Street Cafe inside the California Hotel and Casino in downtown Las Vegas you will find a “Daily Special” menu where no price is higher than $7.95 for any dinner. The cafe also features a $7.95 surf and turf special that’s available seven days a week from 5 to 11 p.m. This special features steak, fried shrimp, vegetable of the day and your choice of brown or steamed rice or mashed or french fried potatoes. Also featured is a $5.95 all-you-can-eat salad bar. The salad bar can be added to any of the dinner specials for just $3.95.

• Prime Rib lovers will salivate over the prices at the Second Street Grill at the Fremont Hotel and Casino. A queen cut is just $20. Aking cut is $25. This comes with veggies and choice of potato. I have been told that the king cut is the largest in Las Vegas.

• At Ellis Island, the home of the famous $7.95 steak dinner, you will also find this special that is served in the brewery from 4 to 10 p.m. daily. For just $12.99 (with players card) you get a full rack of baby back ribs served with corn on the cob, baked beans, cole slaw and garlic bread.

• The Downtown Las Vegas tradition is back with Siegel’s Famous Prime Rib dinner. A full 12 ounces with all the trimmings available for only $6.99 with Siegel’s Club membership ($11.99 without) at the Golden Grill inside Gold Spike Hotel & Casino. Served daily from 4 p.m. to midnight.

Here a few more money-saving specials at the Golden Grill:

• Belgium waffle with powdered sugar and maple syrup: $4.99
• Three sliders with pickles, onions and ketchup: $4.99
• Shrimp cocktail: $1.98
• Meatloaf with mashed potatoes and veggies: $7.49
• Chicken Parmesan with spaghetti and garlic bread: $8.99
• Spaghetti served with garlic bread: $4.99 add meatballs for $1.99

Squeeze the house edge to zero percent… seriously

By Basil Nestor

Craps has dozens of bets, and many of them carry punishing advantages for the casino. But the best craps wagers give the casino an edge of zero percent. That’s right, nothing, nada, zip. You lay down your money, the house risks their chips, and the payoff is at true odds!

Pretty amazing, huh? If you play craps regularly, then you probably already know about these bets which are called “odds.”  But if you’re only an occasional craps player, or you mostly play other games, then odds is a good bet to explore.

Basic Craps and Easy Odds

An odds bet is technically a standalone wager, but it’s always linked to an original flat bet on craps pass or come, don’t pass or don’t come (for more info about these bets, check out my book The Smarter Bet Guide to Craps). Here’s how basic craps works. We’ll cover odds in the next section.

Let’s say you bet $10 on the pass line. That’s a base wager. Now let’s say that you (or anyone else at the table shooting the dice) roll a 7 or 11. Congratulations! You win $10! It’s a “pass.” End of game. If the shooter rolls 2, 3, or 12, that’s called “craps.” You “don’t pass” and lose $10. If the shooter rolls any other number (see the chart) that becomes the shooter’s “point.” He must roll that number again for you to win. If he rolls a seven, then you lose. Notice that seven was good in the beginning, but now it’s bad. All the other numbers are moot. Roll a point to win, roll seven and lose. There is no limit to the number of rolls allowed to make a point.

A bet on pass, come, don’t pass and don’t come gives the casino about 1.4 percent edge. But here’s the really beautiful part. When the shooter establishes a point, you’re allowed to make an additional bet, odds, on winning the point. And the edge for that is zero percent!

True Odds with 0% Edge

About 66 percent of all basic craps bets are not resolved on the first roll. So about two out of three times, you can bet odds.

Odds for pass and come bets are called “taking odds.”  It’s an extra wager that the shooter will successfully roll the point. Laying odds is the opposite of taking odds. It’s a bet on the “don’t” side; you’re hoping for the shooter to lose with a seven-out. The adjacent table shows the various payoffs.

Table: Taking Odds VS Laying Odds

Odds are allowed in multiples of the original base bet, and there is always a limit. For example, if the base bet is $10 and the allowed odds are 3X, you can take odds in any amount up to $30, and you can lay odds up to a $30 payoff.

Keep in mind that the base bet is paid 1:1, but the odds bet is always paid at the true odds of winning. Also, odds must be taken or laid on the same side as the base bet.

How much in odds can you take or lay? The limits are posted along with the other table limits on a plastic card attached to the inside wall of the craps table.

Odd Facts About Odds

One unusual thing about odds is that there is no place for the bets on the layout. To take odds on the pass line, put your chips directly behind the original bet (on the blank space next to the wall) after the point is made.

Laying odds on don’t pass is a bit tricky. You place the chips next to the original bet, but you “heel” the stack. That means the bottom chip is off center and the stack slants to one side. The dealer will show you how to do it. Odds bets are heeled when the payoff will be a different amount than the payoff for the flat bet. If the payoff will be the same, then the stack should be bridged instead of heeled. A bridged stack is two stacks with a third perched on top. Strange, yes? Again, the dealer will show you how it’s done.

Taking and laying odds on the come and don’t come require a dealer’s assistance. You do this by putting chips on the layout (preferably on a line that separates betting spaces.) Tell the dealer that you want “odds on the ten” or whatever. She’ll place the wager.

One of the most important things to remember about taking odds is to do it in multiples that the casino can pay. For example, if the point is 5, an incorrect bet would be $25, creating a payoff of $37.50. Not good. The casino will give you only $37. To get the full payout you must take odds in multiples of $5 when the point is 6 or 8, $2 for points 5 and 9. And any whole-dollar amount is fine for points 4 and 10.

The odds bet is one of the best in a casino. Craps played with 3X odds on the pass line brings the overall house edge (base bet and odds) down to only 0.47 percent. Find a table that gives you 10X odds, and the house edge shrinks further to 0.19 percent. That’s comparable to some of the best blackjack games, and it’s many times better than the edge on most other casinos games such as roulette (2.7 to 5.26 percent), or Three Card Poker (2.3 percent all the way up to 7.3 percent).

Odds may be odd, but they’re very good bets. You should check them out.

Basil Nestor is author of The Smarter Bet Guide to Poker, The Smarter Bet Guide to Blackjack, and other comprehensive gambling guides. Got a question? Visit SmarterBet.com and drop him a line.

The 20^th annual edition of our report on the most generous slots in the business

By Frank Legato

The mission of Casino Player has always been to equip players with the information they need to get the best chance at winning. In the area of slot machines, that has always meant two words: Loose slots.

Even the term is inextricably linked to this magazine. No one talked about “loose slots” before Player began, in the late 1980s, to publish monthly charts showing the percentage of all wagers on slot machines that casinos or casino regions were returning to players as slot payouts.

Casinos in commercial jurisdictions—at that time only Nevada and Atlantic City—had always been required to publicly report their “slot hold,” which is the portion of slot wagers kept or “won” from players after all the accounting was done. Player’s editors decided to take those numbers and flip-flop them to achieve a “payback percentage.” It wasn’t long before casino operators—who had been horrified at first that statistics once considered proprietary business information was now out in the public domain—began to use the fact that they had generous slots as a marketing tool.

It’s still a big foggy who actually coined the term, but soon after Player began publishing payback percentages, casinos were advertising their “loose slots.” There was still one problem, though—payback percentages for any one month were not really instructive when looking at how generous a casino was with its players. Payback percentages are set at the factory, the result of how many numbers each symbol was assigned in the program. It takes several months of play in the field for a slot machine to reach its “true” theoretical payback.

This was particularly true with the higher denominations. (The casinos report the hold numbers by denomination.) If a few lucky players hit the $5 or $25 slots for big jackpots, the monthly payback percentage number could be more than 100 percent, a number that obviously would be unworkable for casinos in the long term. Within several months, enough players would lose on these machines to even out the percentage and reflect the comparatively small house advantage.

That’s why in 1994, Casino Player compiled its first “Loosest Slots” issue, combining the statistics from a full 12 months to reflect an accurate portrayal of the overall payback percentages offered by each particular casino or region. The casinos used our “Loosest Slots Awards” as a badge of honor, trumpeting the “loosest” designation from billboards and in media ads.

Welcome to the 20^th annual edition of our Loosest Slots report. Over two decades, this report has been viewed by casino operators as a competitive gauge for marketing purposes, but more importantly, it has afforded players a good picture of which casinos, by policy, offer the most fair shake to the players on their slot floors.

That’s because there’s nothing “theoretical” about these payback numbers. They are based on actual, historical statistics—this is how much real money was given back to players out of the thousands wagered each month on the slots. And, because it covers all 12 months of the previous year, it is quite simply the most accurate picture you will find of who offers the best returns on the slots.

As usual, there are common questions we receive from players that are best answered up front in this report. Why aren’t all denominations included? Why isn’t video poker broken out?

The answers to all of these questions are the same: We include the statistics as they are publicly reported. That’s why some places are reported as casino regions and other places are reported as individual casinos. The reports from regulatory agencies are the only place these numbers are available, including the divisions each agency requires concerning denominations. For example, the penny denomination—currently the most popular—was only added to the statistics by most jurisdictions recently.

Denominations like 10-cent and 50-cent slots are often wrapped into a special category for multi-denominational slots. Other jurisdictions include an “Other” category for all of these stray denominations.

The fact that we can only report statistics as they are publicly revealed is also the reason you won’t find a separate payback category for video poker. Video poker and slots are combined in all reports. (However, in reality, the casinos with the highest overall payback percentages almost always have the best video poker pay schedules as well.)

Finally, you may not find your own jurisdiction in the reports. Some jurisdictions—notably, most Native American markets—do not require casinos to report hold percentages. Where it is not required, casinos consider this proprietary information.

And the Winners Are…

There are many parts of our annual survey that result in no surprises. The top of the survey is one. For the sixth year in a row, Reno, Nevada, gets the award for Loosest Slots in the Nation.

In fact, the best even got better. The combined 2012 payback of Reno’s gaming halls—led by the Atlantis, the Peppermill, the Eldorado, the Silver Legacy, the original Harrah’s, the Grand Sierra and others—was 95.13 percent, up from 95.07 percent in 2011. The second- and third-highest slots in the nation, again repeating last year, are also in Nevada, with Balance of County second at 94.81 percent and Boulder Strip third at 94.42 percent. The latter two switched positions from last year, but it was essentially a dead heat.

(“Balance of County” refers to off-Strip casinos like the Orleans, Hard Rock, The Palms, Gold Coast, Palace Station, Silverton, South Point, M, and the Primm casinos. “Boulder Strip” refers to those casinos on and around Boulder Highway— Sam’s Town, Boulder Station, Cannery East, Arizona Charlie’s, etc.)

The three Nevada regions were each a full point “looser” than any other region in the nation. However, the other thing that hasn’t changed is the casino registering the highest payback among casinos in jurisdictions that list the numbers of individual properties. For more than a decade, the winner there has remained the Casino Queen in East St. Louis, Illinois, which receives another crown this year for the loosest slots among individual casinos, and the loosest in Illinois, at 93.23 percent.

Other notable results this year could be found in Pennsylvania, where the top three casinos—The Meadows (92.02 percent), Parx (90.59 percent) and Mount Airy (90.52 percent—were unchanged from last year, but the top figure from Meadows, south of Pittsburgh, was higher than last year—and higher than any of the Atlantic City casinos.

Additionally, in Iowa, Prairie Meadows moved from last year’s third place to top the survey, getting the Loosest Slots crown at 91.85 percent.

Finally, there was a new entry in this year’s survey—Ohio, where, with eight months’ results reported Hollywood Columbus edged out Hollywood Toledo, 90.9 percent to 90.81 percent.

The remaining entrants in the survey represent mostly repeat winners. In Atlantic City, the Borgata (91.68 percent) retains the Loosest Slots crown followed closely by Harrah’s and Resorts. Repeat awards go to Cripple Creek in Colorado, Mohegan Sun in Connecticut, Hoosier Park in Indiana, Lake Charles in Louisiana, Isle of Capri Booneville in Missouri, and the Mississippi Gulf Coast casinos.

Congratulations to all of our winners—you’ve proven that you give your players a fair shake. And thanks to our readers for allowing us to give you the industry’s most comprehensive report on slot percentages for a full two decades.

Mashantucket, CT

Perched majestically amidst the wooded grace of Connecticut, Foxwoods beckons players to its door with its combination of grandeur and excitement. With four hotels to choose from and an immense gaming floor packed with everything a gambler could possibly hope for it’s debatable what is more alluring about the property—the gaming or the accommodations. Each of their unique properties is well prepared to create an ultimate casino experience.  These include the Grand Pequot Tower, Great Cedar Hotel, MGM Grand at Foxwoods, and the Two Trees Inn.

The AAA Four Diamond Grand Pequot Tower is, in short, a Foxwoods tradition.  Guests are immersed in elegance from the moment they walk in.  The soaring lobby is flanked by striking art and stunning architecture designed to both soothe and inspire.  The deluxe rooms here are equally striking offering spacious, sedate comforts while the suites provide a plush retreat from the daily grind.  The pinnacle of decadence is the Tower Villa, which goes to even greater lengths to define luxury. Highlights of staying at the Grand Pequot include fine dining at the elegant Paragon restaurant, easy access to the Norwich Spa at Foxwoods, and a casino floor that is mere steps away.

For those with a more adventurous streak, the recently renovated Great Cedar Hotel offers the perfect getaway option.  Located at the heart of the casino, this AAA Three Diamond retreat offers an elegant modern design with just a touch of rustic flare.  Rooms and suites are dressed in think, rich hues as if whispering “relax.”  Highlights of this hotel include as variety of dining options just around the corner, convenient access to some of Foxwoods’ most exciting entertainment venues as well as retail boutiques, and one of the liveliest casinos on the property.

Meanwhile, over at the MGM Grand at Foxwoods (another AAA Four Diamond winner, if you’re keeping track) guests enjoy a more “modern” casino pulsing with music, excitement, and a Carpi Diem attitude.  Here it’s all about the anticipation—what’s waiting for you just around the next corner. The circular lobby winds its way through the action, where guests are surrounded by fantastic dining, shopping and entertainment.  Guest rooms and suites are exceptional—and in some cases unbelievable—offering the finest Monaco linens and boasting expansive views of over 2,000 acres of pristine forest.  Top marks for this hotel are the world class G Spa & Salon and the grand outdoor pool—both perfect for shedding the cares of the world.

Last but not least, the Two Trees Inn is the perfect choice for that home-away-from-home feel.  Set adrift from the main casino’s hustle and bustle, this country-style inn features warm, rustic décor and a level of serenity that makes it a destination unto itself.  But just because you’re not in the heart of the casino doesn’t mean you’re in the boondocks, either.  Two Trees offers a delicious restaurant, The Grill at Two Trees, a lively bar and a heated indoor pool all its own.  Plus you’re only a short walk (or complimentary shuttle) away from the casino action.

Speaking of Dining

Foxwoods is known for many things, not the least of which being exceptional dining.  For the finicky foodie, there are seven gourmet restaurants vying to please your palate.  If you’re in the mood for something with international appeal, have a taste of French fusion cuisine at Paragon; for a more robust Italian fare the choice is Al Dente and Alta Strada.  Shrine boasts some of the best in Asian culinary delights.

If your preference is steak, steak, and more steak, Foxwoods offers three highly acclaimed beef palaces: Craftsteak by Top Chef Tom Colicchio, David Burke Prime, and Cedars Steak House.  You can’t go wrong, no matter which you choose.

For the more casual diner, there are nearly a dozen terrific, not-so-stuffy eateries including: Golden Dragon, Matches Tavern, Hard Rock Café, California Pizza Kitchen, Juniors, Veranda Café and The Scorpion Bar.

Gaming Bonanza

As the largest casino in the Northeast, no player ever goes wanting for action.  Here’s a rundown of what you can look forward to playing.

Slots:  6,300 slot machines including pop-culture sensations like Sex in the City or Michael Jackson machines, as well as progressives and traditional favorites. Games range from pennies to $100.

Table Games:  350 table games feature 17 of the most popular including baccarat, blackjack, craps, pai gow, roulette, Caribbean stud, let it ride and sic bo.

Poker:  100 tables and at least five daily no limit hold’em tournaments plus sit & go events.

Bingo:  3,600 person bingo hall featuring high stakes bingo and regular games twice daily.

Keno:  Live drawing every six minutes.

Race Book:  50-foot digital projection screens, racing information from touch screens in any one of 200 carrels.

Just For Fun

Whether you’re visiting for a few hours or a few days, one thing is certain: you will be entertained.  If gambling isn’t your bliss–or if you just need a break from the constant ups and downs—there’s plenty to occupy your time.  Catch a headliner at the Fox or MGM Grand Theaters.  Get a chuckle from a rising star at Comix, or dance the night away at one of the area’s hottest nightclubs like Shrine or Scorpion Bar.

For something a little different, give High Rollers a shot. Hardly your local lanes, this retro-chic bowling alley features Las Vegas style décor and 21^st century technology. The 35,000-square-foot venue offers 20 bowling lanes, four professional billiard tables; a two-level lounge with piano and 50-seat marble bar; two full-service bars; 60 big-screen HDTVs and, if you’re a bit peckish, an innovative menu of appetizers, sandwiches, various cheese-soaked delights. (I dare you not to try the white cheddar tater tots) plus fries, burgers, steaks and more.

Finally, for bit of good, clean fun that’s a blast from the past, get your game on at Tree House Arcade, which features over 100 of today’s top video games, classic arcade games (just try and beat my high score on Centipede) pinball machines and much more.  Do well, and redeem your tickets for toys, gifts, apparel, and electronics.

Coming Soon
Here are a few of the major events coming to Foxwoods:

Il Divo – May 3
Foreigner – May 5
Cedric the Entertainer – May 10

Night of Italian Stars – May 10
Dana Carvey, Dennis Miller and Kevin Nealon – May 25
Ralphie May – May 31

Jammo Ja’ Tour – June 1

Jerry Seinfeld – August 3
Oh What a Night of Doo-Wop & Rock n Roll – August 3

For more information, or to buy tickets in advance visit www.foxwoods.com/shows

Reno, NV

Moving west from the forest green of Connecticut we arrive at the pride of “The Biggest Little City in the World,” Reno, Nevada.  Like its Vegas counterpart Reno never closes, yet it offers a palpably welcoming atmosphere—and just as much fun and excitement.  Reno is also the home of another of the best gaming properties in the US, the Atlantis Resort Casino & Spa.

Delightful with a touch of whimsy thrown in for good measure, the Atlantis boasts a broad appeal with exquisite accommodations and an attention to detail unmatched in northern Nevada.  It is for this adherence to excellence across the property that Atlantis has been honored with the distinguished AAA Four Diamond award—a designation given to less than five percent of the nearly 31,000 properties approved by the AAA.

Designed to inspire, their guest rooms—the newest in Reno—are bright and open, featuring distinctive décor with contemporary furnishings for the ultimate in comfort. Oversized windows fill the room with natural light and showcase stunning views of the city below or the nearby mountains. For just a little bit more, consider upgrading to Reno’s only concierge hotel tower and treat yourself to VIP check-in, butler service and an exclusive lounge serving complimentary continental breakfast and afternoon hors d’oeuvres.

Over on the gaming side of things, Atlantis prides itself on being a “player’s paradise” and we find it difficult to disagree. Atlantis offers a dynamic casino floor with ample room, ample games, and some of the loosest slots anywhere.  Spread out across the 60,000-square foot casino floor, they offer over 1,500 slot machines—including the hottest new games (in some cases, their first appearance in the region) as well as Reno’s only casino-wide progressive jackpot game, Crazy Money. If you’re not into slots, rest assured, you won’t have far to look for the tables.  Get into the action with blackjack, pai gow, baccarat, craps, roulette and more.  There’s also keno, a fantastic race and sports book, and a smoke-free poker room for all you hold’em fans.

Sidebar: The Choice is Yours

Not sure which room fit you the best?  Here’s a pair of our favorites.

Concierge Tower Room: Voted Reno’s best room, these one-of-a-kind accommodations feature custom furnishings, unparalleled amenities, and access to the 25th floor concierge lounge. Guests enjoy complimentary continental breakfast and afternoon hors d’oeuvres and light business services. A full-service bar is also available. Seamless in-room technology lets guests connect a laptop to the 42” HD flat screen TV, along with a Bose Wave Radio with iPod docking station. Butler service is available upon request.

Luxury Spa Room: Luxury Spa rooms provide a serene spa-like retreat. Rejuvenate at the start of your day, and relax as you wind down your evening.  Special amenities, like a yoga mat, calming rain stick and plush spa robes extend the spa experience in a serene location that is private and tucked away on the spa level. Select rooms have a private patio sun deck.

Please Your Palate

Dining is important even to the most diehard gambler.  The Atlantis features a host of exceptional restaurants offering cuisine that ranges from the on-the-go quick snack to the all-you-can-eat buffet to inspired gourmet fare crafted by award-winning chefs. Select from the spice of Italy, the freshness of the sea, the variety of California cuisine, the authenticity of the Big Apple and much more. Favorites include:

• Atlantis Steakhouse: A cosmopolitan essence with steakhouse familiarity, the Atlantis Steakhouse offers only the finest cuts of steaks and chops amidst an impeccably styled setting with a design that melds contemporary elegance with classic comfort. Experience the art of traditional steakhouse tableside dining, unsurpassed service and unmatched attention to detail. Classic cocktails, metropolitan martinis and over 336 selections of wine complete the experience.
• Bistro Napa: Guests savor innovative contemporary cuisine inspired by Napa Valley in a sophisticated and vibrant atmosphere with emphasis on seasonal, organic ingredients and simple, fresh flavors. Select from innovative small plates for sharing or go grand with delectable big plates and unique desserts that are deceptively delicious. Flown in from certified waters of the cold Pacific Northwest, the finest oysters are served in the raw seafood bar. Not sure what to pair with your meal? The sommelier will help complement any Bistro experience with thoughtfully chosen wine from the 4,000-bottle wine cellar.
• Sky Terrace Sushi Bar: Choose from a selection of over 50 types of nigiri and maki sushi. Complement your choices with any one of eight brands of premium sake, plum wines or an assortment of domestic and imported beers.

A Little “Me” Time

When all you crave is a little time for yourself and some well deserved pampering, there’s nothing in the world like a good spa experience. And Spa Atlantis is just the place to soothe what ails you.

Spa Atlantis is a haven for solace and healing. A refuge from the everyday world, guests restore and revitalize surrounded by calm healing colors, natural stone and the gentle flow of water. Professionally trained aestheticians and massage therapists lift the weight of time from those weary shoulders. Discover unique treatments such as the Pantai Luar eastern Asian massage, Rasul Mineral Mud Ceremony and Cleopatra Milk and Honey Cocoon. Luxuriate in the amazing sensations of the Aqua Lounge as you relax aching muscles and invigorate your body. The heated Laconium Relaxation Lounge stimulates circulation, purifies and detoxifies the body. Bringing in the climate of an ocean shore, the Brine Inhalation-Light Therapy Lounge combines salt aerosols and chromotherapy, improving your respiratory system and stimulating your senses.

Packages Galore

Golf packages, skiing packages, dining packages and more are available at the Atlantis throughout the year. Here are some popular upcoming offerings:

Bubbles & Bubbly: Discover romance in Four Diamond luxury. This exclusive Bubbles & Bubbly package includes Jacuzzi Suite accommodations, dining credit that can be used in any of the eight award-winning restaurants, champagne and chocolate-covered strawberries. Treat that special someone to a romantic retreat they won’t soon forget. Package is $150 per person and includes:

• One night JacuzziSuite accommodations
• Champagne and chocolate-covered strawberries
• $50 dining credit

Reno Aces Package: Catch a Reno Aces baseball game and stay at Atlantis. The Reno Aces, 2012 Triple-A Champions, play their games in the $50 million Aces Ballpark, located in downtown Reno.  Packages are available from June through September.

Reno Air Race Package: Experience the action and excitement of the National Championship Air Races & Air Show in Reno. The Air Races have been run since 1964 near Reno and are currently held at nearby Reno Stead Field. Race aircraft in the “Unlimited Class” reach speeds of over 500 mph. Available September 11-15.

Ronnie Milsap & Crystal Gayle Package: For one night only country music legends Ronnie Milsap and Crystal Gayle perform their classic hits. The one night show & room package is $162.50 per person and includes:

• One night Luxury Tower accommodations for Friday, May 24
• Two tickets to Ronnie Milsap & Crystal Gayle on Friday, May 24 at 8 p.m.

From the biggest casino in the Northeast to the Biggest Little City in the World, these casinos have proven they have what it takes to be called the best. We hope you’ll agree.

By Henry Tamburin

Spin Poker is a cross between a Triple Play video poker game and a five-reel video slot game. It brings the ‘feel” and “excitement” of playing a slot machine to a video poker game.

Below is an image of a Spin Poker screen, consisting of three rows (or lines) and five columns. The initially dealt five-card poker hand appears on the centerline. You decide which cards you want to hold, and those cards are duplicated on the top and bottom line in the same column (as they are in Triple Play). When you press the Draw/Spin button, the “draw” cards are randomly filled in each “square” from the 47-card deck (because five of the 52 cards were used on the deal) to form three poker hands that you see on the screen.

When you play Spin Poker, you get to choose how many lines and how many coins you want to wager per line. There are a maximum of nine lines in Spin Poker (I’ll show you shortly which cards comprise each line), and you can wager a maximum of five coins per line. (Note: Five coins is the standard default for the maximum coins; however, it can be set by the casino operator to be as high as 30 coins per line. See also my “Tip of the Month” below for tips on how much to bet and how many lines to activate.)

Let me pause for a moment and explain the nine lines because this often confuses players. The Spin Poker video screen is a matrix of five vertical columns (representing the five spinning reels) and three horizontal rows (that show the three poker hands on the middle, top and bottom rows). The 15 cards that are on screen are combined into nine different sets of five-card hands, and each of these hands is evaluated to determine the payouts.

The Spin Poker screen image below highlights the cards in the nine lines that are evaluated for a payoff. If you look carefully at the colored lines, you will see each of the nine lines from left to right as follows:

Line 1: Red middle line

Line 2: Blue top line

Line 3: Navy bottom line

Line 4: Peach V line, consisting of the first card of Line 2, the second card of Line 1, the third card of Line 3, the fourth card of line 1, and the fifth card of line 2.

Line 5: Pink upside down “V” line, consisting of first card of line 3, second card of line 1, third card of line 2, fourth card of line 1, and fifth card of line 3.

Line 6: Orange line, consisting of first two cards in line 2, the third card in line 1, and the fourth and fifth cards in line 3.

Line 7: Violet line, consisting of first two cards in line 3, the third card in line 1, and the fourth and fifth cards in line 2.

Line 8: Green line, consisting of first card in line 1, second card in line 2,  third card in line1, fourth card in line 3, and fifth card in line 1.

Line 9: Yellow line, consisting of the first card in line 1, second card in line 3,  third card in line 1, fourth card in line 2, and fifth card in line 1.

As a player, you don’t have to memorize the above patterns of winning hands. After the game is over, you will see on the screen the active lines that are winners (the boxes will be highlighted), how much you won per line, and the aggregate amount you won for all nine lines.

Once you’ve chosen how many lines you want to activate and coins that you want to play per line, you hit the “Deal” button to start the game. When you do, you’ll receive your five-card poker hand in the middle (or first) line. You select which cards you want to hold by touching the card on the screen or hitting the corresponding hold button beneath the card(s) you want to hold. The cards you hold on the centerline will be replicated on the top (2^nd) and bottom (3^rd) lines. You then hit the Draw/Spin button again and the “video reels” spin-deal you the draw cards on all three lines. (The game uses one 52-card deck, assuming no wild cards. So a specific card can only appear once in any of the three lines.) Your total payout for each round will be the sum of the payouts for any winning hands on the active lines.

There are three meters on the bottom of the screen. The “Total Bet” meter (right) shows how much you are betting on all the active lines per round (or game). Immediately below is the “Credit” meter, which keeps a running tally of how many credits (or bankroll) you have, based on how much you win or lose per round. The “Win” meter (left) shows you how much you won at the end of each round.

There are a myriad of different video poker games on the Spin Poker format (e.g., Jacks or Better, Bonus Poker, Double Bonus, Double Double Bonus, Joker Poker etc.). By clicking on the “More Games” button (lower left) on a Spin Poker machine, you can view all the games available.

You’ll also find several popular versions of Spin Poker in casinos. Spin Poker Deluxe, which expands the game from nine to 20 lines; Super Times Pay Spin Poker, which adds a mystery “multiplier” to the payoffs; Triple Spin Poker, which features three games on the same screen with 27 pay lines; and Dream Card Spin Poker, which includes a “Dream Card” side bet.

What’s great about Spin Poker is this:  the playing strategy and return is identical to the same game and pay table on a conventional single or multi-line format. Therefore, when you play Spin Poker, you don’t have to memorize a different playing strategy. For example, if you want to play 9/6 Jacks or Better on Spin Poker, use the same 9/6 Jacks or Better playing strategy that would use for a standard game. You’ll also get the same 99.54 percent expected return with perfect play as you would in the standard game.

You can play Spin Poker (or Spin Poker Deluxe and Super Times Pay Spin Poker) for fun by going to www.videopoker.com. Additionally, the Video Poker for Winners computer software training program includes Spin Poker, which allows you to practice your playing strategy while you play Spin Poker. (The program will alert you when you make a playing mistake.)

Just as you would for any conventional video poker game, you should try to play the full-pay version of your favorite game on Super Poker. To find which casinos offer the full-pay version of any Spin Poker game for any region in the US, go to www.vpfree2.com, or the Best Video Poker page on www.lasvegasadvisor.com (for Las Vegas area casinos). You’ll also find a listing of casinos in each state the offer Spin Poker at www.videopoker.com.

Spin Poker will definitely get your adrenalin flowing when you play it. If you get lucky and are dealt a royal flush on the initial deal with nine active lines, you will win a whopping 36,000 coins—that’s nine grand for a quarter player. Moreover, on the draw, it’s possible to get more than one royal flush per round. Now that’s an exciting possibility.

Tamburin Tip of the Month

When you play Spin Poker, you should always play the maximum number of coins per active line to benefit from the bonus payout on a royal flush (the default is usually five coins.) If you activate all nine lines, you will be wagering 45 coins (that’s $11.25 per game for a quarter player.) Spin Poker is very volatile, which means your bankroll will take big positive and negative swings. If you have a modest bankroll, you could tap out quickly if Lady Luck isn’t kind to you. My suggestion for players that have a short bankroll but want maximum playing time is to play Spin Poker for lower stakes (nickel instead of quarter denomination) or activate less than nine lines, but always with five coins wagered per active line.

————————————————————————————————————-

Henry Tamburin is a blackjack and video poker expert. He is the host of the smartgaming.com website and the editor of the Blackjack Insider newsletter (for a free three-month subscription, visit www.bjinsider.com/freetrial).  For a free copy of his Casino Gambling Catalog, which contains books, strategy cards, and software for video poker players, call toll free 1-888-353-3234, or visit the web store at smartgaming.com.

How can slots be random if… ?

By John Grochowski

It’s hardly news to informed slot players that the games are designed to yield random results and that there’s nothing you can do to make winners come up more often nor identify when the big hits might be coming. The games don’t have pre-programmed patterns of hot streaks or cold streaks, nor do they have to go into any makeup time after a big hit.

You’ve heard all that before, but do you believe it?

Nothing in the universe is perfectly random, but slots are as random as humans can program a computer to be, and certainly random as roulette, craps or any other casino game. Still, players spot patterns in short-term results, and wonder if randomness is really all it’s cracked up to be.

Often, those who see patterns write to ask how their experiences can be squared with random results. Why are there more jackpots on busy nights? How can a programmed payback percentage be random?  Let’s take a few of those questions from the email bag try to clear the random fog:

“I went to a casino grand opening, and it was packed. I heard somebody who worked there say, ‘Big crowd means we’ll be paying out a lot tonight,’ and he had a big smile on his face. He was wearing a suit, and had a casino ID badge on his lapel, so I went up to him and asked if he meant jackpots and he said, ‘Oh, there’ll be some jackpots.’

“My question is this. If randomness theory is true, how could he know they’d be paying out a lot? The casino must have control over the payouts if they can make them pay big for a big crowd.”

Slot machine results remain random no matter how many people are playing, and the casino employee that the player consulted knows that. More money will be paid out when more people are playing just because more wagers are being made. The payback percentages remain the same, the chances of any individual winning or losing remain the same, and the casino will both take in and pay out more money.

Let’s make up a hypothetical casino filled with machines set so the odds will yield a top jackpot once per 25,000 plays. And let’s compare a slow night with 100 players each spinning the reels 1,000 times vs. a crowded night with 1,000 players at 1,000 spins each. Our small crowd gets in a total of 100,000 spins, while the busy night brings 1 million spins. In an average session, the group of 1,000 players will see 40 jackpots, while the group of 100 players will see only four.

On every slot machine in a licensed casino, the results are determined by a random number generator. The casino can’t control when the payouts come. Still, if you have 10 players sitting at a bank of dollar machines, it’s more likely that at least one of them will hit a big pay than if only one customer was playing, just because more spins of the reels mean more chances for that big win to come up.

That’s all the casino employee was saying, in many fewer words. It’s not that the casino controls payouts so there are more in big crowds. It’s that the natural odds of the game lead toward more payouts when the reels spin more times.

I don’t get how slots can be both random and programmed. If a slot machine has to pay out, say 93 percent, how can it be random? The programming must keep it on track to pay 93 percent.

That mix—programmed, yet random—is something that has confused many a player in the decades since slots went electronic. Slot manufacturers must program payback percentages to comply with the law in states that set minimum and maximum returns. And the machines still have to be able to meet state randomness standards.

The confusion seems to be over exactly what it is that the programmer is programming.  It’s not a matter of telling the game that it must pay a designated percentage. It’s a matter of setting the possibilities and the odds of the game so that random results eventually will lead to the desired return.

In that way, slots are like table games. Take roulette. On an American double-zero wheel, the game is “programmed” with 38 possible results—numbers one through 36 plus 0 and 00. The numbers come up randomly, and when you win on a single number, you’re paid at 35-1 odds, a bit less than the true odds of 37-1. That gives the house an edge of 5.26 percent, or to turn it around, gives the game a programmed payback percentage of 94.74 percent.

There is nothing to keep your number from coming up two or three times in a row, and nothing that says it has to come up within several dozen spins or more. But given enough trials, the random results and the odds of the game will lead to something very close to roulette’s “programmed percentage.”

Slots work more or less the same way, except that there thousands of possibilities instead of 38. For regular play on the reels, randomly occurring numbers are programmed, each corresponding to a reel symbol. To make up an example, the programmer might write it so that every time the random number one shows up, the reel shows a jackpot symbol; with numbers two, three or four, it shows a seven, with numbers five through nine, a triple bar, and so on. The possibilities are programmed, but when they turn up is random, just as it’s random when a 17 turns up in roulette.

After a big win, the machine doesn’t go into makeup mode. Over a long period of time, normal results according to the odds of the game will yield a normal payback percentage, and your big win fades into statistical insignificance.

Just as when a table games designer sets the rules of a card, dice or wheel game, the slot programmer sets the possible outcomes, and the pay table gives you back a little less than the true odds of hitting the winners. You can hit several winners in a row, or none for a number of spins. Results are random, but over hundreds of thousands of plays they will lead to something very close to the programmed payback percentage.

Programmed, yes. Random, yes. Just like any other casino game, but in an electronic sort of way.

I’ve read that your picks make a difference in video bonus rounds. If slots are really random, how can picks make a difference and still have a programmed payback. Doesn’t one make the other impossible?

Your choices do make a difference in pick’em-style bonus events, but not in any way you can predict or control. The programmer, on the other hand, knows that over a very long time, the bonus event will yield an average payback.

Let’s make up a simple bonus event, in which you pick one of three symbols to reveal a bonus award. If you touch one symbol, you get 25 credits, if you touch a different one, you get 50, and if you touch the other you get 75.

The amount you get isn’t predetermined. You will get the amount assigned to whichever symbol you pick. If you’re able to pick the 75-credit space, good for you.

However, no system for trying to determine which symbol hides the 75 will work. The shuffling of the symbols is random. The 75 could be on the left three times in a row, or not at all for several trials, or any other number. Over a very long time, hundreds of thousands of trials, players will pick the 75 about a third of the time, the 50 about a third of a time, and the 25 about a third of the time.

The odds of the game lead to an average payback of 50 credits on that particular bonus event. In determining a target payback percentage for the game, the programmer knows that, and that’s built into calculations.

Real-life bonus events have more possibilities and the math is more complex, but the principle is the same. Over time, an average win will emerge, and the programmer can build that into the targeted payback percentage.

If slots are really random, why don’t I win more often? Shouldn’t winning symbols come up as often as losers?

“Random results” is not the same as saying “equal results.” A game doesn’t have to be programmed so that a jackpot symbol shows up as often as a blank space, or a bonus symbol as often as a cherry.

The odds of the game are set so that blank spaces will show up more often than winning symbols and small winners will show up more often than big winners. On three-reel slots, that will lead to there being more losing spins than winners, and on five-reel video games it will lead to more “wins” for .amounts less than the size of your bet than bigger winners. The programmer sets the odds of the game, and then lets random chance take its course.

When you play, may the chance be with you.

By Frank Legato

Slot Groupies

Some people follow around their favorite musicians.  Others trot the globe to be part of the latest vacation craze.  Thanks to a little imagination on the part of Multimedia Games and some daring casino executives, we’ve got something completely new: slot groupies.  A growing number of dedicated slot lovers have taken to travelling from casino to casino, entering the TournEvent satellites in an effort to spin their way into the national championships and a shot at $100,000.

Got what it takes to be the first National TournEvent Slot Champion?  Here are the upcoming locations and dates for NTOC events.

National TournEvent of Champions                                          Casino Event Dates

Casino Name                                                                                   Final Event Date

REGION 1: CALIFORNIA

Eagle Mountain Casino                                                                            March 2

Soboba Casino                                                                                         March 16

Valley View                                                                                            March 30

Jackson Rancheria                                                                                   April 5–6

Colusa Casino                                                                                            April 6

Rolling Hills                                                                                              April 7

Cache Creek Casino                                                                                  April 9

Thunder Valley Casino                                                                         April 12–13

Red Hawk Casino                                                                                    April 14

River Rock Casino                                                                                   April 14

Quechan Casino Resort                                                                         April 26–27

Sycuan Casino                                                                                           June 1

Agua Caliente Casino Resort Spa                                                         July 12–13

Spa Resort Casino                                                                                 July 26–27

Barona Resort & Casino                                                                        Aug. 12–13

Casino Pauma                                                                                   TBA—June 2013

REGION 2: WASHINGTON & IDAHO

7 Cedars Casino                                                                                       April 20

Lucky Eagle Casino                                                                              April 20–21

Angel of the Winds                                                                               April 27–28

Emerald Queen                                                                                         April 29

Emerald Queen I–5                                                                                    May 1

Quil Ceda Creek                                                                                        May 5

Muckleshoot Casino                                                                                 May 10

Swinomish Casino & Lodge                                                                  May 12–13

Silver Reef Casino                                                                                    May 15

Clearwater River Casino                                                                        May 18–19

Tulalip Resort Casino                                                                               May 19

Snoqualmie Casino                                                                            TBA–Aug. 2013

BJ’s Bingo                                                                                             Aug. 30–31

Clearwater Resort Casino                                                                        Sept. 1–2

Mill Bay Casino                                                                                          TBA

Okanogan Bingo                                                                                         TBA

REGION 3: OKLAHOMA & KANSAS

Prairie Band Casino & Resort                                                                   May 25

WinStar World Casino                                                                             June 1–2

Choctaw Casino Resort Grant                                                                   June 2

Choctaw Casino Resort Durant                                                                 June 8

Last Updated 3/8/2013

Casino Name                                                                                   Final Event Date

Choctaw Casino Hotel Pocola                                                                   June 9

Newcastle Casino                                                                                     June 12

Riverwind Casino                                                                                     June 15

Osage Casino Tulsa                                                                                   June 16

Osage Casino Bartlesville                                                                         June 17

Osage Casino Sand Springs                                                                      June 18

Remington Park Racing & Casino                                                            June 19

Lucky Star Casino Clinton                                                                       June 21

Lucky Star Casino Concho                                                                       June 22

Kickapoo Lucky Eagle Casino                                                                 June 26

River Spirit Casino                                                                                    Aug. 4

REGION 4: SOUTH

Hard Rock Hotel & Casino Biloxi                                                          April 5–6

Paragon Casino                                                                                         June 29

Boomtown Casino Biloxi                                                                         June 29

Choctaw Pines Casino                                                                              June 30

L’Auberge Casino Baton Rouge                                                           Aug. 12–13

Palace Casino                                                                                           Aug. 13

Hollywood Casino Tunica                                                                        Aug. 14

REGION 5: NORTH

Seneca Niagara Casino & Hotel                                                             July 19–20

Hoosier Park Racing & Casino                                                                 July 20

Prairie Meadows Racetrack & Resort                                                    July 22–23

Treasure Island Resort & Casino                                                              July 25

HoChunk Gaming Madison                                                                      July 26

Majestic Star                                                                                             July 27

French Lick Resort & Casino                                                                    July 29

Turtle Creek Casino                                                                                   Aug. 3

Little Six Casino                                                                                        Aug. 5

4 Bears Casino & Lodge                                                                          Aug. 10

REGION 6: WEST

Santa Ana Star Casino                                                                             Aug. 15

Desert Diamond Casino & Hotel                                                          Aug. 17–18

Last Updated 3/8/2013

The “TournEvent of Champions” will crown the top tournament slot player in the US.

By Frank Legato

Quick—imagine a slot tournament.

Chances are, you imagined yourself sitting stone-faced with a lot of other slot players, repeatedly hammering a “Max Bet” or “Spin” button on a basic, boring video slot, watching the screen for your credit total to rise.

Now, imagine a slot tournament that is actually fun.  While you’re hitting the spin button, little balloons float up the screen that boost your score if you touch them and pop the balloons.  While a master of ceremonies shouts out the standings—also shown on a big video leaderboard—live video of you and the other players is beamed to a big screen and to picture-in-picture monitors on all the games in the bank.

This latter description is not imagination.  It is the way the “TournEvent” system from slot-maker Multimedia Games works.

TournEvent was developed as an instant tournament for dedicated banks of slots, in a system with cameras in each machine that provides an overhead video display of a tournament in progress.  Leaders are displayed on the screen as the emcee calls the slot tournament and crowds gather around the bank of games.

Special features have been consistently added since the original launch of TournEvent, including not only those ingenious cameras and pop-up side games, but a great feature called “Jump To First.”  At any time during a tournament—even the last second—the “Money Man” mascot can appear on a player’s screen.  Touching the Money Man instantly boosts that player to a first-place score.

The leaderboard, on a huge overhead LCD video monitor, shows player names as the tournament progresses.  Even more appealing to players is the fact that it flashes video of them as they play—switching between contestants, and showing the current leader with his or her name as the host follows the competition.  It transforms the basic slot tournament into something that is a cross between a live sporting event and a game show.

Players love the TournEvent system, which led Multimedia executives to a great idea: a multi-property tournament.

“We had this great product that made slot tournaments easier to run, more fun and more interactive,” explains Linda Trinh, the director of marketing and promotions for Multimedia Games who was put in charge of developing the multi-property promotion.  “We wanted to figure how to take it to the next level, and really tie in that competitive spirit that comes with being in a tournament.”

The program Trinh developed would be called the “TournEvent of Champions.”  The inaugural event took place in California, where 11 casinos signed up.  Trinh structured the contest similar to the way Caesars conducts the events leading to the annual World Series of Poker, with satellite events at properties equipped with TournEvent leading to a final championship event.

Satellite events across the state led to the selection of one finalist from each participating property, and Multimedia took 13 finalists on a five-night vacation aboard Celebrity Cruises’ Millennium Wine Tour Cruise from San Diego to Vancouver, including associated accommodations, round-trip airfare and a $200 on-ship casino credit for themselves and one guest.  After the shipboard slot tournament was done, Rolling Hills Casino entrant Julie Ellars walked away with bragging rights and a $20,000 prize.

That event was followed up a year ago by another statewide TournEvent of Champions, with 13 casinos in Washington participating in events leading to a grand-final event held at Lagasse’s Stadium, an arena-style sports bar at the Venetian in Las Vegas.  “We had a great following there,” says Trinh. “We actually had a band of players who followed us to seven of the 13 casinos to try and qualify for the championship.  We had our own little set of groupies who were following us around Washington State.”

The original plan was to follow up the Washington event with a regional TournEvent of Champions that would involve casinos from several states, but Trinh says the level of enthusiasm was so high from players—and casinos, which reported some of their best business of the year during the satellite events—that the next move was obvious: TournEvent of Champions would go national.

Last month, Multimedia kicked off the first National TournEvent of Champions.  According to Trinh, all 140 casinos equipped with the TournEvent system are eligible, and by press time, 67 casinos in 20 different states had signed up to participate.  She estimates that at least 80 casinos will be on board by the time the sign-up period ends in May.

Around 80-100 finalists will go to Las Vegas for a September 25 championship, again at Lagasse’s.  “We really liked the stadium effect,” says Brad Johnson, Multimedia Games’ vice president of product management, of the bar, which has a central amphitheater-style arena where the finals are held. “People are close enough together to generate a lot of excitement and enthusiasm, and to encourage the players. It creates an intimate tournament experience the players won’t forget.”

Just as with the other tournaments, the finalists have really already won. Just reaching the finals gets you a free flight to Las Vegas for you and a guest, five nights in a luxury suite at the Venetian, a $500 food and beverage credit for the stay, and a guaranteed cash prize of at least $500.

“By the time you get to the championship, you’ve already got this great trip to Las Vegas for you and a guest,” Trinh says. “Everything else is just gravy.”

It’s good gravy, too—the title of the Nation’s Best Slot Tournament Player comes with a grand prize of $100,000 in cash.  The other finalists will split a prize pool totaling another $150,000.

Johnson adds that the limited number of finalists means that along with the free vacation, you’ve got a very good shot at that top prize.  “They’re going in with a sense that they have a pretty good chance of winning,” Johnson says.  “This isn’t a group of thousands, but maybe a hundred people. Those odds are pretty good.”

Entering the Contest

So, how do you enter?  It depends on where you play.  If your favorite casino is one of those participating in the national TournEvent of Champions, you will receive some sort of communication from your slot club about a satellite tournament.

Again, just as with the World Series of Poker, TournEvent of Champions is designed to allow each casino to create its own satellite event or events.  “Some are doing slot leagues, others are doing weekly slot tournaments, or weekly promotions to get into the finals,” Trinh says.  “Qualifiers at the participating casinos take place any time beginning four weeks prior to their in-casino finals.”

“It’s exciting to see how some casinos are treating the event,” adds Johnson.  “Some have added extra prizes to what we’re offering; some have made it a really big deal with special lunches and dinners and extra giveaways.  This can be as big as the casino wants to make it.”

So, watch your slot club mail.  You can also check the National TournEvent of Champions website, www.tournevent.com, or Facebook at tourneventofchampions, for updated lists of the participating casinos and more details on the contest and its satellite events.

The day of each casino’s in-house finals—the event that will pick who goes to Las Vegas for the championship—look out for a bus parked in front of the casino.

Yes, there is a National TournEvent of Champions Tour Bus, which will be traveling to all the participating casinos for the final qualifying events. You’ll see the Money Man mascot, along with sexy “M Girls” and others.  “It’s going to be parked right out in front,” says Trinh, who is probably sitting on the bus as you read this.  “We’re going to have our Money Man, our M Girls and our tournament staff show up at every casino to amp up the event, hand out swag and talk to players.

“We’re going on tour.  It’s a rock band hitting the road, hitting these casinos and collecting winners to go to the championship.”

Trinh is used to hitting the road with TournEvent.  After organizing the statewide tournaments, she logged miles traveling to more than 30 events in California and Washington, and interacting with some of the more than 20,000 players who participated in the two state contests.  This year, the new tour bus will log around 30,000 road miles.

“The thing I’ve enjoyed the most,” she says, “is talking to our players, and watching them play the game, because it really is very different than the traditional-style slot tournament—they get so animated, and so into it.”

The best part for players?  Popping that balloon when it appears, Trinh says. “Players love that interactive element, that extra step besides just pressing the max-bet button.  I’ve had players walking up to me with a cup of ice, actually icing their hands before the tournament.  Players get so into it that they are sweating by the time the tournament ends.”

Johnson likens the effect to reality TV.  “The way we show video of players up on the big screen, and in the picture-in-picture, makes it a very exciting event,” he says.

It helps that Multimedia keeps adding new base games to TournEvent—some designed specifically for the tournament, others regular Multimedia base games that are “TournEvent-Ready.”

The “Jump to First” feature has been an unqualified hit.  Typically, at least once during a tournament session and sometimes more than once, the Money Man will appear on someone’s screen to jump that player to the top of the leaderboard.  It means that even if you’re dead last with 10 seconds left in the contest, you can still win.

“You don’t want players to get halfway through the tournament and say, ‘I can’t win,’” says Johnson.  “With this, you’ve got to keep playing right to the end, because you never know when the Money Man will pop up.”

Trinh adds that participants have been “across the board” as far as age and demographics, from twentysomethings to seniors.  “A lady who must have been 95 walked up to me at Agua Caliente (in California) who said this is the one thing that has finally lit her fire back up again—to play in our tournaments!”

How to Handle Low Return Video Poker

By Jerry “Stickman” Stich

It is always great to be able to find high return video poker such as 99.5 percent or more.  If players are diligent, they can usually find high paying games in most gambling destinations.  It may take a little work and the search area may have to be widened from the big name casinos, but usually good games are available.  Even on the Strip in Las Vegas, video poker games paying at least 98 percent are available in virtually all the casinos.

But what if you are part of a captive audience?

I recently took an extended Mediterranean cruise where the ship had a casino that held about 25 to 30 video poker machines.  None of the games were progressive games where the payoff for a royal flush builds as the game is played.  To say these games were tight is an understatement.  Here are some examples.  (NOTE: The “Pay Table” column only shows the pays that are different from the standard “full pay” machine.)

As you can see from the “Return” column, most these games took almost $4 dollars for every $100 played through the game—a truly miserable return.

I simply will not play any video poker game that does not return at least 98 percent.  Actually, that is not quite true.  I will not play a video poker game that does not return at least 98.9 percent.  On progressive games, I will play once the payoff for a royal flush builds to the point that the game pays back 100 percent or more.  Since none of these conditions were met, I did not play video poker on this cruise.

While I recommend others follow my guidelines for play, not everyone is as serious about the game.  Many enjoy running a few dollars through just to see if they can get lucky.  They budget a certain amount (which they fully expect to lose) to video poker play.  Once that amount is gone, they are through playing.  They don’t become upset when they lose.  They don’t chase losses.  In short, they are okay with losing (though they may not like it) and have budgeted accordingly.  They are ecstatic when they win.

If you are one of these types of video poker player, it really doesn’t matter that much which of these miserable paying games you play.  They all return around $96 for every $100 played through.  The variance, however, is somewhat of a factor.  The higher the variance, the faster you could lose your bankroll.  However, the higher the variance the higher is the potential for a big hit.  The choice is up to you.  Would you rather play longer with fewer opportunities for a jackpot, or would you rather risk a very short time playing for a shot at several jackpots?  Only you can answer that question.  Just know that in the long run playing these games you will lose and lose big.  Have fun, but make sure you stay within your budget.  Don’t let a stingy cruise ship’s casino games spoil the rest of your cruise.

How does a more serious player handle lower return video poker games?  All the same rules about bankroll, chasing losses and discipline apply.  The difference is playing strategy.  Whether playing on truly miserable games such as those on cruise ships or playing 98, 99 or 100 percent plus games in casinos, playing the best strategy is critical to maximizing the hard-earned dollars you risk at video poker.  Remember, the returns shown are for perfect play.  If the proper strategy is not followed, the return will be even less.

There are many different software programs available that calculate the return and variance of multiple games as well as generate playing strategy.  If you are to get the most from your casino experience you must purchase one of these programs and use it.  All of the programs of which I am aware are initially set up for full pay games.  The pay tables can be changed to give you what you need for the specific games you will play.  Generally this capability is found in the “Options” section.  If you have trouble figuring out how to modify the pay tables and generate information for different paying games, try the “Help” option that almost all software programs have.

If you use the proper playing strategy from these programs, you will have more winning sessions and lose more slowly than without using the strategy.

Each player must decide if maximum play time or shots at more or bigger jackpots are what they prefer.  If maximum play time is the choice, choose low variance games.  If playing time is less important that hitting jackpots, higher variance games should be selected.  But return is still the major factor in playing longer with more chances for a jackpot.  It is important to find the games with the best return.  Decide for yourself if you are willing to give the casino what they will win over the long run on games playing less than 100 percent.  If you are, make sure you maintain the discipline to make your casino adventure’s fun and not catastrophic.

Video Poker Strategy – How Would You Play This Hand?

By Jerry “Stickman”

You are playing a full pay Jacks or Better game (9/6) with max coin-in of five quarters, you are dealt the following hand:

A_♦ K_♦ 10_♦5_♦ K_♠

How would you play it?

This is an interesting hand because it has several possibilities. It has three cards of a royal (A♦ K♦ T♦) four of a flush (A♦ K♦ T♦ 5♦) and a high pair (K♦ K♠).  Many gamblers would take the three of a royal, reaching for the thrill of a big win.  Still others may take four of a flush figuring there are nine out of 47 remaining cards (roughly one in five) that will give them a six-for-one payoff.

The correct answer is to hold the high pair.  The proper way to evaluate hands is by looking at the expected return for each possible hand.  In this case three of a royal (A♦ K♦ 10♦) has an expected return of 1.2868 credits per credit played.  The four of a flush has an expected return of 1.2766 credits per credit played.  The high pair outdoes both of these with an expected return of 1.5404 credits per credit played.  For this hand on a quarter machine with five coins in ($1.25) the paybacks (the amount paid minus amount played) are as follows:

Three of a Royal       $1.6085

Four of a Flush          $1.59575

High Pair                    $1.9255

While the three of a royal is slightly better than four of a flush, the high pair pays almost 32 cents more.  This is not a trivial amount when playing hundreds of hands for an hour.  By failing to make the correct choice you are costing yourself real money.

At Silverton in the Sundance Grill, there are late-night specials from midnight to 5 a.m.  Guests can order sliders for $0.99, ham steak and eggs for $3.95 and the “Wild Card Special,” which includes two farm fresh eggs, two pieces of bacon or sausage, hash browns, toast and jelly for $2.95.

From 3 p.m. to 6 p.m. at Carla Pellegrino’s Meatball Spot at Town Square, you can get her famous meatball sliders for $2.50.  There are also 2-for-1 cocktails available.  Special runs Monday-Thursday.

Known to be one of the best places in Las Vegas for prime rib, the Cortez Room at the Gold Coast now offer three “Royalty Cuts” choices.  You can get the 10-ounce queen cut for $16.00, the new 14-ounce prince cut for $20.00 and the massive bone-in 22-ounce king cut for $25.00.  Sides are priced at $5.00. You can also get 2-for-1 appetizers and drinks in the lounge from 5 p.m.-7 p.m.

At Cafe’ Cortez inside the El Cortez Hotel and Casino on Fremont street, you can get a half-pound hamburger and a 12-ounce beer for just $5.00.  This deal is available 24/7.  Other specials include a $7.95 prime rib dinner.  The special includes a salad, potato, veggie and a roll.  There is a “reduced menu” available from 10:30 p.m. until 7 a.m., Monday-Thursday.

Magnolia’s Cafe inside the Four Queens Hotel and Casino has two “A Touch of Italy” specials. From 4 p.m.-11p.m., you can get spaghetti and meatballs for $6.25 and meat lasagna for $6.95.  Magnolia’s also features an $11.95 rib eye steak dinner special for only $11.95 available 24/7.

There are a lot of “Terrible” deals at the hotel of the same name.

Buffet prices:

Breakfast:  7 a.m.-10 a.m. for $3.99
Lunch:  11 a.m. to 3 p.m. for $6.99
Dinner (Monday – Saturday):  4 p.m. to 9 p.m. for $8.99
Dinner (Sunday):  4 p.m. to 9 p.m. for $9.99
Champagne Brunch (Saturday & Sunday):  7 a.m. to 3 p.m. for $9.99

At the Cafe’, you can find these specials:

Endless Pasta Sundays:  All-you-can-eat spaghetti and meatballs served with garlic bread for only $5.99.

Go Wild for Breakfast:  Two eggs, two pancakes and two pieces of bacon for just $2.99.

There’s a great deal called “Wednesday Is Wingsday” at Hooters restaurant.  For only $6.99, you get a platter of wings and fries.  Another perk is that it’s served by a Hooter girl!

In Other News…

• Caesars Entertainment, for whom everyone had been singing praises to for not charging resort fees, finally jumped on that bandwagon.  As of March 1, Caesars is charging a resort fee of $10.00 at the Quad, $15.00  at Bally’s, $18.00 at Harrah’s, Flamingo and the Rio, $20.00 at Paris and Planet Hollywood and $25.00 at Caesars Palace.  The resort fees include free local call, free Internet and free admission to the spa.

• The rumor that Binion’s Steakhouse, or perhaps even the casino itself, might close this summer turned out to be just that—a rumor. “Neither the casino nor the steakhouse is closing” says Binion’s owner Terry Caudill.  “We have minor projects slated for the summer, but they’re all positive improvements and there will be no interruption in operations.”

• The Fremont Street Experience debuted a new light show called “Heart/Crazy on Vegas.”  It features footage from live performances by the legendary rock band Heart and features their hits Crazy on You, Magic Man and Barracuda.  FSE Light shows run daily on the hour from 7 p.m. to midnight.

• Million Dollar Quartet has opened at Harrah’s Las Vegas.  The smash-hit production is inspired by the extraordinary true life story of the fateful evening that brought Johnny Cash, Jerry Lee Lewis, Carl Perkins and Elvis Presley together for one of the greatest rock ‘n’ roll jam sessions in history.  The cast rocks out to such nostalgic hits such as Blue Suede Shoes, I Walk the Line, Great Balls of Fire, Sixteen Tons, Who Do You Love?, Fever, Folsom Prison Blues, Whole Lotta Shakin’ Goin’ On, Hound Dog and more.

Million Dollar Quartet performs in the Harrah’s Showroom Thursday through Tuesday at 7 p.m., with an additional performance at 9:30 p.m. on Thursday and Saturday.  Ticket prices range from $69 to $94 and are available at the Harrah’s Showroom box office, by visiting Ticketmaster.com or by calling (702) 369-5111.

• Ping Pang Pong, the wonderful Chinese/Cantonese restaurant at the Gold Coast and the subject of the “Hidden Treasure” portion of my March column has received accolades from Travel and Leisure magazine as one of the best Chinese restaurants in the U.S.  In addition to Ping Pang Pong, Karrie Hung and Kevin Wu also operate Noodle Exchange at the Gold Coast, which features an array of noodle and rice dishes, including its popular mini hot pots.

• Dick’s Last Resort inside Excalibur Hotel & Casino introduced new menu items that live up to its deliciously messy reputation.  Featuring iconic American dishes and buckets of barbeque grub, Dick’s Last Resort is the most unruly hangout on the Las Vegas Strip.  Daring food eaters are welcome to try The Drunken Bill challenge which serves up one pound of sloppy BBQ pulled pork, one pound of slow-smoked brisket and three tasty hot links all sandwiched between a crispy garlic hoagie roll and served with sides of onion rings and fries all for $36.  But it doesn’t stop there.  Challengers who finish the three-meat sandwich and two sides in less than 10 minutes will have their picture displayed on Dick’s Last Resort’s “Wall of Fame.”  For those unable to devour this meaty sandwich, their picture will be taken and put up on the “Wall of Shame.”  For more information or to make a reservation, call (702) 597-7991. Doors open at 11 a.m.  Guests under the age of 21 must be accompanied by an adult from 11 a.m. to 10 p.m.  Guests must be 21 years of age or older after 10 p.m.

• In a previous column, I mentioned “Drag Bingo” held at Circus-Circus. Well it looks like that event has had so much success that they are now offering Pajama Brunch Bingo.  Las Vegas PRIDE has announced an expansion of their bingo events with a Sunday Las Vegas PRIDE Pajama Bruch Bingo.  Ernie Yuen Las Vegas PRIDE President/Bingo Chairperson is spearheading the bi-monthly LGBT/”straight-friendly” event. “The guys and girls love to do brunch while sipping on Mimosa’s and Bloody Marys. Now, just add in bingo, some fun and festive entertainment, and you’ve got a party,” said Yuen.  For more info go to: www.lasvegaspride.org

• One of city’s longest-running free attractions is now just a memory.  Rio’s Show In The Sky marked its final performance on Saturday, March 30.  Show in the Sky has been on many visitors “must do” list for over 16 years.

• Rumors have surfaced that singer Olivia Newton-John is planning a Strip residency.  Also you can add Adele and Britney Spears to the residency list.

• Speaking about Adele, the Grammy-Award winning and multi-platinum recording artist has joined the cast of Frank Marino’s “Divas Las Vegas” at The Quad Resort & Casino.  Sammy Gonzales, who also impersonates Liza Minnelli and Mariah Carey, performs a disco mash-up of Adele’s top hits including Rolling in the Deep and Rumor Has It. Gonzales is joined on stage by some of the Strip’s hottest dancers dressed in disco-inspired costumes.  Frank Marino’s “Divas Las Vegas” performs six nights a week (dark Fridays) at 9:30 p.m.  Ticket prices range from $39 to $79 (plus tax and fees) and are available at The Quad box office, online at www.thequadlv.com or by calling (888) 777-7664.  For more information on Frank Marino, visit www.frankmarino.com.

• To celebrate 20 magical years of performing in Las Vegas, Penn & Teller have extended their show through 2018 at Rio All-Suite Hotel & Casino, making the twisted duo the longest-running headliners at the same property in Las Vegas history.  Penn & Teller landed in Las Vegas in 1993 and began a headlining engagement at Rio All-Suite Hotel & Casino in January 2001.  They perform in the Penn & Teller Theatre at Rio All-Suite Hotel & Casino nightly (dark Thursdays and Fridays) at 9 p.m. Tickets are $75 and $85 and $104.50 for VIP/Ampersand Seating, and are available by calling 702-777-7776.

Why you CAN’T make a living playing slots

By Frank Legato

In the 29 years I’ve been writing about slots and casinos, I’ve met many professional gamblers. Some of them write in this very magazine, offering an array of tips on how to get the edge at their particular games.

In all those years, though, I’ve never met a professional slot player. There is a good reason. There aren’t any.

The reason there are no professional slot players is the very nature of slot machine results—they are unpredictable. This fact about slot machines has prevented the formulation of any reliable strategy to beat the slots in anything resembling a consistent manner.

In the casino games for which there are professional players, the central feature of each game is that there is a way to reverse the inherent house advantage into a player advantage. In blackjack, card counting does that. In craps, the skill of a “controlled roll” does that. In video poker, it’s a matter of learning perfect strategy and finding a game like Deuces Wild with the pay table returning more than 100 percent, and adding cash-back awards on to that. In poker, where it’s player vs. player, consistent success is a matter of pure skill.

Not so with a slot machine. A slot machine is pure luck. Oh, the manufacturers can manipulate the payback percentages to a likely theoretical number, but even that cannot be counted on any given night. Even if a slot machine is programmed to return a theoretical 99 percent, that one percent house edge is enough to assure that the casino will eventually win—particularly since slots with a one or two percent house edge are only found in $25, $100 or higher denominations.

We’ve gone over this before, but if our reader mail is any indication, the way a slot machine works is a subject that is always worth repeating in this space.

When creating the game program for a slot machine, the programmer maps out the symbols that will be included in what is known as the slot’s “virtual reels.” The virtual reel system, first patented in 1984, is a computer simulation that effectively removes any restriction on how many symbols can be included on each reel. Physically, each reel has 22 spots for symbols or blanks—known as “stops” in the trade, since they are the spots on which each reel stops. Virtual reels can have as many stops as the programmer wants, so the odds can be manipulated to make large jackpots less likely.

Although five-reel, multi-line video slots work the same way, the system is easiest to understand using a traditional three-reel game as a model. Each of the 22 symbols on each reel is assigned a number by the programmer. Then, the programmer duplicates some or all of the symbols—reel spot No. 23, 24 and so on. More numbers are assigned to the lower-paying symbols and the blanks; fewer numbers (or a single number) are assigned to the high jackpot symbols.

Once each symbol and blank has been assigned numbers, the set of numbers is linked with a random number generator (RNG)—a software program that simply generates all the numbers in the set in a random sequence.

That last part is key—it is a random sequence that cannot be predicted by the player. The RNG is constantly running any time the slot machine is powered up, generating more than a hundred numbers per second. When the player presses the spin button or pulls the handle, the computer freezes the numbers generated at that instant, and converts them into the corresponding reel stops, creating the result of the spin.

In the old days, players could take the value of each possible reel result and, using the constant of 22 reel stops, calculate the odds and probable frequency of certain combinations—when a jackpot would be “due.” With the virtual reel system, the entire set of results will have been generated several times between spins. There is no way for a player to know where the virtual reels will stop, and there is no strategy that will assure a player of consistent success.

That doesn’t mean it’s impossible to win. Particularly in the higher denominations, maintaining a bankroll to wait out the odds can mean successful slot sessions now and then. You just can’t predict the “now” or the “then.” That means you could be hot one night and cold for three weeks.

It’s simply not a reliable living. And it’s why, no matter what you’ve been told by someone, a slot machine is luck and pure luck.

Here’s hoping yours is good.

This Just In…

From the “new places to play” front: On March 4, Horseshoe Casino Cincinnati opened to the public, after thousands of players stood in line for hours. The new casino has all the standard Caesars Entertainment amenities, including the Total Rewards players club, along with 2,000 slot machines, 31 poker tables and 87 other table games.

Quick Tip

There’s no “payout switch.”  Despite repeated explanations such as the above, many players still believe the casino can “flip a switch” to make you start losing if you’re winning too much on a slot machine.

It doesn’t happen.  Ninety-nine-point-nine percent of the slot machines out on the floors are still analog devices. That means they are self-contained computers that are designed at the factory with all game aspects—including payback percentage—burned on an internal program chip—an unalterable program chip. Once the game’s on the floor, a door has to be opened and a chip changed to alter the payback percentage, and a regulatory official has to be present in most of the major jurisdictions.

Even the new server-based games that can be changed from a remote location—they are still in the experimental stage, for the most part—cannot be changed while someone is playing. The new regulations set up for these games require them to be idle for a period before anything can be changed. Slot managers don’t watch you so they can lower percentages if you win. Slot managers watch their daily, weekly and monthly revenue, and change out entire games that are not earning.

So don’t worry about a payout switch. Just have fun.

Your opponent’s chip stack speaks volumes about their game

By Jim Feist

April in Paris? How about April in Las Vegas!  With all due respect to Europe’s famed City of Lights, there’s much more going on for sports fans and card enthusiasts in my own town, Las Vegas.  The basketball tournament is winding down, one of the most hectic and exciting months for bettors, and the NBA stretch run is gearing up. While basketball is a battle between guards and big men, size can also be a key factor at the poker tables, although it’s not about girth or weight.  Rather, it’s the chip stack your opponent has—or doesn’t have.

You can learn a lot about your opponents, starting with the size of their poker chip stack.  Generally speaking, you’ll observe that the best poker players have the larger stacks while the weaker players have a less impressive arsenal.  People will often boast about how good a player they are, but the real test is not the size of their mouth but the size of that stack of chips.

Why?  Since poker is not simply about getting the best cards, the better players win more regularly.  It’s about strategy, observing your opponents tendencies, knowing when to back off, when to attack and how to manage your hands and money.  The skill level for poker is enormous and the superior players will have the larger bankroll.  Weaker players aren’t as skilled and lose more, so their bankrolls and chip stacks will generally be smaller.  A common mistake that many novice players make is that they play at limits that are either too high for their bankroll, or play at a higher limit where the competition is steep.  Temper that ego and know your limits, little fish.  Rest assured, the big fish will welcome you to their dinner table with open mouths and devour you.

There will be times when a good player is on a losing streak and a bad player gets on a hot run, but generally stack size serves as an effective indicator of whether you are up against a sharpie or a weak fish. And it doesn’t take years of practice to make this observation.  As soon as you sit or even approach the table, you can see stack sizes.  An astute player utilizes those valuable seconds looking for a seat to make an assessment of who they will be up against.

This is especially true at higher limits, which requires a larger bankroll to participate.  The size of an opponent’s stack is going to be your first impression.  After the cards are dealt you will be gaining more information about those opponents and how they play, which may mesh or differ from that original impression.  But the point is, don’t wait until then to assess the other players.  Make a mental index-card even before the first hand is dealt.

Now, a player with a small stack falls into one of two categories.  One would be a machine-gunner, someone who fires away constantly playing a lot of hands.  Their stack is low because they lose more and don’t know when to cut their losses or properly manage their funds.

The second is the kind of player who just moved up from a lower limit game.  This player is likely just the opposite; a bit gun-shy and tight with their chips because they’re afraid of losing anymore.  With either kind of player you can use this information to your advantage.  Play aggressively against the gun-shy player as they will fold or back down more, but don’t bluff as they will ride a good hand, and attack the machine-gunner as they are probably prone to emotion and errors.

One exception is when their stack size shrinks so low that they are close to getting wiped out.  They’ll likely play super-cautious waiting for a great hand.  This is the perfect time to go on the offensive against them before and on the flop.  Attempting to steal the blinds can be very effective as they pull back like a frightened turtle.

For instance, on the flop attack first and then back off if your opponent either bets first or raises.  Since they are in survival-mode they likely aren’t bluffing which is subtly giving away part of what they’re holding.  There are multiple opportunities to play aggressively against opponents with small stacks by sizing them up correctly.

Many people think that basketball success is all about having big men in the low post, but the fact is diminutive guard play can often dominate college basketball tournament play, with small colleges like Butler and George Mason making recent trips to the Final Four.  And in poker, observing stack size provides insight into who you’re playing against, how they play and what they might be holding—even before the next card is flopped.

Las Vegas, NV

A visit to Las Vegas can be a thrilling adventure.  A visit to Las Vegas’ Planet Hollywood can be downright decadent.  One of the hottest properties on the Strip, Planet Hollywood combines the glamour and indulgence of Hollywood with the glitz and sex appeal of Sin City, tailored for guests who want to step into the shoes of Hollywood A-listers—if only for a couple for days.  Among its many offerings, visitors will find exciting gaming, star-worthy accommodations, shopping by the mile and just about every other indulgence one can imagine.

The casino is exhilarating, delivering on all of its promise to excite, entertain, and—hopefully—reward.  Players will find a full mix of table games like blackjack, craps, and baccarat, as well as a variety of the popular casino poker games including let it ride and Caribbean stud.   There’s a powerful assortment of slots, about 1,200 in all, ranging from penny video slots to high-limit reels and everything in between. Planet Hollywood’s slots include single and multi-line video poker as well as popular progressive games like Wheel of Fortune, Megabucks, Monopoly and more.

If you’re a poker player by nature, Planet Hollywood’s poker room is home to 11 tables and one of the largest progressive jackpots in the world, MEGAbeat.  The jackpot starts at $200,000 and could grow to an epic $1,000,000!  Tournament junkies will appreciate the four daily poker events (10 a.m., 1 p.m., 4 p.m. and 7 p.m.) with buy-ins as low as $70 and $1,000 guaranteed to the winner.  Players can also test their skills at the cash tables including $1-2 and $2-5 no limit Texas hold’em, as well as $4-8 limit.

Where to Stay

Planet Hollywood features hotel accommodations with charm and creature comforts fit for celebrities or Hollywood buffs.   Every one of the rooms and suites features one-of-a-kind movie memorabilia set against a backdrop of stylish, modern luxury.  Rooms range in size and grandeur, beginning with the standard “Hollywood Hip King” which offers signature Hollywood-themed ambiance and furnishings.  If you’re looking for a great view that’s within budget, opt for the “Hip Street View” room, which features a brilliant view of the Strip, or for a more sedate atmosphere book a “Mountain Luxury” room which offers an additional 100 square feet of space and stunning views of the nearby mountain range.

For a little extra elbow room, Planet Hollywood Boulevard Suites are 1,400 square feet of Hollywood glamour.  Gorgeously appointed and designed as much for relaxing as entertaining, boulevard suites feature a conversation pit with wrap around seating, a bumper pool table or a foosball table,  and a wet bar with its own refrigerator.  When the day is done, retire to the large bedroom which features a king Sheraton Sweet Sleeper bed for the ultimate in comfort.  If you really want some breathing room, book an Apex Suite, where mid-century modern, meets postmodern, meets sophisticated adult play room. The Apex Suite is a more opulent version of the Boulevard Suite, with everything you’ll find there plus an additional 500 square feet and spectacular view of the Las Vegas Strip

Sidebar: PetStay Resort

Travelling with a furry friend other than your husband?  PetStay Resort rooms feature the style and comfort of a deluxe room plus an additional 110 square feet with carpeted bathrooms, his and her sinks, and an executive workstation. The PetStay Resort rooms come with a welcome treat and a dog food/water bowl. Guests traveling with their dog will be asked to fill out a waiver accepting responsibility for any damage and/or cleaning charges that may be incurred. Up to two dogs per room are permitted and each dog must weigh less than 50 pounds.

Dining Galore

While Planet Hollywood may have cultivated a more youthful, party atmosphere, discerning guests of all ages in search of true culinary delights need not go wanting.  Planet Hollywood boasts some of the finest dining in Las Vegas, along with more than a few casual eateries and snack shops.

• Strip House.  Planet Hollywood’s most acclaimed restaurant, Strip House Steakhouse delivers on everything from dishes to décor, creating a Las Vegas steakhouse unlike any other. The menu has been crafted to excite the senses, with prime cuts of beef charred to perfection coupled with signature side dishes such as truffle creamed spinach and goose fat potatoes.  (Hint: Save room for dessert and indulge in the famed 24-Layer Chocolate Cake.)   Part of the experience at Strip House is the restaurant’s sumptuous red decor, moody lighting and vintage black and white photographs. These rare images of captivating females from the original 1900’s Studio Manasse collection embrace an era of decadence and seduction.
• Koi.  Koi Las Vegas is the premiere fine dining Japanese restaurant that’s been one of the hottest spots on the LA and New York dining scenes. A celebrity favorite, Koi has received praise for its Japanese-inspired cuisine with California accents.  The menu features a variety of savory cooked dishes, traditional sushi and sashimi, as well as creative rolls.  It is perhaps best known for its signature dishes: crispy rice topped with spicy tuna, Kobe beef filet mignon and toban-yaki.
• Gordon Ramsay BurGR.  A can’t miss for the burger lover in search of something less ordinary, the Gordon Ramsay BurGR menu takes the traditional burger, fries and milkshake comfort food combination to an entirely new level.  With selections like pork belly bao buns, sweet potato fries with vanilla powdered sugar and pudding shakes—a heavenly combination of thick milkshake and silky pudding—this isn’t your typical burger joint.  Beef patties sizzle over an open flame fueled by hard woods, creating a more complex and powerful flavor. Add to that the signature curry ketchup and chipotle ketchup, and you’ve turned something so familiar into something truly remarkable.

At the Pleasure Pools

After you’ve had a chance to gobble some of the resort’s tastiest delights, make your way to the picturesque pools for an experience that is uniquely Vegas.  Planet Hollywood has created one of the ultimate poolside retreats, appropriately named the Pleasure Pools.  At this watery Xanadu, guests socialize poolside all the while basking in the revelry surrounding them—top DJs, two separate pool decks, 15 cabanas with poolside bottle service, daybeds, two pool bars, a pool café and more.

For those willing to embrace the leisurely decadence, there’s no better way to enjoy the Pleasure Pools than in VIP style with a cabana.  Amenities include: Fan, Flat-screen television, two lounge chairs, two person daybed, refrigerator stocked with bottled water, one bottle of liquor with three mixers, a basket of fruits and nuts, personal cabana host and cocktail server.  Seven Stars Total Rewards members receive a complimentary bottle of champagne with their full day cabana rental

Shopping & Nightlife

If shop ‘til you drop is your motto, at Planet Hollywood you’ll have the chance to do just that.  With 1.2 miles of retail excitement, there’s more than enough at Miracle Mile Shops.  Featuring 170 specialty stores, Miracle Mile Shops includes live entertainment at the Harmon Theater, Saxe Theater and V Theater, plus dining at 15 restaurants ranging from quick and casual to gourmet.  Shops at Planet Hollywood Las Vegas include coveted brands like GUESS, GAP, DC Shoes, Urban Outfitters, Steve Madden, H&M, White House/Black Market and more. Restaurants include Pampas Brazilian Grill, Panda Express, La Salsa Cantina, Todai Sushi Buffet and more.

For something a little more risqué, check out the newest Las Vegas nightlife hotspot, Gallery Nightclub.  Gorgeous performance dancers styled in voyeuristic fashions perform nightly, enticing and exciting guests. Candlelit glass fireplaces are scattered throughout the venue, creating a sexy and mysterious glow in all the rooms.  Provocative design and erotic revelry converge to create a uniquely aesthetic Las Vegas nightclub experience. Oversized frames adorn the walls, showcasing original photography depicting voyeuristic imagery as an erotic backdrop for guests. State-of-the-art sound and lighting blanket every room of this Las Vegas nightclub, where world-renowned DJs spin intoxicating music until the sun rises.

Finally for the ultimate in dignified debauchery, consider PEEPSHOW, Las Vegas’ only celebrity striptease spectacular.  PEEPSHOW is a sophisticated, highly stylized production accompanied by a sizzling ensemble of sexy girls, showstoppers from film, TV, Broadway and beyond.  PEEPSHOW stars Coco Austin, best known for her TV series Ice Loves Coco. Combining the Las Vegas entertainment staple—the topless revue—and the power of celebrity, the over-the-top PEEPSHOW Las Vegas is something even Sin City has never seen before.

Now that’s saying something.

Finally, Planet Hollywood’s newest entertainer-in-residence CeeLo Green enchants audiences with his unique vision, LOBERACE, an electrifying journey playing off Las Vegas entertainment icon Liberace. As ringmaster of the spectacle, CeeLo takes fans on a colorful ride through decades of music, stopping at legendary moments in time from Prince and Blue Magic to The Rolling Stones, the disco era, new wave and beyond.

The production combines CeeLo’s flamboyant sense of style and over-the-top creativity with his soulful voice covering some of his favorite music in a just for Vegas show.  Kinetic and exotic, LOBERACE is part concert and part dance party, with mind-twisting magic, sexy showgirls and a larger-than-life wardrobe that will out-glam anything seen to date from this Muppet-ized, sequin-styled performer.

Las Vegas, NV

Every year, millions of awestruck visitors stroll by the MGM Grand’s signature gateway, a 45-foot, 100,000-pound bronze lion statue.   Perched atop a 25-foot pedestal and framed by LED screens, water fountains, Atlas-themed statues and lush landscaping, this yawning portal sets the stage for a most memorable Las Vegas experience.  Once inside the lobby, guests are instantly enveloped by the thrill and excitement of one of the city’s most dynamic resorts. Three large high-definition viewing screens mounted behind the front desk showcase today’s hottest music videos in addition to a dedicated social media wall, allowing guests to participate in real-time polls, contests and Twitter conversations.

As for gaming, MGM Grand offers a staggering 170,000 square-feet of it, featuring a variety of table games, video poker and slots.  Meanwhile, the poker room places guests in the heart of one of MGM Grand’s most dynamic gaming environments—a 4,000-square-foot room featuring 22 tables of smoke-free, non-stop poker action.  Professionals and amateurs alike have the opportunity to test their skills via daily tournaments and a variety of games including seven-card stud, Texas hold’em, Omaha hi-lo split and no-limit Texas hold’em.

The state-of-the-art 5,300-square-foot Race & Sports Book features three big screens, 36 60-inch plasma televisions, eight 42-inch plasmas, six electronic display boards and 17 separate race and sports betting counters. Each of the 49 seats has its own 15-inch color television, allowing guests to access a network of racing and sporting events from around the globe.  The sports book is the first in the industry to offer exclusive “Skyboxes” for its guests.  Four Skyboxes, ranging in size from 300-325 square feet, are equipped with the latest technology including plasma televisions, surround-sound audio and a CD system. The Skyboxes offer a special second-level view of all the excitement and comfortably host eight to 10 guests.

Rooms and Suites and Lofts—Oh My

MGM Grand is home to a remarkable collection of guest rooms, suites and lofts with views of the surrounding mountains and the Las Vegas skyline. Following a recent $160 million room remodel, the 3,570 guest rooms and 642 suites in the hotel’s main tower feature warm, yet vibrant designs and color palettes with contemporary furnishings, creating comfortable and functional spaces within a sophisticated setting. For guests seeking additional space for entertaining and relaxing, the resort offers a variety of one and two-bedroom suites, several of which include expansive terraces with sweeping views of the famed Las Vegas Strip.

SKYLOFTS at MGM Grand offers the quintessential loft environment harmonizing design, décor, ambiance and unparalleled vistas. SKYLOFTS is a private sanctuary of sleek, elegant two-story accommodations located on the top two floors of MGM Grand. Each of the 51 lofts features 24-foot, floor-to-ceiling windows providing dramatic views of the world’s most famous skyline from every angle. Ranging in size from 1,400 to 6,000 square feet, the lofts are available in one-, two- and three-bedroom floor plans.

The Signature at MGM Grand is a luxurious non-gaming, non-smoking hotel, just moments away from the full MGM Grand experience.  Set within three distinct towers each featuring 576 suites, this serene retreat and intimate setting focuses on personalized service. A gated entrance, elegant lobby, 24-hour concierge and dedicated staff provide an unparalleled level of comfort, privacy and intimacy.

SIDEBAR: STAY WELL Rooms

A first on the Las Vegas Strip, MGM Grand offers a collection of STAY WELL rooms and suites. Developed by New York-based Delos, these rooms combine the best of medical science and technology to enhance guests’ physical and mental well-being during their stay. The 42 new rooms contain more than a dozen healthy features including aromatherapy, wake-up light therapy and Vitamin C-infused shower water allowing guests to take their healthy lifestyles on the road. All STAY WELL rooms and suites are located in a dedicated wing on the 14th floor of the hotel’s main tower.

Specialty Restaurants at MGM Grand

With more AAA Diamond award-winning restaurants under one roof than any other hotel in the world, MGM Grand offers culinary choices to satisfy just about any palate.

Perhaps the pinnacle of fine dining, Joël Robuchon Restaurant features traditional French cuisine in a setting reminiscent of Paris in the 1930s. Guests choose from a variety of tasting menus or order à la carte as they experience the elegant main or garden-designed dining room. It has been said that Chef Robuchon’s cooking is so striking in its vibrancy and precision as to render a meal memorable down to its last detail.

James Beard Award-winning chef Tom Colicchio elevates the definition of a steakhouse at Craftsteak.  Featuring items from small family farms, artisan producers and day-boat fishermen, the menu captures the true flavor and essence of each product. The à la carte menu includes a selection of signature vegetables, potatoes, mushrooms, grains and beans in addition to steakhouse favorite side dishes.

Shibuya redefines the Japanese dining experience by combining traditional ingredients with modern techniques and offering an unrivaled sake cellar. Shibuya’s full-spectrum Japanese menu is delivered via three distinct dining experiences including Sushi, Teppan and à la carte specialties—each in separate, yet adjoining, dining areas.

For a touch of heat, Diego combines the bold vibrancy of traditional Mexican cuisine with sophisticated sensibility for a thoroughly modern dining experience.  The interior embraces the vivid colors of Mexico’s cultural landscape—colors that enliven the murals and paintings of the country’s extraordinary modern artists. Diego’s fusion of traditional Mexican aesthetic and sleek design finesse extends to its menu. Creations take cues from the street stalls of urban Mexico, the vendors of market towns and the regional flair of home-fire cooking. From a mobile salsa cart to frozen Margarita Popsicles and Tequila Sorbet Shooters, Diego offers an unexpected twist.

SIDEBAR: Nightclub Spotlight: Tabu

A hot spot since its inception, MGM Grand’s boutique nightclub, Tabú, has elevated the Las Vegas nightlife scene to a new level of style. With its distinctive design and special effects technology, Tabú has sparked a nightlife trend capturing the attention of people worldwide. Club goers spend their evenings alongside Tabú’s sexy model servers who deliver signature cocktails at the Sin City hot spot. The venue’s go-go dancers are on hand every weekend to get the party started and keep guests on the dance floor.

Entertainment of all kinds

Showcasing the world’s top performers and special events, MGM Grand has established itself as one of the world’s premier entertainment destination with a variety of offerings.

• KÀ by Cirque du Soleil.  KÀ, a creation of Cirque du Soleil, is a gravity-defying production featuring a powerfully emotive soundtrack that enhances the innovative blend of acrobatic feats, Capoeira dance, puppetry, projections and martial arts. KÀ tells the epic saga of separated twins, a boy and a girl, who embark on a perilous journey to fulfill their linked destinies.
• Brad Garrett’s Comedy Club.  Award-winning comedian and actor Brad Garrett brings his comedic styling to MGM Grand with the opening of his eponymous comedy club. The intimate 250-seat venue provides Garrett, as well as legendary comedians and the next generation of comics, a place to call “home” in Las Vegas.
• MGM Grand Garden Arena.  MGM Grand Garden Arena is a 16,800-seat special events center home to concerts, championship boxing, nationally televised award shows and premier sporting events. In 2013, the MGM Grand Garden Arena will welcome the NCAA Pac-12 men’s basketball tournament in a three-year partnership.

SIDEBAR: CSI: The Experience

In need of a little cerebral challenge?  CSI: The Experience provides guests the opportunity to play the role of a crime scene investigator. While learning scientific principles and real investigative techniques, visitors work with two state-of-the-art crime labs in an attempt to solve one of three crime scene mysteries. With input from investigators from the television show, guests formulate a hypothesis, validate their findings based on scientific evidence and try to crack the case.  From DNA and f ingerprint analysis to forensic anthropology and toxicology, visitors are captivated by hands-on science in a multi-media environment with dazzling special effects.

Feel Good, Look Great

Whether in Las Vegas on business or pleasure, guests can indulge at the resort’s 30,000-square-foot Grand Spa. Featuring saunas, steam rooms, whirlpools, relaxation lounges and 26 treatment rooms, the Grand Spa offers a place of harmony and deep rejuvenation.  Spa treatments include a variety of skin, body care, nail and massage therapies, including signature treatments such as the two-hour exclusive Dreaming Ritual. The Dreaming Ritual incorporates Australian Aboriginal massage techniques, a hair mask as well as hand and foot treatments into an experience designed to rejuvenate body, mind and soul.

At the nearby Cristophe Salon, guests are taken through a series of indulgent beauty steps, including a relaxing deep-scalp massage, by an internationally trained team of stylists and colorists. Special features include bridal and girlfriend packages offering champagne, decadent desserts, spa treatments, hair and makeup services plus group photos for everlasting memories. The After Hours Bachelorette Package provides exclusive two-hour use of Cristophe Salon for parties of five or more.

Biloxi, MS

The jewel of Mississippi, Beau Rivage originally opened its doors in March, 1999.  But owing to an unfortunate display of Mother Nature’s fury, Hurricane Katrina wrought havoc and destruction on the entire Gulf Coast area—and Beau Rivage was not spared.  Undaunted by the devastation, Beau Rivage regrouped and was reborn in 2006, perhaps an even better incarnation than its $800 million predecessor.

Rising 32 stories and measuring an impressive 3.2 million square feet, the new Beau Rivage is the tallest building in Mississippi, boasting 1,740 guest rooms and suites, a completely redesigned casino floor, 11 tempting restaurants, four lounges and bars, 12 retails stores, a spa, saloon, pool and convention center.   The property’s enhanced architecture and interior design offers a contemporary ambiance infused with the resort’s signature Southern elegance.  Visitors are greeted by nature’s beauty and refinement as they walk through the enhanced open atrium and lobby that features thousands of plants and flowers.

The guest rooms—which include 95 luxury suites—afford patrons everything one would expect from an AAA Four Diamond resort award winner.  In keeping with the resort’s southern-contemporary attitude, rooms offer a modern interior design scheme warmly dressed in cherry-wood furniture, original artwork, and bathrooms with Grecian marble flooring and surfaces.  Other amenities include 32-inch LCD flat-screen TVs, double pillow-top mattresses and triple sheeting, lighted closets with full-length mirrored doors, a writing desk, and high-speed Internet access. This is all topped-off by stunning views of the Mississippi Gulf or Back Bay.

What about the gaming?  The resort’s 85,000-square-foot casino offers 93 table games, 2,100 slot machines, 230 video poker games, and a 16-table poker room.  The resort also offers a luxurious high-roller salon that includes 10 blackjack tables and an interchangeable table for roulette or baccarat; a high-limit slot room with 100 slot machines; an exclusive buffet and bar lounge; dedicated cashier services; private restrooms and round-the-clock concierge service.

SIDEBAR: March Mania $100,000 Slot Tournaments

Score a slum dunk at the $100,000 March Mania Slot Tournament each Wednesday at Beau Rivage. Forty winners per day mean increased chances of winning big!  Earn 250 slot base points on tournament days to enter then register to play. Participants play one five minute session for a chance to be one of 40 winners that will share the $25,000 Freeplay prize pool that day.

END SIDEBAR

At Beau Rivage’s newly designed smoke-free poker room, match wits against beginners and professionals who share a common love for the thrill of the game. With high ceilings and an open floor plan it is one of the most spacious and comfortable in the South. The room offers 16 tables dealing a variety of popular games such as Texas Hold’em, Seven Card Stud and Omaha High Low Split.  For bigger action, pull up a chair in the High Stakes area where No-Limit Texas Hold’em and Pot-Limit Omaha let you really go all in.

SIDEBAR: Spring Break Poker Classic

Poker action returns to MGM Resorts International’s Beau Rivage in Biloxi with the Spring Break Poker Classic March 21 – March 31. The tournament features 14 events with buy-ins ranging from $100 to $1,000.  There will also be nightly No-Limit Hold’em tournaments with $80 + $20 entry and daily single table satellites with buy-ins from $80 to $360. Event #1, $300 + $40 No Limit Hold’em, kicks things off with a $100,000 guaranteed prize pool March 22-24.

“The Spring Break Poker Classic is the first tournament in our series of six major poker events we host at our MGM Resort International’s Mississippi resorts each year.  The series begins at Beau Rivage and tournaments alternate with Gold Strike Casino Resort in Tunica with three tournaments being held at each property,” said George P. Corchis, Jr., President and Chief Operating Officer of MGM Resorts International’s Regional Operations.

Spring Break Poker Classic registration begins at 6 p.m. on March 21 and will be open from 9 AM to 9 PM daily. “MGM Resorts Mississippi’s six high-stake poker tournaments provide an opportunity for poker enthusiasts of all levels to compete in a variety of events at both Beau Rivage in Biloxi and Gold Strike in Tunica,” said Johnny Grooms, Beau Rivage Poker Room Manager. “The tournaments grow in buy-ins and the series will culminate with the third annual Million Dollar Heater main event held at Beau Rivage in January 2014.”

END SIDEBAR—-

Dining, Bars, and Nightlife

Not only does Beau Rivage offer southern charm, unsurpassed creature comforts and exceptional gaming, they’re certainly no slouch when it comes to dining, dancing, and partying the night away.  In fact, they offer some of the best eateries and nightlife in the entire region.

• BR Prime:  Beau Rivage’s signature steak and seafood restaurant features prime grade steaks, fresh seafood and an extensive 3,500-bottle wine collection.
• Jia:  Contemporary Asian cuisine including a variety of soups, salads, noodles and regional specialties from Thailand, Japan, China, Vietnam and Hong Kong.
• Memphis Q Smokehouse & Barbeque:  Hot barbeque, house-smoked chicken, fried delta catfish and deliciously tempting Southern desserts.
• The Buffet:  A wide variety of cuisines, specialty foods and Southern favorites.
• Breeze Bar:  Exotic cocktails and specialty drinks at the heart of the casino.
• Coast:  Energetic mix of cool people and some of the best live entertainment in town.
• EIGHT75:  Ranked one of Nightclub & Bar Magazine’s top 100 establishments in the country, EIGHT75 features classic cocktails and signature martinis in a contemporary, plush environment.

SIDEBAR: March at Coast

Sham-ROCK Jameson party at Coast – Saturday, March 17th

Spend St. Patrick’s Day partying at Coast Nightclub. Sham-ROCK $5 specialty drink menu from 10:00 p.m. – 1:00 a.m. includes Guinness on draft, Jameson, Irish Car Bombs and Luck Bombs.

Basketball Madness – Tuesday, March 19, 2013 – Monday, April 8, 2013

Prepare your bracket and watch how it all unfolds during Basketball Madness at Coast. $8.50 Bacardi Buckets, $12.50 buckets of five domestic beers (Bud, Bud Light, Miller Lite and Coors Light) and $15 tailgate appetizer sampler including hot wings, fried mushrooms, cheese sticks, potato skins, chili cheese fries and nachos.

Ladies Always Free at Coast Nightclub

Ladies receive complimentary admission on Fridays and Saturdays. Ladies night continues Wednesday and Thursday nights from 10:00 p.m. -1:00 a.m. with ladies receiving complimentary admission and free well cocktails, domestic beer and house wine between 10:00 p.m. – 1:00 a.m.

END SIDEBAR
If you’re in the mood for a bit of pampering, pay a visit to the 20,000-square-foot Beau Rivage Spa and Salon, where guests enjoy personalized treatments ranging from wraps and therapeutic massages to facials or even eyelash extensions.  They offer an expanded treatment menu with innovative options such as the Caviar & Pearl Facial, Youthful Recovery Epidermabrasion and Xtreme Eyelashes.

Meanwhile, the Spa’s solarium, which is designed in a living room setting, delivers the comforts of home while inspiring the feelings of serenity and calm.  All told, the spa boasts some 70 trained professionals including massage therapists, aestheticians, cosmetologists and hair stylists all on hand to cater to nearly every whim.

SIDEBAR: Mississippi Gulf Resort Classic at Fallen Oak
The Mississippi Gulf Resort Classic returns to Fallen Oak for the fourth straight year, March 18-24, 2013. The event is expected to attract 81 professional golfers who will compete for a $1.6 million prize purse, with $240,000 and 240 Charles Schwab Cup points going to the winner. Last year’s winner Fred Couples will be back to defend his title as will the 2011 MGRC champion Tom Lehman.

Designed by legendary course architect Tom Fazio and exclusively for guests of Beau Rivage Resort & Casino, Fallen Oak raises the bar for luxury resort golf in this region. The 18-hole, par-72 championship layout unfolds in a majestic, almost cinematic, invitation to all who love the game. Hailed by Golf Magazine as No. 26 of the “Top 100 Courses You Can Play,” Fallen Oak has taken its place among the nation’s finest courses.

END SIDEBAR—-

Summerlin, NV

A beacon 10 miles off the Strip, Red Rock Casino, Resort, and Spa is a trendy alternative to its urban counterparts, affording travelers the chance to be a part of the Vegas lifestyle—and enjoy a billion dollar luxury resort—without feeling banished to the boondocks.  Sprawling on some 70 acres in Summerlin near the majestic Red Rock mountains (hence the name) Red Rock Casino is a superb example of a 21^st century homage to the elegant desert oasis resorts of the 1950s.

The pinnacle of the Station Casinos luxury properties, the fresh, contemporary, desert-modern architecture is enhanced by the finest materials including Venetian plaster walls and gold-leafed ceilings, creating an atmosphere of comfortable elegance.   Every detail, from the 3.1 million crystals in the colossal chandeliers to the miles-long stretch of onyx-adorned walls, is an inviting blend of warmth and contemporary design punctuated by rich reds, golds and browns—a color palette inspired by the nearby mountain range.

800 guest rooms and suites are available, from a 525 square foot standard room up to the mammoth 6,500 square foot penthouse-level suite, making the guest rooms at Red Rock some of the largest and most lavish in Las Vegas. Standard room features include 42” high-definition plasma televisions, Bose sound system with iPod connectivity, guest robes and slippers, in-room martini bar and a 15” LCD television in the bathroom.

SIDEBAR: Crème de la crème

There’s something about a room that bears its own name.  It just has to be good.  If you’re in the mood to splurge, Red Rock’s penthouse-level suites perched on the top floor of the hotel tower were designed to offer the ultimate in luxury.

One 80: Named for the breathtaking 180-degree view that includes both the iconic Strip and the majestic Red Rock mountain range, the 6,500 square foot suite is designed in the style of a contemporary ultra-lounge. The suite includes an expansive entertaining area, complete with a massive bar, 103-inch plasma-screen TV, billiards table, dining table and multiple seating areas; a large terrace that includes a Jacuzzi-style hot tub and rotating sofa; and two bedrooms with adjoining bathrooms and private balconies.

Canyon: Designed to be a cool and refreshing natural antidote to the heat of the surrounding desert, floor-to-ceiling windows in every room of the 4,000-square-foot suite provide majestic views of Red Rock Canyon, its namesake.  Awash in shades of green, the suite offers a spacious entertaining area featuring a rotating sofa, large bar, dining table and seating area; two bedrooms each with an in-room Jacuzzi-style bathtub, adjoining bathroom and private balcony; and an exclusive massage room for spa treatments.

END SIDEBAR—-

A Gambler’s Paradise

While not everyone comes to Vegas to gamble, most of us will eventually succumb to the lure of the games. Just as you would expect to find in a gaming property that made Casino Player’s Top 25 list, Red Rock’s luxurious resort amenities include a stunning casino floor packed with everything a gambler could crave.  This includes:

• 3,000 slot/video poker machines.
• 60 table games including blackjack, baccarat, craps, poker, roulette and more.
• 206-seat race and sports book, with 96-foot video wall.
• 20-table smoke-free poker room.
• 600 seat bingo hall with separate smoking and non-smoking sections.
• 20-seat keno lounge.
• Private high-limit room.

While you’re there, don’t forget to sign up for Red Rock’s “Boarding Pass” a free guest rewards program that features cash back, 3X points and may be used at all Station Casinos properties.

Food For Thought

Starting to get a little hungry?  Red Rock features nine restaurants and a food court with diverse fare to satisfy everyone’s cravings and budget. Dining options include:

• T-bones Chophouse and Lounge: An upscale steakhouse featuring oversized dry-aged prime steaks, bone-in meats, fresh fish and an extensive wine list.
• Terra Rossa Italian Restaurant: Offers authentic Italian foods in an upscale environment.
• Hachi: A contemporary Japanese and sushi restaurant that infuses traditional cuisine with various cultures from around the world.
• Yard House: Features American fusion fare and one of the world’s largest selections of draft beer—130 different taps to choose from.
• LBS: A Burger Joint: A casual rock n’ roll dining experience that serves up gourmet burgers without a gourmet attitude.
• Feast Buffet: Offerings from around the world to suit every taste.  Food stations include: Mexican, Chinese, Italian, American and sinfully delicious desserts.

Beautiful rooms, state-of-the-art gaming, unsurpassed dining—now it’s time for a little fun.  Red Rock offers numerous bars, lounges and outdoor venues featuring an eclectic variety of entertainment that includes everything from its own cinema to concerts under the stars.

Begin by cooling off from the unrelenting desert sun with a dip in the resort’s famous Sandbar Pool.  Situated on four acres, the aquatic wonderland includes a main pool with an interactive fountain feature, a private pool area, cabanas, six wading pools, an exciting poolside gaming environment featuring blackjack tables, a café and poolside beverage service.  This area is also home to the largest open-air nightclub in the city, Sandbar Pool Backyard, hosting a variety of public and private events and concerts for as many as 3,000 people.

Away from the pool, Red Rock Casino Amphitheater lures top acts and can accommodate up to 10,000 guests. Performer pairings include Toby Keith and Eric Church, Motley Crue and Poison, Blink 182 and My Chemical Romance, and Enrique Iglesias and Pitbull.

——SIDEBAR: And Then There’s…Bowling?

Red Rock Lanes, the resort’s 72-lane bowling center, is the most expensive venue of its kind in the United States. With a contemporary aesthetic that mirrors that of the resort, Red Rock Lanes boasts state-of-the-art bowling equipment and audio/visual systems that can be instantly transformed into a party atmosphere with custom glow lighting effects, strobes, fog machines, image generators and disco balls.

END SIDEBAR———-

Spa Time

After what’s sure to be a long day, it’s time to relax and let the stresses of the world evaporate under the tender ministrations of the Spa at Red Rock.  The 25,000 square-foot haven offers a sleek, ultra-modern retreat that promotes health, relaxation and rejuvenation. Drenched in rich shades of red and whites, the space envelops guests in a luxurious atmosphere and provides them with a calming sense of privacy. The spa offers an extensive menu of treatments ranging from facials and massages to body treatments and salon services.

If you’re in the mood to one-up the traditional spa activities, don’t miss out on the rough-and-tumble fun of the Adventure Spa.  The resort takes advantage of its proximity to Red Rock Canyon and other national and state parks by offering customized adventure activities such as hiking, kayaking, rock climbing and mountain biking.

Niagara Falls, NY

At long last there’s a reason to visit upstate NY that doesn’t hinge on a combination of water, a barrel, and gravity.  Although it’s located a scant few minutes from the world-famous Niagara Falls, Seneca Niagara Casino & Hotel is a destination unto itself.

“We’re now celebrating our 10th anniversary,” said Tony Astran, Publicity Manager for Seneca Gaming Corporation.  “Seneca Niagara continues to be a major entertainment destination for the larger region—including Southern Ontario, Western Pennsylvania, Eastern Ohio, and beyond. More than 8 million visitors pass through our doors each year.”

Warm, inviting, and stunning throughout, Seneca Niagara Casino & Hotel is home to the largest hotel in Western NY.  Their 26-story hotel—or as they describe it, “26 levels of luxury”—offers 604 recently renovated deluxe rooms and suites.  Each room is designed with the guest in mind, offering a gentle, soothing space dressed in an earthy color scheme with mahogany influences and muted charcoal to elicit relaxation.   All rooms feature upscale amenities including pillow-top beds, oversized showers, flat screen TVs, Internet access and more.  It is this attention to detail across the property that has lead to its success not only with patrons, but the industry itself.  “We’re one of only three properties in all of Western New York to receive the coveted AAA Four Diamond Award for outstanding service and amenities,” said Astran. “Only 3.8 percent of the 59,000 AAA Diamond Rated establishments throughout North America and the Caribbean earn the prestigious AAA Four Diamond rating. We’ve earned the award every consecutive year since our eligibility in 2006.”

That’s A Lot of Gaming

Beauty, grandeur, awards and amenities aside, there’s no denying that one of the main reasons people flock to casino resorts is for the gaming.  And Seneca certainly has that in spades—and diamonds, and clubs, and hearts.  Here, guests have 147,000 square feet of gaming space to explore and can take their pick from an impressive array of literally thousands of machines and table games, from classic favorites to the latest reels in denominations that range from a penny to $100 a pull.  Table games include the perennial favorites: Blackjack, Craps, Roulette, Mini Baccarat, Let It Ride, Texas Hold ‘Em Bonus Poker, Pai Gow Poker, Three Card Poker, Big Six, Sic Bo, Four Card Poker, Spanish 21, and Caribbean Stud Poker. The property also boasts a world-class poker room, the only one of its kind in Western NY.

“We also have a very generous Player’s Club program, where $170 coin-in equals $1 comp dollar. Points can be earned at both slots and table games,” said Astran.  “And, of course, our gaming floor is HUGE. We have more than 4,000 of the latest slots and 100 table games. As soon as a machine is ‘new’ in Vegas, it’s ‘new’ here too.”

Break The Bank, Then The Bread

With 10 inviting dining locations churning out chow daily, there’s no need for anyone to go hungry.  While all of the resort’s dining options are worthy of praise, two of their restaurants deserve special notice.

An award-winning steakhouse for six years running, The Western Door is an upscale steak-lover’s raison d’être, specializing in the highest quality USDA Prime and Choice cuts of beef and fresh seafood.  From the 8 oz. Kobe fillet and the 24 oz. Cast Iron Porterhouse, to the Sea Bass Vera Cruz and pan-seared sea scallops there’s not one item on the menu that isn’t remarkable.  To make the experience perfect, begin with the “Smoking Shrimp Tree” a coconut-dusted gulf shrimp that’s quick fried and served with a pineapple mango salsa and pina colada dipping sauce.  You won’t regret or forget it.

More casual than The Western Door but no less delicious, the recently renovated (at a price of $8.5 million) Thunder Falls Buffet features an award-winning cornucopia of more than 100 selections across six unique dining stations all prepared by expect chefs using only the freshest ingredients.  Stations include: Mediterranean, Asian, Central Grille, Wood-Fired Brick Oven, Salad Bar, and Desserts.

Not in the mood for steak or an all-you-can-eat smorgasbord?  Consider one of Seneca Casino’s other options:

• Koi:  Asian cuisine fused with a modern approach to dining.
• la Cascata:  Classic home-style Italian cuisine based on uncomplicated traditional recipes paired with a selection of fine wines and cheeses.
• Three Sisters Café:  Traditional café fare serving breakfast, lunch and dinner 24 hours a day.
• Blues Burger Bar: Offers hand-crafted burgers piled high with custom ingredients.
• Tim Hortons Café and Bake Shop / Cold Stone Creamery: Co-branded outlet offering coffee, donuts, and baked goods as well as ice cream, shakes, and smoothies.
• Morrie’s Express:  Serving on-the-go foods such as subs, pizza, salads and smoothies.

Think you’ve seen everything Seneca Casino has to offer?  Don’t bet on it.  Whether your passion is shopping, golf, or just goofing around, there’s always something else just around the corner.

Shop ‘Til You Drop

Whether you’re not really into gambling—or you just had a big night and feel the urge to splurge—visitors to Seneca Niagara have more then enough places to spend their time and winnings.    Popular retailers include: TEN (where everything costs—you guessed it—$10), Swarovski Crystal Boutique, Yankee Candle, Watson’s Chocolates, and the Player’s Club Store, featuring the latest games, gadgets and gizmos for the tech junkie.

The Spa & Fitness Center

Retreat to The Spa, a place where you can quiet your thoughts, calm your spirit and soothe your senses. Relax with a Swedish body massage, desert-heat body wrap, or Seneca Niagara’s signature Caviar & Pearls Facial. Treat yourself to a manicure, pedicure, waxing treatment or new hairstyle at their full-service Salon.  At the fitness center guests can make a splash in the relaxing indoor pool, unwind with a soak in the steamy whirlpool, or get their heart pumping in the state-of-the-art workout facility.

Play Time!

Treat the kids to some video fun at Seneca’s state-of-the-art arcade and let them have a blast on all of their favorite games—any time of the day or night! The entertainment center provides round-the-clock entertainment with bubble hockey, dance machines, racing games and more!

SIDEBAR:  We Saw That Coming

Coming to Seneca Niagara Events Center on Saturday, Apr. 27, is Sylvia Browne, a well-known spiritual teacher, psychic, author, lecturer and researcher in the field of parapsychology. Twenty-two of Browne’s books have appeared on the New York Times Best Sellers list and she is also the founder of The Sylvia Browne Hypnosis Training Center as well as the religious organization Society of Novus Spiritus. Tickets for the 8 p.m. show start at $45.

END SIDEBAR—-

Las Vegas, NV

A stunning example of a casino resort sparing no expense, the city’s newest luxury resort, The Cosmopolitan, is nothing short of an oasis rising from the concrete. Offering a decidedly different perspective The Cosmopolitan is perched overlooking the heart of The Strip, with the resort’s uniquely vertical multi-tower design offering spectacular views of the vibrant city at its feet.

Luxury abounds in the 2,995-room resort, which features oversized residential-style living spaces with expansive, one-of-a-kind private terraces.  These personal retreats range from the urban-inspired “City Room” which features spacious living, city views, and oversized marble-floored bathrooms, to the Lanai Suites, which are exhilarating, multilevel spreads featuring two-story windows, stylish living areas and private terraces with Jacuzzis. And for a real Cosmopolitan experience, you can splurge for a night in the glamorous West End Penthouses.

Representing the pinnacle of exclusivity, the West End Penthouses provide a one-of a kind experience through whimsical touches like crystal-encrusted wall textures, an unexpected art collection, and rich, tailor-made fabrics. Penthouses range in size from 2,400 to 3,700 square feet and are available in two and three bedroom suites which feature cutting-edge technology, floor-to-ceiling windows, wet bars, and kitchenettes with serving space. and Many of the suites offer terraces with panoramic views, and guests enjoy personal butler service to attend to their every need.

Gambling And Then Some

While there’s no shortage of things to do here, first things first: let’s discuss the casino. Spanning an impressive 100,000 square feet, the casino offers a wide array of table games including blackjack, roulette, craps, baccarat, three card poker, Spanish 21, crazy 4 poker, and let it ride.

And that’s just for starters. The casino floor is also home to an incredible variety of slot machines—1,478 reel spinning, video reel and video poker machines with denominations ranging from $0.01-$500. So no matter what your level of play is, you’ll find something that’s right for you.

SIDEBAR: The Latest in Betting Technology

The Cosmopolitan of Las Vegas Race & Sports Book by Cantor is a prime sports watching and wagering location. Here, patrons are invited to place wagers at two outside betting windows, individual “trading” stations, or via mobile tablets. The 43 “trading” stations offer a unique sports betting experience with plush seating, state-of-the-art viewing screens, and Cantor’s proprietary In-Running sports trading technology.

Whether you’re done gambling for the day, or just in need of a brief respite, The Cosmopolitan has plenty to offer besides its remarkable casino—including a very impressive lineup of restaurants.

Topping the list is the Blue Ribbon Sushi Bar & Grill, the master stroke of chefs and restaurateurs Eric and Bruce Bromberg. Its menu offers a mouthwatering array of dramatically prepared and presented sushi and sashimi. Not to be missed are Blue Ribbon signature dishes such as their famous beef marrow bones, fried chicken with wasabi honey, bone-in rib steak, and miso lobster—all beautifully prepared and served with Blue Ribbon’s unique flair and hospitality.

Other popular—and no less exceptional—eateries include Comme Ca, a lively and modern Las Vegas French brasserie with an emphasis on quality ingredients; and the trendy STK, a modern Las Vegas steakhouse with a relaxed atmosphere and a sexy vibe created by the in-house DJ. STK Las Vegas is a celebrity hotspot that breaks with tradition, offering a flirty, feminine take on the classic American steakhouse.

If unwinding is called for, pay a visit to Sahra Spa & Hammam, specialists in unknotting all of those annoying little aches and pains. Enter and discover a unique experience filled with breathtaking natural walls that mirror poetic canyons. Veins of silver thread run throughout, while silver ceilings mimic a profound moonlit sky. Sink into the Space Between, a serenity lounge where falling waters are heard and absolute calm settles in a dramatic, soul-soaring atmosphere. A monsoon cave rains serenity, while the steam room gets re-imagined, unveiling a cooling micro mist.

If it’s time for your inner party animal to prowl, Marquee Nightclub is one of the most spectacular spaces in Las Vegas. The venue spans more than 62,000 square feet, with 50-foot-tall ceilings and an unparalleled multi-million-dollar sound stage designed to cater to any performer’s whim. Coliseum-style seating surrounds the dance floor, where one can marvel at the four-story LED screens and projection walls that display customized light and image shows distinctly tailored for each performance.

In addition to the Nightclub, Marquee touts a new Dayclub, featuring Grand Cabanas with individual infinity pools and a multitude of three-story Bungalow Lofts, which come equipped with cabanas, living quarters and party decks on top.

Thackerville, Oklahoma

Trivia question: Where is the largest casino in the United States? If you said Las Vegas you’re…wrong. Then it must be Foxwoods in Connecticut, right? Sorry. The correct answer is Oklahoma.

That’s right, folks—Oklahoma’s own Winstar World Casino has taken the record for the largest casino gaming space in the US. It comes in at a whopping 519,000 square feet—over 100,000 square feet bigger than its closest competitor, Foxwoods in Connecticut.

Electronic Games

Across the massive gaming floor, visitors are treated to a selection of over 6,700 electronic games spread out over eight gaming plazas, with bet denominations ranging from a single penny to $250. For the more seasoned player, Winstar’s exclusive Belvedere High Stakes and Crown High Stakes areas offer a variety of games with denominations ranging from $1-$25. Test your luck on Mr. Moneybags, Hot Red Ruby, Royal Reels, Cool Catz, Liberty 7’s, Wheel of Fortune and other high-stakes machines.

Table Games Galore
Along with its vast selection of electronic games, WinStar also offers the most table games in Oklahoma. Get in on the felt action with 74 tables featuring blackjack, pai gow poker, three card poker, Ultimate Texas Holdʼem and midi baccarat.

Poker

Winstar features 46 poker tables in their luxurious, smoke-free poker room. Poker Players can try their hand at no limit hold’ em, limit hold’ em and Omaha. If you work up an appetite, the 19,000 square foot room features the Red River Grill Cafe, which is open 24 hours.

Bingo

Looking for a less stressful way to make your wagers? Winstar features a charming and comfortable 937-seat deluxe bingo hall, open every Friday, Saturday and Sunday.

Off-Track Betting

If horse racing gets your heart pumping, trot over to the smoke-free off-track betting area located in the New York Gaming Plaza. You’ll find thoroughbred and harness racing action such as The Breeders Cup, The Kentucky Derby, Preakness and Belmont Stakes. All of the favorite tracks are carried. including Remington, Lone Star, Aqueduct, Churchill, and Los Alamitos, as well as racing in Australia.

And When You’re Not Gambling

WinStar World Casino’s dining options are just as remarkable and diverse as the casino itself. As you walk through the city-themed gaming plazas, you’ll find assorted cuisine that will satisfy any palate. From classic American to exotic Mongolian to southern home-cooking, Winstar offer a taste of the world all from one place.  Top restaurants include Capisce, which features authentic Italian cuisine inspired by both northern and southern regions of Italy; and The Grill, the casino’s premier fine dining restaurant featuring succulent bone-in ribeye, filet steak, six-layer chocolate cake and world-class wines.

If you’re in need of a little TLC, Spa Habitat is an organic spa offering an array of personalized services inspired by nature and using only premium organic and natural products. This serene retreat melds a relaxed eco-friendly vibe with fragrant products and experienced personnel. Spa Habitat features an organic apothecary, fully stocked with the highest quality organic products and brands and will delight the senses and rejuvenate mind, body and soul with luxurious, relaxing spa services, including massage, facials, body rituals, hand and foot treatments, hair removal and various spa packages.

Finally, once the gambling bug has stopped nibbling for the night, guests can retire to one of the hotel’s 395 rooms and deluxe suites. The casino also offers 24-hour shuttle services to its neighboring Inn at Winstar property, a cozy home-away-from-home alternative to the 12-story casino hotel

Golf ‘Til You Drop

WinStar World Casino offers a gorgeous golf course in the Red River Valley ideal for golfers of all skills in search of some tee time. Situated on 280 beautiful acres of vast green in a resort-style setting, this 27-hole golf course designed by D.A. Weibring is challenging enough for both novice and expert golfers. Tee Times may be made up to 7 days in advance, while hotel guests may book up to 60 days in advance.

Guests may also attend WinStar Golf Academy taught by professional instructors in a state-of-the-art facility, offering private lessons and equipment to help you become a more proficient golfer. Since 2011, the cutting-edge facility’s program offers a putter fitting and practice studio, fitness room, PGA Tour simulation studio, eight covered outdoor hitting bays, outdoor grass driving range and more.

Queens, NY

The economy may have been in a slump over the past few years, but you wouldn’t know it by the runaway success of Resorts World Casino, New York City’s premiere gambling hotspot. Although it only recently celebrated its first birthday—the property opened its doors in October, 2011—it has already boasted more than 10 million visitors and shattered all previous records for slot play, generating some $825 million in revenues.

“In just one year of operation, it is clear that Resorts World Casino New York City has been an incredible success for Queens, New York City, and the State as a whole,” said Christian Goode, senior vice president of development for Genting Americas, Inc. “We are improving our offerings by opening the ‘Table Games Square’ and ‘Roulette Sports Bar’ with 500 table game machines, including the first single zero European Roulette machines in the country, all while doubling our bus shuttles from all parts of New York City and Long Island in the coming year.”

What makes Resorts World such a Mecca for slots players? In a word: selection. Fans of Sex and the City can join Carrie, Charlotte, Miranda and Samantha from the ever-popular “Sex and the City” slots, or join the chorus as America’s favorite TV audience belts out “Wheel of Fortune” and the colourful wheel spins with the promise of a bonus round. The electrifying thrills do not stop there. Hit the jackpot on the Playboy Platinum, or sail the seven seas hunting for treasure on the popular Jolly Roger Slots.

Resorts World also boasts an assortment of popular electronic table games, including Let It Ride, craps, sic bo and baccarat. For roulette lovers, the odds have just jumped in your favor with the opening of the new Roulette Sports Pit, which features four machines with 59 seats of unbridled excitement. This unique space features 10 single zero games, which offers guests significantly better odds than traditional double zero roulette. Adding to the excitement are flat screen TVs, an unparallel panoramic view of the Aqueduct Racetrack, specialty hostesses and a mini-party lounge.

At its launch, Resorts World Casino New York City featured a singular gaming area, the Times Square Casino floor, but has since grown to include the Fifth Avenue Casino on its second floor, as well as the 70,000 square foot Central Park Events Center. Now operating at full capacity, tens of thousands of daily guests have played its 5,000+ slots and electronic table games, and dined at each of the property’s 13 restaurants, which include RW Prime Steakhouse, Genting Palace, the Aqueduct Buffet, and Bar 360. Located at Aqueduct Raceway in Queens, adjacent to JFK International Airport, Resorts World Casino offers a shuttle service to and from the facility for guests arriving from Jamaica Station– ensuring that the casino is just minutes, not hours away.

Palate Pleasers

New York is renowned for its dining options, and no self-respecting NYC casino would be complete without its own array of superior eateries.

RW Prime Steakhouse & Wine Bar

RW Prime boasts some of the city’s finest fare, focusing on—you guessed it—select USDA prime meats. Begin your evening with a specialty cocktail in their intimate lounge, then head to the main dining room and sink your teeth into one of their signature steaks, which range from a perfectly pink 16 oz ribeye to a man-sized 24 oz prime porterhouse.

Genting Palace

With understated elegance and luxury, Genting Palace presents authentic fine-dining Chinese cuisine by veteran Hong Kong chefs to discerning gourmands. The a la carte menu features popular favorites like Chinese barbeque, a selection of exquisite dim sum and seasonal live seafood.

The Aqueduct Buffet

Discover a world of great tastes at the Aqueduct Buffet, a bountiful 400-seat international buffet. Savor everything from seafood, pasta, healthy salads, vegetarian specialties, to fresh fruits and incredible desserts at this all-you-can-eat smorgasbord.

Atlantic City, NJ

If it weren’t for the fact that the word “casino” is in its name, you’d almost think that at Revel, gambling was more of a diversion rather than the whole point of being there. Miles beyond the typical casino resort, Revel has crafted an entirely new approach to the gaming scene. Dominated by opulence and purity rather than smoky decadence, Revel somehow manages to bring a sense of well-being and vitality to the world of casino gambling.

Billed as “a new destination for uncommon recreation,” the $2.4 billion property is designed to embrace its natural surroundings, presenting a collection of daylife and nightlife experiences in an environment designed to help guests uncover little surprises, engaging experiences and to rediscover the pure emotion of fun.

This beachfront destination is smoke-free and features over 1,800 rooms with sweeping ocean views. Indoor and outdoor pools, gardens, lounges, and a 32,000-square-foot spa provide guests with plenty of opportunities to relax, while an outstanding collection of 14 restaurant concepts, live entertainment featuring marquee acts, nightclubs, an oceanfront dayclub, and a collection of boutiques tailor to each guest’s passions.

Just as its approach to the resort lifestyle towers above its brethren, Revel has infused a different perspective to the gaming floor as well, transforming the atmosphere from one that focuses attention on the bright lights and sounds of games and machines, to one that feels more akin to a theatre. The casino floor was designed by theatre specialists, Scéno Plus, the result being a 130,000 square foot space that feels expansive with its high, open theatre style ceiling, yet beset by calm, intimate neighborhoods. These neighborhoods are casually defined using clusters of oversized lantern lights, hanging art, curtains of beads, and lowered ceilings that mimic the sand beach. The space is programmable to set the tone throughout the day with warm lighting in the morning, and more intense nightclub-like lighting in the evening.

Room To Play

Revel’s 130,000 square foot casino features:

• 2,439 slot machines
• 97 table games
• 16 electronic tables
• A poker room with 37 tables overlooking the gaming floor

Revel has curated a collection of outstanding chefs and restaurateurs so patrons will easily find food that is both satisfying and memorable. Guests create their own story at Revel and food is a part of it, even if you are not a “foodie.” Revel has sought chefs who are recognized for their craft and are passionately involved in their creations. The resort’s chefs bring some of their established restaurants from New York City, Philadelphia and Washington DC, and they created new concepts exclusively for Revel. Everything from a quick breakfast, to lunch by the pool or dinner shares the same commitment to excellence.

BASK: A Shrine To Wellbeing

Revel and exhale have joined forces to unveil a new wellbeing spa brand that will revive, restore, and transform guests through a collection of mind body spa, fitness, healing, and relaxation experiences. The 32-room spa offers exclusive therapies including hydrating facials, therapeutic massages, and effective body-slimming services. Those with a holistic inclination can enjoy authentic detoxifying and healing sessions with acupuncture and body scrubs. At the core of the spa is an expansive 3,000 square foot coed bathhouse, uniquely designed for detoxification, relaxation, and socialization. Guests can immerse themselves in the elements by breathing in the dry air of the salt grotto, sinking into the heated mineral pools, purifying in the steam rooms, or sipping beverage at the bathhouse bar.

Neighboring the spa is the sanctuary-like fitness studio, which plays host to exhale’s acclaimed Core Fusion and yoga programming. All classes work in tandem with one another to give guests the most well-rounded, effective fitness routine imaginable, transforming guests inside and out. Three-day boot camp, surf+yoga, and core transformation retreats extend beyond exhale’s four walls and utilize the entire resort property.

Casino Player magazine releases its report on the loosest slots from coast-to-coast.

For nearly two decades Casino Player magazine—America’s #1 gambling publication—has kept a watchful eye on which casinos offer the loosest slots in the country.  The result has been a detailed report published every spring known as the “Loosest Slots” awards.

“Every year since 1994, Casino Player has mined the slots data from casinos across the country to create our annual Loosest Slots awards,” said CEO Glenn Fine.  “This affords our readers the best snapshot about which casinos have been the most generous with regard to slots over the previous year.  It is quite simply one of our most anticipated issues of the year.”

So just where is the best place in the US to challenge the one-armed bandits?  “For the third straight year, the market with the loosest slots in the nation is Reno, Nevada,” said Frank Legato, Casino Player’s slots writer.  “And Reno’s slots even got looser since last year—the total slot return went from 94.79 percent in 2008 to 95.11 percent last year.”

Legato continued.  “Also the same as last year, the other two in the top three for “Loosest Slots in America” were other Nevada markets—the Boulder Strip casinos (Sam’s Town, Boulder Station,  Arizona Charlie’s, Eastside Cannery, etc.) were right behind Reno in generosity, returning a combined 94.96 percent of slot wagers to players; and just behind that at 94.8 percent was the “Balance of County” market, which includes off-Strip Las Vegas casinos like Orleans and the Palms, and outlying areas such as Primm.”

Of course if you can’t make it to desert, there are plenty of other places across the country boasting loose slots of all denominations.  In Atlantic City, NJ, top accolades go to the Borgata with 91.76 percent, while both the A.C. Hilton and Trump Taj Mahal tied for second with 91.46 percent.  A little to the north Connecticut’s Mohegan Sun took the lead with 91.65 percent with Foxwoods trailing slightly with 91.35 percent.

Looking towards the Midwest, Indiana had a solid return, with Hoosier Park leading the pack at 92.03 percent.  Indiana Live came in at 91.90 percent, while Blue Chip came in third with 91.77 percent.  To the south Mississippi’s Coastal Region took the lead with 93.10 percent.  The South River Region came in second with 92.65 percent followed closely by the North River Region with 92.48 percent.

For a complete list and breakdown of results by location and denomination, visit our website at www.casinocenter.com, or pick up a copy of the May issue of Casino Player magazine.

The August 2012 issue of Casino Player Magazine reveals the results of its annual Best Of Gaming awards. For this highly anticipated special issue, thousands of Casino Player readers filled out ballots which asked them to name their favorite gaming properties and vote on a wide variety of related categories, including Best Hotel Rooms, Best Slots, Best Blackjack, Best Dealers, and many other aspects of the modern gaming experience.

The results were categorized by region. For each gaming market across the U.S., readers submitted their picks for the best gourmet restaurants and buffets; the casinos which offer the best players’ clubs, golfing, nightlife and live entertainment; and the casinos where they simply “feel luckiest.”

As usual, this year’s Best Of Gaming winners included familiar favorites who remained dominant in their respective regions, as well as some surprising upsets and new arrivals.

“For 25 years we’ve been telling gamblers where to find the best new restaurants, dazzling casino entertainment, table game odds and which casinos offer the loosest slot machines. For one month out of the year our readers tell us what they think,” commented Glenn Fine, CEO of Casino Player Publishing. “I learn something new every year from our readers, like why so many find one casino to be their luckiest while a different casino is their favorite. Everyone has their own reasons to enjoy the Best of Gaming reader survey issue of Casino Player magazine every year.”

“This is always our most exciting issue of the year,” added managing editor Rob Wiser. “These results are as closely watched by the industry as they are by casino enthusiasts. The winning casinos are thrilled to know that their guests consider them the best in their market, while this issue also provides a guide for all players who want to know where to find the best games, dining, entertainment and more.”

This year, Casino Player is celebrating its 25^th anniversary as America’s #1 gambling magazine. This is the 17^th year of the Best Of Gaming awards.

About Casino Player Publishing

Casino Player Publishing (CPP), the parent company of Casino Player magazine, was founded in 1985. For the past 14 years it has also been the publisher of Strictly Slots magazine, the world’s only publication that focuses on slots and video poker for gambling enthusiasts.

CPP’s original publication was Casino Journal, an industry trade magazine which it launched in 1985. (CPP no longer publishes this title.) Over the company’s 27-year history it has also published titles such as Casino Ops, Boyd Gaming, Poker Digest and LV Jewish Life, while also hosting dozens of poker cruises with Norwegian Cruise Lines.

VOTE FOR THE BEST DINING & NIGHTLIFE IN CASINOS COAST-TO-COAST

Casino Player magazine launches 1^st annual Best of Dining & Nightlife reader’s choice awards

March 7, 2013—Las Vegas, NV.  Casino Player magazine has announced a new  reader’s choice “Best Of” issue focusing on the top dining, entertainment and nightlife options for casino resorts across the US.

“In honor of our 25^th anniversary, Casino Player magazine has created the first annual ‘Best of Dining & Nightlife’ awards to let our readers pick their favorite restaurants, hangouts, comedy clubs, places to see a concert, and much more,” said Lisa Robertson-Dziedzic, Editorial Director for Casino Player Publishing.  “We’ve selected over 30 categories of the best dining & nightlife options in the industry. These awards let people know about the hotspots not only in Las Vegas and Atlantic City, but across the country.  Best of all, the winners are based exclusively on votes from our readership—people intimately familiar with the casinos in their region and who frequent them on a regular basis.  We’re anticipating quite a lively response.”

The survey names the best of the best in a variety of critical categories and regions including: New Restaurant, Service, Outdoor Dining, Romantic Restaurant, Late-Night Dining, Place For A Cocktail, Sportsbar, Place To Celebrate, View, Overall Entertainment, Lounge Act, Buffet, Steakhouse, Happy Hour, Place to See A Concert, Comedy Club and more.

“We want to afford casino patrons everywhere the chance to have their say and share it with the rest of gaming public,” said Glenn Fine, CEO of Casino Player Publishing.  “These results serve as an unbiased guide for readers, information they can use when selecting a casino, a restaurant, or a show.”

The voting will be offered in the April and May issues of Casino Player magazine, with the results released in the special Global Gaming Expo (G2E) issue in September.  The results will also be available online through Casino Player Digital magazine and their website CasinoCenter.com.

Casino Player magazine is the flagship monthly magazine from Casino Player Publishing LLC.  Casino Player has been the voice of the gaming industry for 25 years and is the premiere gaming lifestyle magazine of North America.  Along with its sister publication, Strictly Slots magazine, Casino Player provides in-depth coverage of the casino lifestyle geared for the avid casino patron.

For More Information Contact

J. Phillip Vogel

Managing Editor

Casino Player magazine

jvogel@casinocenter.com

Readers ask if quick reflexes are the key to winning

By John Grochowski

I keep a list of questions that I’m most often asked about slot machines. You could probably tick off some of them: “Are games programmed to go cold after a big win?” “Do you get less payback when you use your rewards card?”  And the big one, “Can you tell me how to win?”

Those have been standards ever since I started writing about casinos and casino games 20 years ago. But recently, another question has been shooting up the charts. I have it all the way up at No. 2 on the readers’ hit parade:

“I’ve noticed on a lot of video slot games that if I hit the button a second time while the reels are spinning, they stop right away. I was wondering if I could use this to my advantage. If I see the bonus triggers or the jackpot symbols at the top, should I quickly hit the button again and try to stop the reels?”

I had that thought myself the first time I accidentally double-hit a button and saw the reels click to an immediate halt. Could this be an answer to the chart-topping question, “how to win on the slots?”

Unfortunately, it doesn’t work that way. In nearly all slot games that allow you to stop the reels, there is no skill or timing involved on your part. The random number generator has already determined your outcome when you hit the button to spin the reels, and you’re going to get the same result regardless of whether you stop the reels early, or let them halt in their own time.

When you play a slot machine, the game isn’t actually being played out on the reels, whether it uses “real” reels or video reels. It’s being played internally, on the game’s random number generator. The reels are just a player-friendly interface, and are told where to stop by the RNG. If there’s a malfunction and the reel display doesn’t match the numbers generated, it’s the RNG that counts. Large jackpots can be denied—and have been denied—if a check shows the random numbers on the internal computer chip don’t match the winning symbols on the reels.

But this is extremely rare. The engineering is good enough that almost all the time, the RNG and reel display are going to match up. This doesn’t change if you double-hit the bet button. If the RNG has spit out a random number that tells the first reel to stop on a single bar, then you’re going to get a single bar—regardless of whether you hit the button a second time for a “quick stop,” or just let them take their own sweet time.

There are rare exceptions. When I’ve answered similar questions in the past, I’ve mentioned IGT’s Reel Edge games. In their original incarnation, Reel Edge games enabled players to touch and stop the reels one at a time. There was actual skill involved. Your timing in stopping the reels determined the outcome. The reels spun very, very fast, so it was going take a keen eye and sharp reflexes to get better than random results, but it was possible.

I gave it a try, and found my reflexes just weren’t fast enough to generate more than my normal share of winners. In the original three-reel Blood Life game, I identified a green 7 as the easiest symbol to pick out as it whizzed by. I touched each reel individually as I saw a green 7 reach the top of the slot window, and managed to stop 7s on all three reels. Alas, I failed to land them all on the same payline. Some younger folks with quicker reactions may have been able to do better.

I don’t know if any of the first generation of Reel Edge games remain on casino floors. They were never widespread, and I don’t get lists from casinos or manufacturers telling me what games are available in any given casino. The new generation of Reel Edge puts the skill-based portions of the games in the bonus events.

Blood Life’s updated video incarnation, Blood Life Legends, allows you to test your skill with a joystick to guide a bat through the ups, downs, twists and turns of a cave as you try to collect gems for bonuses. There is actual skill involved, but it’s not the reel-stopping experience readers have been asking about.

On most slot games, even in the bonus events you’re getting an illusion of skill rather than actual skill. And when it comes to stopping the reels, it’s the random number generator, not your reflexes, that determines the results.

What about my readers’ other top questions?

To answer another—no, games are not programmed to go cold after big wins. Results remain as random as humans can program a computer to be. As long as the RNG keeps doing its thing, any big jackpot, any hot streak, and any cold streak eventually fade away into statistical insignificance, and the machine comes very close to its expected payback percentage.

No, you don’t get less payback when you use your rewards card. The player rewards system doesn’t interact with the RNG.

And no, with rare exceptions, there is no way to beat the slots except by being in the right place at the right time. There have been opportunities for small profit on games with banked bonuses such as the old WMS game Piggy Bankin’, where the sharpies would start to play only when there were enough coins in the bank to give the player an edge.

Such games are not common. Just as with stopping the reels early, your results are up to chance and the RNG.

How “standard deviation” reveals the true odds of scoring a video poker jackpot

By Bill Burton

Last night I met my friend Rich at a casino. We hadn’t gotten together for a while, so we decided to play video poker so we could talk and catch up on recent events while we played. We’d been playing for about 20 minutes when Rich let out a yell. I looked over and saw that he had a royal flush on his screen.

“It’s a natural, it was dealt to me!” he exclaimed. “That’s the first time that I was ever dealt one. What are the odds?”

I told him the odds of being dealt a natural royal flush are one in 650,000 hands. But as I explained, this is only the mathematical probability of being dealt a natural. It does not mean that you will be dealt a natural every 650,000 hands.  The mathematical probability of drawing to a royal flush is actually much better: one in every 40,000 hands. These figures are based on playing perfect optimal strategy, with each draw giving you the best mathematical return.

Standard Deviation

Of course nobody will get a royal flush in exactly 40,000 hands. It may happen in a fewer number of hands, or it may take longer. The easiest way to illustrate this is with the simple coin flip.

The odds of flipping a coin and having it land on heads is 50/50; however, if you flip a coin 100 times it would be rare to come up with exactly 50 heads and 50 tails. You could possibly end up with 75 heads and 25 tails. This is because a sampling of only 100 flips is very short, and anything can happen. If you flip a coin 1,000 times, it’s still unlikely that you’ll end up with an equal number of heads and tails.

The reason for this is a mathematical principle called “standard deviation.” Standard deviation is a statistical value used to determine how spread out the data in a sample is, and how close individual data points are to the mean, or average. Some of you may remember seeing a demonstration back in your high school days of ping pong balls being dropped down a board, similar to the Plinko game on the “Price Is Right” television show. The majority of the balls group in the center, while others bounce to the left or right of the center, forming a bell curve.

One standard deviation will cover 34.1 % of the curve to the left and right of the center line. In other words, it shows what will happen about two-thirds of the time. Two standard deviations cover what will happen 95% of the time. Three standard deviations cover 99.7% of what can happen.

The formula for calculating standard deviation uses square roots and other algebra equations which can be looked up if you’re interested in doing the calculations. The main reason to have a general understanding of standard deviation is so that you’ll have a more realistic expectation of what you might encounter when playing a game like video poker.

When you flip a coin 1,000 times, the odds are 50/50—but to get a truer sense of the outcome, we look at the standard deviation. One standard deviation is about 68%, so we can expect that we’ll flip somewhere between 452–548 heads.

Now we can use standard deviation to calculate the range of drawing a royal flush based on the number of hands we play. If you were to play 200,000 hands of video poker and the probability of drawing a royal flush is one in 40,000,  you would expect to get five royal flushes—but due to standard deviation, the true probabilities will be different.

We can illustrate this by sampling 100 players who will each play 200,000 hands of video poker. At the end of that time, 68 of the players will have drawn between two to six royal flushes, which is one standard deviation. 26 players will have drawn zero to eight royals, which represents two standard deviations; and the other six players would have drawn from zero to over eight royals. (Since we can’t have a “partial person,” I rounded off the number of players in this example)

Droughts Happen

I’ve gone more than a year between royal flushes. Although I don’t count the exact number of hands I play, I do keep a log of the amount of time that I play during each of my sessions. I know approximately how many hands I play per hour, so I can get an estimate of the total number of hands that I’ve played.

I estimated that I played about 285,000 hands without a royal flush. This placed me in the upper end of two standard deviations away from the norm, and since the majority of this play was at the same casino, had I not had an understanding that this was just a normal part of the distribution curve, I could have easily jumped to the conclusion that the machines were “rigged.”

I often hear this complaint from players, and they’re skeptical when I explain that droughts not as uncommon as they think.

Lightning Strikes Twice

After Rich and I had our conversation about the odds of him drawing a natural royal flush, I told him that the one thing I miss with the coinless machines is the hand paid jackpots. Although I don’t miss waiting for a hopper fill when cashing out, I do miss having the attendants come over and count out those hundred dollar bills. Maybe this is because the time spent waiting to get paid gave me more time to savor my win.

Nowadays, with the ticket-in, ticket-out machines, the winnings from your royal flush just get added to your credits, and you’re free to play your next hand. I no sooner said this when Rich yelled again. This time he had held two cards, and drew his second royal in the span of 20 hands!

He just looked at me and said, “If I had to wait for a hand paid jackpot, I never would have gotten my second royal.”

Point taken. I couldn’t argue with him there.

Until next time, remember: “Luck comes and goes…Knowledge Stays Forever!”

Bill Burton is a writer for the Casino Gambling Guide at About.com. (www.casinogambling.about.com). He is the author of 1,000 Best Casino Gambling Secrets and Get the Edge at Low Limit Texas Hold’em. He is also an instructor for Golden Touch Craps.(www.goldentouchcraps.com).

Atlantic City’s hot new property expands and upgrades its players club

By H. Scot Krause

Atlantic City’s newest resort, Revel, has launched a new and exciting rewards program that takes its gaming action to the next level. Guests can earn resort dollars property-wide and enjoy free Wi-Fi and complimentary offers just for playing, staying or partying at Revel.

The new club features three tier levels: Ocean, Beach and Pearl, each with increasing benefits as you move up the ladder. The Revel Card is unique to Atlantic City because members earn resort dollars in nearly every area of the resort, including the hotel, restaurants, nightlife venues, and of course, on the gaming floor. Additionally, Revel Card members never have to worry about conversion. Every resort dollar is worth the same dollar for dollar at every venue, even inside the retail shops and entertainment venues. Whether you game, stay, party, shop or dine, present your Revel Card to earn Resort Dollars and tier points Resort-wide. Then, you can begin redeeming your Resort Dollars immediately.

Upon signing up, players open the door to benefits by becoming an Ocean Card level member. (If you’re already member of the “old” Revel players club, your resort dollar balance will be unaffected when you become a member of the new club.) The initial level offers guests immediate complimentary Wi-Fi access, special offers, discounts, and invites to events—and based on your play, you can earn some special surprises as well.

The Resort Dollar earning rate varies based on the machine and denomination you are playing. You’ll see your Resort Dollars accumulate in real time as you play. Every 100 points equals 1 Resort Dollar. Unlike other casinos in Atlantic City, Resort Dollars are worth face value, resort-wide. There are no redemption conversions or penalties based on where or how you spend. It’s yours, so spend it however you want!

Whether you’re playing slots, tables, or poker, you’ll be earning. In fact, you earn everywhere you spend on the premises, so don’t forget to present your Revel Card whenever you visit areas of the resort away from the casino floor.

Accrue 50,000 tier points between Jan. 1–Dec. 31 this year, and you’ll become a Beach Card level member. When upgraded to Beach status, members receive all Ocean benefits as well as these additional perks:

—Complimentary self and valet parking

—2X base resort dollar multiplier every day

—Access to two Daily Dining Passports ($10 each/$30 value)

—Entrance to the Annual Beach Tournament

At Pearl Card level, things really become exciting. By earning 350,000 tier points between Jan. 1 and Dec. 31 you’ll reach this elite status, which unlocks superior benefits and priority VIP treatment. You’ll receive all of the Ocean and Beach level benefits, plus:

—Two complimentary Daily Dining Passports per day

—Suite upgrades (based on availability)

—Complimentary Bask Spa day pass

—Entrance to the Annual Pearl Tournament

—A 1-hour slot machine hold

—Dedicated Pearl hotline

—Preferred Ovation Hall seating

—Late check-out

In addition to dozens of gaming offers and events, Revel Card users receive exclusive opportunities that bring the resort experience to life, such as access to the SkyGarden for parties and events, private cocktail parties at O2, and VIP access to cabanas on The Mezz level.

Resort guests currently enrolled in the Revel Card program will be automatically entered into the new program. To sign up, or to inquire about your current Revel Card status, visit the Revel Card Desk from 9:00 a.m.–10:00 p.m. Sunday through Thursday, and 9:00 a.m.–2:00 a.m. Friday and Saturday.

Maureen Siman, executive director of public relations for Revel, told Strictly Slots: “We just launched the all-new Revel Card including the Ocean, Beach and Pearl tiers and our guests love it. We are giving them exactly what they’ve been asking for, recognition and rewards. Revel is a great place to play with an extraordinary card program that offers more than any other casino in Atlantic City. Just like Revel, there is simply nothing else like it in Atlantic City and we’re thrilled to be able to include all aspects of our resort into the card program. No matter how or when you come to Revel, you can earn Resort Dollars—whether you’re a slot player, blackjack or other table games player, or you love our restaurants and shops, or just can’t get enough of our spa!”

Revel is smoke-free and features more than 1,800 rooms with sweeping ocean views. A member of the American Express Gold Hotel Collection, the resort houses a 130,000-square-foot casino with more than 2,000 slot machines, nearly 100 table games, electronic tables and a Poker Room. The resort features a 32,000-square-foot spa and an outstanding collection of 14 restaurant concepts from award-wining chefs and restaurateurs. Live entertainment includes marquee acts and international artists, plus nightclub entertainment. Revel was recently named one of Gogobot Travelers’ Top 50 Hotels in the World in 2012; one of the Best Hotels in the Northeast by “Arrive” magazine; and one of the Top 10 Best New Hotels in the U.S. by Gayot.com.

Future plans for Revel’s slot club include launching an all-new website for Revel card holders which will make it very easy to check Resort Dollars and tier points, and to book promotions and check current offers. They also plan to construct a beautiful new players lounge in the near future, and will be offering an innovative new member’s sign-up promotion soon as well. Stay tuned!

To start your Revel journey, visit www.revelresorts.com. To receive the latest updates on Revel, become a fan on Facebook at www.facebook.com/revel, and follow @revelresorts on Twitter and Instagram. Revel is located on the legendary Boardwalk at Revel Blvd in Atlantic City, New Jersey.

SIDEBAR

Celebrate the “Luck Of the Irish” This Month At Revel

This month, Revel is bringing the “Luck of the Irish” to Atlantic City for a resort-wide pub crawl in celebration of the St. Patrick’s Day holiday. Revel’s ‘Patty’s Day Pub Crawl’ is open to the public, age 21 and over, March 16 (2 p.m.–10 p.m.) and 17 (noon – 8 p.m.). Tickets are now on sale for $45 on Ticketmaster.com or $49 at Revel’s Box Office. Participants will receive wristbands that allow for one themed beverage (alcoholic or non-alcoholic) or food item, and 10 percent off additional drinks. The “Crawl, Sleep, Eat Package” will be offered for $259 for one night only, Sunday, March 17, and includes two tickets to the “Patty’s Day Pub Crawl”, Ocean (King) room, late checkout and $50 F&B credit to be used at SkyCafé , Alcove, or In-Room Dining.

At each Revel ‘Patty’s Day Pub Crawl’ stop, participants can collect a venue stamp on a designated map they will receive at Revel Box Office. A complete stamped map at the end of the crawl leads to a “pot of gold,” Revel commemorative souvenir, redeemable at the Box Office. All participants will also receive complimentary admission to Ivan Kane’s Royal Jelly Burlesque Nightclub for both Saturday and Sunday night to continue the St. Paddy’s weekend celebration.

The World Series Of Poker launches a bracelet battle down under

By SEAN CHAFFIN

In April, the biggest poker spectacle in the world will travel to the world’s smallest continent. The World Series of Poker is launching the WSOP-Asia-Pacific at Australia’s Crown Melbourne April 4-15, featuring five bracelet events.

Along with the annual WSOP events now in Europe, South Africa (which began in 2012, but awards championship rings, not bracelets), and, of course, the United States, the series is expanding its brand to one of the growing hotbeds of poker. WSOP officials have confirmed several poker heavyweights will be in attendance, including “Kid Poker” Daniel Negreanu and 2012 WSOP Main Event champion Greg Merson. Poker pro Antonio Esfandiari confirmed to Casino Player that he will also be in Melborne, where he hopes to continue an incredible hot streak that included a massive win at the WSOP Big One for One Drop, a bracelet at the WSOP-Europe, and a fourth-place finish in December for $329,000 at the World Poker Tour Five Diamond World Poker Classic at the Bellagio.

“Poker Brat” Phil Hellmuth will also be in attendance, seeking to keep a remarkable WSOP roll intact (he added his 12^th gold bracelet in a Razz event in Las Vegas, and then in Cannes, France, took home the Main Event at the WSOP-Europe for No. 13.) No doubt, he will be primed to add to his bracelet collection.

“It’s been a long time coming, actually,” said Seth Palansky, Caesars vice president of corporate communications. “Ever since Joe Hachem won the WSOP Main Event in 2005, we’ve seen a steady influx of Australians coming to the WSOP to play each year. They have been loyal and the poker scene really exploded there after his win. We have found a great partner in Crown, who already run Australia’s most successful annual poker event, and our desire to tap the region with the WSOP brand led to the formation of WSOP Asia-Pacific.”

As of late January, there were not many firm commitments of major-name players, but Palansky expected the notion of winning one of the first bracelets awarded in Australia to attract some nice fields.

“We know definitively that poker players from the rest of the world really love traveling to Melbourne and have great affinity for Crown Melbourne,” he said. “With the addition of bracelets and plenty of players from throughout Asia, we expect to have a very successful series out the gate.”

Crown Melbourne is Australia’s leading integrated entertainment resort, attracting 18 million visitors annually. It’s one of the largest entertainment complexes on the planet, with world-class gaming facilities, and is home to what has become one of the most prestigious international poker tournaments, the Aussie Millions, which is held each February and attracts some of the biggest names in the game. The casino also features one of the largest poker rooms outside of North America, as well as world-class restaurants and shopping.

“This exciting partnership brings together two industry leaders, and two strong brands, to create a premier poker event in this region,” said Crown’s CEO Greg Hawkins. “Our agreement firmly aligns with our objective of attracting the very best local and international players, all vying for a coveted WSOP bracelet. We are incredibly proud of what we have achieved with the Aussie Millions and look forward to featuring WSOP Asia Pacific on our poker calendar in April 2013.”

Hachem’s run to become the 2005 WSOP Main Event Champion, which saw him scoop up $7.5 million in prize money, kickstarted a poker craze Down Under. The Melbourne native has become an ambassador for the game in his home country. In recent years, Macau has also become a poker hotbed, with high-stakes rounders making the trip for nosebleed-level games against wealthy Chinese businessmen and other high rollers.

Hachem is excited about the chance at winning a bracelet in his own backyard. “It’s thrilling to think the World Series of Poker is coming to Australian soil,” he stated. “I know first-hand what a life-changing moment winning the WSOP gold bracelet was, and how it served as a catalyst for the growth of poker in Australia and Asia. It will be a dream come true to host a worldwide poker event such as this at Crown. I can’t wait.”

Palansky says Crown’s agreement with the WSOP includes provisions for an international television production of the event, and it’s expected to be shown globally on ESPN as well as being part of a packaged show in the U.S. WSOP officials say the events will cater to every level of player and will have a few unique and specialty events that should bring Macau’s top players, as well as some celebrity involvement.

One of those specialty events is the first tournament, coined “The Accumulator.” Players can buy in and play any or all of the three starting flights in this AUD$1,100 event, and the total chips they accumulate each day will be carried over to their Day 2 start. The unique start should make for great excitement and possibly some interesting player strategies. And certainly players will be hoping for good luck and good cards as they battle to become the first winner of the AUD$10,000 WSOP Asia-Pacific Main Event.

Other events which are not part of the bracelet tournaments, but are expected to attract major attention, are the AUD$50,000 High Roller NO Limit Hold’em With Rebuys event, and the Caesars Cup Invitational. No doubt, the High Roller event will lure some of poker’s deeper-pocketed players looking for a nice payday, and the rebuy format only adds to the grandiose action.

The Caesars Cup features some of the best pros in the world in an international competition with players from “Asia-Pacific versus Europe versus the Americas.” The format also offers some team dynamics in a game usually known for its self-reliant game play and rugged individualism. The Cup is modeled after the Ryder Cup, with five players from each region doing battle against each other in team and heads-up matches.

These new events in Australia are part of a larger goal of Caesars Corp. to bring the WSOP to players around the world, and expand the brand. The company is hoping to be “purposeful and deliberate” in its growth of the series; they intend to make sure the company’s existing events are successful before attempting to tackle other markets.

“Our goal is to establish the worldwide grand slam of poker and use our platform to elevate the game through a series of major championships,” said WSOP executive director Ty Stewart. “With WSOP-Las Vegas growing annually and WSOP-Europe poised for long-term success after five years, the time is right to turn our attention to the dynamic poker scene in Asia and Australia. Given Crown’s success with the Aussie Millions Poker Championship, we couldn’t ask for a better partner than Crown to establish the Asia-Pacific’s definitive poker festival.”

Below is a schedule of events for the WSOP Asia-Pacific. For live updates and to view live final tables, visit www.WSOP.com.

• April 4, 5, 6 First three flights of AUD$1,100 No Limit Holdem “Accumulator.” (Event #1)

• April 7 – AUD$1,650 Pot Limit Omaha (Event #2)

• April 8 – AUD$2,200 Mixed Game Event (Event #3)

• April 9 – AUD$5,000 Six-Hand No Limit Holdem (Event #4)

• April 11 – AUD$10,000 Main Event (Event #5)

• April 13 – AUD$10,000 High Roller No Limit Holdem with Rebuys (non-bracelet event)

• April 14 – Caesars Cup Invitational: Asia Pacific vs. Europe vs. Americas (non-bracelet event)

Sean Chaffin is a freelance writer in Rockwall, Texas. His new book, RAISING THE STAKES: True Tales of Gambling, Wagering and Poker Faces, is available as an eBook and in paperback at www.RaisingtheStakesbook.com, Amazon.com, and BarnesandNoble.com. He is also editor of www.PokerTraditions.com, all about poker history, lore, and people. If you have a gambling or poker story idea, email seanchaffin@sbcglobal.net. Follow him on Twitter at @PokerTraditions.

**** SIDEBAR ****

National Heads-Up Poker Championship returns to NBC

Poker got a bit of good news in January recently as it was announced that the National Heads-Up Poker Championship will return to NBC and the NBC Sports Channel. The annual made-for-TV event is filmed at Caesars Palace in Las Vegas. It kicked off in 2005 with Phil Hellmuth taking the title. Erik Seidel won the most recent tournament in 2011.

After Black Friday (which saw the federal government shut down several major online poker sites), the tournament series was shelved, but thanks to the NHL lockout, the network decided to revive the series. The championship features 64 well-known pros, rising stars, and some wild card players, which really makes for some terrific poker on TV.

Spoiler Alert: When episodes begin airing in March on both channels, the final table should be especially great for TV—featuring Mike Matusow versus Phil Hellmuth for the title. Matusow won the third match in the best-of-three format for first place and the $750,000 first-place prize money.

These games might make your sessions more exciting

by Jerry “Stickman” Stich

The days when video poker meant only five-card draw poker are long gone.  Now there are all sorts of video poker variants clamoring for casino players’ money.  This article reviews a couple of these variants that have been around for a while.  If you are tired of the same old video poker, you may want to consider checking out these games.

Spin Poker

If you love slot machines and want to get some of that slot-like action into your video poker play, Spin Poker might be right up your alley.  Spin Poker looks very much like a 3-line, 5-reel video slot machine.  You can select one to nine lines and one to five coins on each line – just like most multi-line video slot machines.

To play, simply select the number of lines you want to play (1-9).  Even though there are only three lines straight across, there are nine lines available by crossing among the three lines.  Next, select the number of credits you wish to wager per line.  This should always be five to take advantage of the return for a royal flush with five credits played.  Then hit the Deal button.  Five cards will be dealt on the middle row.  As you select the cards you want to save, the same cards appear in the same position on the other two rows.  Once you have selected all the cards you want to save, hit the Draw button.  The columns where you did not select a card “spin” like they are reels on a slot machine and the remaining cards for each hand are filled.

The playing strategy for Spin Poker is exactly the same as the playing strategy of the same standard video poker game.  This means the strategy for full-pay Jacks or Better Spin Poker is exactly the same as the strategy for standard full-pay Jacks or Better.  The return for Spin Poker is also exactly the same as for the standard game of video poker.  Standard full-pay Jacks or Better returns 99.54 percent with perfect play.  Full-pay Jacks or Better Spin Poker also returns 99.54 percent with perfect play.

A very important item to remember about Spin Poker is that if you play all nine lines, you are playing nine times the money, or coin-in, with each spin.  As with multi-play (3/5/10/25/50/100 times) video poker, when you play more lines, variance can increase.  In fact, it actually increases faster in Spin Poker than it does in multi-play video poker.

Here are some examples of the variance differences between multi-play and Spin Poker Jacks or Better.  The variance for 5 Times Play is 27.4, while the variance for 5 lines played in Spin Poker is 34.8 – over one and a quarter (1.27%)  times as much.  For a standard 9 Times Play video poker game, the variance is 35.3.  However, playing 9 lines of Spin Poker has a variance of 53.0 – an increase of 50 percent!

Spin Poker can add excitement, but, like most things in life, it comes at a cost.  If you choose to play Spin Poker, make sure you are not overplaying your bankroll.  Being forced to leave the casino because you went broke definitely puts a damper on the additional excitement gained from playing Spin Poker.

Super Times Pay Poker

Super Times Pay Poker is another variant of video poker that combines a feature of slot machines with traditional video poker.  For an additional credit per hand (the player bets six credits versus the traditional five), a random “times” feature is activated.  This multiplier provides the player with a 2x, 3x, 4x, 5x, 8x, or 10x bonus on any win.  The payout multiplier appears randomly during play.

According to information on the machine, the random multiplier appears once every 15 games and the average amount of the multiplier is 4.05.  If this is correct, and this writer has no reason to believe otherwise, the increase in return is 20.33 percent.  So betting an additional 20 percent gets you 20.33 percent more in return.  Adding the sixth credit makes marginal sense.

To determine the return of any Super Times Pay Poker game simply multiply the original return of the game by 1.00278.  While this sounds really good, pay tables for Super Times Pay Poker are not usually as generous as traditional video poker games, so check the pay table carefully before playing.

The play strategy is exactly the same as for the traditional video poker game, so nothing changes there.  However, variance goes up by about 50 percent.  Super Times Pay Poker can be more exciting than traditional video poker.  Just make sure you find a game with a good return percentage and have sufficient funds to play the extra 20 percent through the game, as well as, account for the increased variance.

Either of the two games mentioned in this article can provide new excitement in your video poker play.  If you have been getting bored with the same old video poker games and like the action of slot machines, give Spin Poker or Super Times Pay Poker a try.  One of these could become your new favorite game.

QUICK TIP

HOW WOULD YOU PLAY THIS HAND?

You are playing 9/6 (full-pay) Jacks or Better with max coin-in of five quarters. You are dealt the following hand:

K_s T_s Q_h 5_c 7_d

How would you play it?

This hand contains two cards of a royal flush (K_s T_s), three of a straight (K_s T_s Q_h), and a couple of high cards (K_s Q_h).  If you chose the two of a royal, the return is not bad, but this is only the third-best save.  Holding the three of a straight is the fifth-best hold.  Holding the king alone is the fourth-best; the queen alone the second-best.  Holding only the queen is better than holding just the king because of the added chances for a straight flush (no chance holding the king because the 10 was discarded), a flush, or a straight (there are three 10’s remaining).

Holding the king and queen is the best hold by over one-tenth of a credit with an expected return of 2.4308 credits in the long run.

Is that the way you would have played it?

March Madness betting volume now tops that of Super Bowl

by Buzz Daly

Whether “bigger is better” may be a matter of debate, but if we’re using financial measurements, being Number 1 stands for more tangible benefits than just bragging rights.

And so, after years of playing bridesmaid to the Super Bowl in terms of wagering volume, March Madness has now assumed leadership as sports betting’s biggest jackpot. While there are no official figures to document this achievement, the general consensus among industry authorities in Las Vegas is that the annual NCAA Men’s Basketball Tournament has finally earned its status as the number-one betting event.

So once again, the city’s bookmakers look forward to the highly anticipated betting frenzy that peaks on opening weekend, Thursday-Sunday, as the action engulfs overflowing sports books and other viewing venues throughout the city. While bracket mania grips the rest of the country, Vegas bettors are focused on the myriad wagering options available to both casual and serious players.

Selection Sunday provides the hype that primes the pump, along with a brief qualifying round on the following Tuesday and Wednesday. Then, this year’s main event tips off Thursday, March 21, in arenas across four U.S. time zones, starting in the east and concluding on the west coast.

Notable for virtually nonstop college basketball accompanied by feverish betting, this hyper-kinetic four-day smorgasbord of hoops action is the vortex of the March Madness tornado. Because Casino Player goes to press well in advance of Selection Sunday, I cannot offer predictions, but it is a given that upsets will occur.

That’s a big part of the attraction of this single-elimination competition. The bewildering, bizarre losses of strong favorites to lightly regarded lower seeds that become “bracket busters” crush the bankrolls of some bettors, while enriching others.

The competition transcends the actual participants. Whatever the current mix of elite teams, mid-majors and Cinderella hopefuls is, the quest to be Number 1 has a life of its own. Bettors love a challenge, and this tournament tests their mettle.

Earlier, I mentioned that March Madness has usurped top spot among betting events from the Super Bowl. Technically, the Super Bowl, while it’s just a single game, has a two-week betting period with lots of additional wagering options. The NCAA basketball tournament covers three weeks and consists of 67 games. Paradoxically, it’s bigger at the beginning of the competition than at the finale, observed Jay Kornegay, LVH Race and Sports Book manager.

Nevada gaming regulators don’t provide a breakout of the amateur vs. pro basketball handles. But based on empirical analysis, the state’s sports books have seen a $100 million jump in basketball betting during March in recent years. Compare that figure with last year’s handle in Nevada on Super Bowl XLVI, which was $93.9 million.

Illegal gambling also reflects the surge in betting on the NCAA event. R.J. Bell of Pregame.com estimated that $12 billion worldwide was bet on March Madness in 2012, compared with $10 billion on the Super Bowl.

The correlation between visibility of the games and betting handle is obvious. Bookmakers agree that exposure on TV begets vigorous action. Every game will be on television via mainstream networks CBS, TNT and TBS. A smaller network, truTV, will also carry the games. If you wish to watch online, the NCAA is charging $3.99 for the entire schedule.

Remember, once the games are underway, the frantic pace of the first four days means that the books are posting odds on the fly as best they can. With that in mind, I have elicited some time-tested guidelines from local sharps for betting the tournament.

* Half-time wagers reduce the books’ edge, since they generally follow a standard formula for posting second-half sides and totals. These numbers are usually based on the closing lines, rather than on the actual flow of the first half. There will be some opportunities in which second-half numbers offer significant edges. But you must be among the first to get your bet down. The books’ subsequent adjustments will reduce your initial advantage.

* Look for teams that play superior defense. These teams are often coached by men who are conservative and have disciplined, patient players. Offensively-oriented teams sometimes don’t travel well, particularly those that depend on three-point shooting. Defense travels.

* If you like a “live dog,” be sure to back up your play with a 50 percent money-line bet. If the team covers but loses outright, you’re still ahead. If it wins straight up, you’re a double winner. If the third outcome occurs, it means you didn’t have a live dog.

* You can get a brain bleed analyzing all the info that is available. One of the most useful capping stats for bettors is turnovers. Check a team’s turnover difference. Opportunistic teams that don’t turn the ball over can overcome squads that are more talented, but that may be less disciplined or not as well coached. A strong back court that handles pressure well, and can also apply it, has a strong chance of making a deep run in the tournament.

Ideally, by the time the title game tips off at the Georgia Dome in Atlanta on April 8, most of the Cinderella teams we bet on will have defied the midnight hour, and enough chalk will have covered so that we’re playing with house money.

Sports Betting Documentary To Give Genuine Glimpse of the Lifestyle

It seems that whenever Hollywood tries to give an accurate depiction of sports betting, and the tenacious souls who make their living hoping the ball bounces their way, Tinsel Town lays an egg.

However, a young filmmaker reportedly has successfully captured the elusive essence of what it means to be a professional bettor. Two years in the making, the documentary “Life on the Line” features prominent Las Vegas sharps doing their thing in the weeks leading up a recent Super Bowl.

I will attend the premiere when it opens here, and give a full report in the next issue of Casino Player. As a bettor who is not superstitious, I’m keeping my fingers crossed that it lives up to the advance word I have heard.

Drawing the line between aggressive and illegal

by Basil Nestor

I was at a house party a few years ago, when someone pulled me aside. I’ll call him Beach Guy because he was blond and suntanned. I figured he liked the beach. BG also liked to play blackjack. He was a friend of a friend, and he knew about my work as a professional player. We had talked about strategy, always very level-headed discussions.

But this time, he was breathless. He cornered me and jabbered with excitement, “I have a way to win a ton of money at blackjack. I want your advice.”

Sounds interesting, right? I smiled and nodded. “Wow! Please tell.”

“I met a guy who has a computer that goes into your shoe. You use toes to work the controls. It helps you count cards, flawlessly. Imagine the profits! He wants $5,000 for it. I’m trying to decide if I should buy it, or maybe you know somebody who makes ‘em cheaper.” Then there was a pause and his eyes got a little wider, sort of a pleading look… “If I buy it, I was hoping you would go in half with me.”

My jaw dropped. BG was lost in euphoria, expecting me to agree with him.

“Pretty cool, huh?”

“No, not cool.” I replied. “You know that’s cheating, right?”

His head tilted sideway, kind of like a confused doggy.

“What? Counting is okay. You say that in your books.”

“Yes, counting is okay. But using a mechanical device to count is absolutely cheating.”

“Yeah, and if they catch me, they kick me out. I need your advice about which casinos would be least likely to catch me.”

I shook my head. “No, dude…cheating is against the law. Nevada statutes and the laws in other states are very clear. You cannot use a device for counting. If they catch you, they won’t eject you. They’ll arrest you and put you in jail.”

Slowly, his face fell as the truth sank in. There would be no pot of gold using a gambling computer.

What Is Illegal?

Some tactics are unwelcome in casinos, but they’re still legal. Counting cards is an example of a tactic that’s legal. Shuffle tracking is also legal. Signaling is legal (in blackjack, but not in poker). Hole-carding is legal. But crimping cards is illegal. Using a blackjack computer is illegal. Marking cards is illegal. What’s the difference? How can you know if a tactic goes over the line?

Let’s look at the law to find where the line is. We’ll use Nevada statutes as an example. Laws in other states tend to be similar, but keep in mind they’re not necessarily identical.

According to Nevada statute 465.075, “It is unlawful for any person at a licensed gaming establishment to use, or possess with the intent to use, any device to assist: (1) In projecting the outcome of the game; (2) In keeping track of the cards played; (3) In analyzing the probability of the occurrence of an event relating to the game…”

A previous section, 465.070, tells us, “It is unlawful for any person: (1) To alter or misrepresent the outcome of a game or other event on which wagers have been made after the outcome is made sure but before it is revealed to the players. (2) To place, increase or decrease a bet or to determine the course of play after acquiring knowledge, not available to all players, of the outcome of the game or any event that affects the outcome of the game…”

Paragraph 7 of 465.070 delivers the coup de grace:

[It is unlawful:] To manipulate, with the intent to cheat, any component of a gaming device in a manner contrary to the designed and normal operational purpose for the component…”

The ellipses indicate that the statutes go into greater detail, but you get the idea. Blackjack computers are forbidden. The law makes exceptions for devices “permitted by the Commission.” Nevada gaming regulations define these as “handwritten records of the cards played at baccarat” and “handwritten records of roulette results.” Faro is also mentioned, but blackjack is not on the list, for obvious reasons.

Besides prohibiting devices, the law makes it clear that you cannot do things that alter the game. These include switching cards, marking cards, or changing previous bets after the outcome of a contest is determined.

Too Close To the Line

Of course, there are gray areas. You’re allowed to use “public” information from a dealer who flashes his hole card. But obviously, you’re not allowed to rest your head on the felt waiting for the flash. Somewhere in between is a line, and if you play too close to that line, you may get burned.

Here’s a real-world example. What I told BG was technically incorrect. Using a blackjack computer is strictly speaking not cheating, because cheating is defined by Nevada law as altering “the elements of chance, method of selection, or criteria which determine the result of the game, the amount or frequency of payment in a game, the value of a wagering instrument, or the value of a wagering credit.”

Nevertheless, a blackjack computer is still illegal because it’s a prohibited “device.” I used the word “cheating” as a shorthand term to help BG understand. But anyone playing word games at this granular level, parsing legal terms hoping to justify particular tactics, is playing too close to the edge.

When you play according to the rules, the worst that should happen is that a casino will eject you. The house is essentially saying, “You’re too clever. We don’t want to play with you anymore.” No harm, no foul. Though realistically, in some extreme situations, you may be incorrectly arrested even when your actions are legal. That’s a subject for another article.

But breaking the law is a different issue. It’s better to be pointed toward the door, than cuffed at the wrists.

Enjoy the game!

**********

Basil Nestor is author of The Smarter Bet Guide to Blackjack, The Smarter Bet Guide to Poker, and other comprehensive gambling guides. Got a question? Visit SmarterBet.com and drop him a line.

How to score big payouts while avoiding the pitfalls

By Henry Tamburin

The larger payoffs come at a price; namely, the payoff for two pair is only even money (or 1 to 1). By transferring some of the game’s payouts from the more frequent two pair to the less frequent four-of-a-kind, it becomes a much more volatile game.

Double Double Bonus Poker (DDB) is the most popular video poker game in the country. That’s because it’s possible to hit several big payouts besides the royal flush, and this draws players to the game. Unfortunately, there are also some pitfalls to playing DDB, which most players are not aware of.

Table 1 summarizes the different pay schedules for DDB that you are likely to encounter. The first thing that should jump out at you is the amount of the payoffs for four-of-a-kind hands. They are rather large payoffs, especially if the fifth card in the hand (the “kicker”) is a specific card.

For example, the payoff for four Aces is 160 times your bet but if the kicker is a 2, 3, or 4, the payoff jumps to 400 coins. (That’s a 2000-coin payoff, or one-half the payoff for a royal flush, betting the maximum of five coins.) Likewise, the payoffs for four 2s, 3s, and 4s increases from 80 to 160 coins times your bet with an Ace, 2, 3, or 4 kicker. These mini-jackpots are the magnet that attracts players to this game.

What most players don’t understand is the larger payoffs come at a price; namely, the payoff for two pair is only even money (or 1 to 1). By transferring some of the game’s payouts from the more frequent two pair to the less frequent four-of-a-kind, it becomes a much more volatile game (more about this shortly).

Tabl1 also summarizes the ER for the different DDB pay schedules (bottom of each column). The best DDB game pays 10 coins for a full house and 6 coins for a flush per coin played (see Table 1). The Expected Return (ER) for 10/6 DDB is 100.07%, meaning the player would have a tiny advantage over the house if he played every hand perfectly.

There are many casinos in the Las Vegas area that offer 10/6 DDB. (Just go to either www.vpfree2.com or the video poker page on www.lasvegasadvisor.com to obtain a list of casinos that offer 10/6 DDB at different denominations.) Unfortunately, 10/6 DDB is not readily available in other areas of the country. (Partly the reason for this in that in some gaming jurisdictions, casinos can’t offer a game where the ER is over 100%). Nevertheless, it behooves you to find a casino that has at least the 9/6 DDB pay schedule, which has a 98.98% ER. (I wouldn’t recommend playing the 9/5 or 8/5 DDB games because the ERs are woeful. Again, check www.vpfree2.com for a list of casinos outside Las Vegas that offer 9/6 DDB.)

The high volatility of DDB results in most players going broke rather quickly if they are not lucky enough to hit one of the high payoff hands. In other words, most players play DDB undercapitalized. For example, supposed you were to play 9/6 Double Double Bonus instead of the much less volatile 8/5 Bonus Poker (BP). Both games have roughly a 99% expected return (ER) but the variance for 9/6 DDB is much higher (41.99) compared to 8/5 BP (20.90) Let’s assume you have a $200 bankroll and you want to play for two hours (1000 hands). By using the bankroll function in the Video Poker for Winners software program, you can determine what your chances are of going broke for each game. The results are:

Playing the low-volatile 8/5 Bonus Poker, you will lose your $200 stake only 2.55% of the time on average (that’s roughly 1 out of every 40 sessions).

Playing the more volatile 9/6 Double Double Bonus Poker, you will lose your $200 stake 28.66% of the time (that’s roughly 11 out of every 40 sessions you’ll tap out).

This means you are 11-times more likely to tap out with your $200 bankroll if you play 9/6 DDB instead of 8/5 BP. The point is this: Video poker games that are highly volatile (such as Double Double Bonus) require more bankroll to prevent going broke. (Also, your “emotional” bankroll will be tested in games that are highly volatile because you can experience some long “dry spells”.) Let me repeat this so it sinks in: DDB is very volatile.

Assuming you have the bankroll and the stomach to play DDB, you should master the playing strategy before you risk any money. The playing strategy for DDB is tricky because of the importance of the ace (see my Tip of the Month). You’ll find a playing strategy for DDB on the video poker page at www.wizardofodds.com. You should also consider practicing the strategy at home with video poker training software until your playing accuracy is at least 99% before risking money in a  casino. (I recommend Video Poker For Winners or Optimum Video Poker training software, both available on my web site.) I also recommend that you purchase the DDB strategy card by Dancer and Daily and take it with you when you play so that if you are not sure how to play a hand, you can refer to the strategy card.

TABLE 1

Double Double Bonus Poker Pay Schedule

Payout Per Coin Played

* 4000 coins for a five-coin royal flush

Tamburin Tip of the Month

You are playing Double Double Bonus and are dealt the following two hands. How would you play them?

You should break up the full house in the first hand, hold only the three aces, and draw two more cards. In the second hand, you break up the two pair, hold the pair of aces, and draw three cards.

————————————————————————————————————-

Henry Tamburin is a blackjack and video poker expert. He is the host of the smartgaming.com website and the editor of the Blackjack Insider newsletter (for a free three-month subscription, visit www.bjinsider.com/free). For a free copy of his Casino Gambling Catalog, which contains books, strategy cards, and software for video poker players, call toll free 1-888-353-3234, or visit the web store at smartgaming.com.

Single high cards bring more winners, but pairs bring more money

By John Grochowski

It is true that two-pair hands are the most frequent winners when you start with a low pair. But you also get three of a kind and four of a kind a lot more often starting with a pair rather than a single high card.

There are a handful of plays in video poker that we’re called on to make over and over and over again. They’re so commonplace that we might make them several times in a short session.

Making the right plays in those situations goes a long way to determining our personal payback percentages. When you read 9-6 Jacks or Better returns 99.5 percent, or 9-6 Double Double Bonus Poker returns 99.0 percent, that’s with optimal play. If you don’t know the right cards to hold, your return will vary.

One of those key hands is when you’re dealt a low pair and a single high card. If you’re dealt a pair of 7s and a Queen, with no other cards that help your hand, which do you hold?

That’s a hand many players struggle with, but if you consistently hold the low pair, you’ll be better off in the long run.

When discussing that situation, my mind goes back to a flight to Las Vegas, during which I was whiling away the time practicing 9-6 Double Double Bonus Poker on my laptop. That’s not one of my favorite Las Vegas games, because you can do better than that 99.0 percent return on many Vegas games. I seek out the joints where I can still play full-pay games that return more than 100 percent to experts, including Deuces Wild (100.8) and 10-7-5 Double Bonus (100.2).

Near my Midwestern home, though, 9-6 Double Double Bonus is often one of the best games in the house, so it’s in the mix of games I practice regularly.

As I practiced, the woman seated next to me alternated between reading a book and watching me play, with a little chat in between. Time after time, she’d see me hold a low pair instead of a single high card, and she wanted to know if there was a method to my madness.

She introduced herself as Janet, and said video poker was her favorite game. “Are you sure that’s the right play?” she asked.

The software I was using would warn me of any incorrect plays, I explained. Holding the low pair is mathematically the better play.

“I always thought holding the low pair was better in Jacks or Better, but that in Double Double Bonus, where you only get your money back on two pair, you were better off to hold the high card.”

I knew at that point that she’d played a fair amount of video poker. Changing strategy with different games and pay tables is the kind of thing video poker players fret about.

I explained to her that you win more HANDS if you hold just the high card, but you win more MONEY if you hold the low pair.

“More money is good,” she said, laughing. “But why do you win more money? Aren’t most of your winners going to be two-pair hands? In Double Double Bonus, those hands pay the same amount as when you pair up a high card. It’s not like Jacks or Better, where you get 2-for-1 on two pair.”

It is true that two-pair hands are the most frequent winners when you start with a low pair. But you also get three of a kind and four of a kind a lot more often starting with a pair rather than a single high card. And in Double Double Bonus, those quads are huge.

I asked if she wanted to see the full breakdown. She did, so I clicked on “analyze hand” and defined the hand as a Queen of hearts, 7s of spades and diamonds, a 10 of clubs and a 5 of spades.

If you hold just the Queen, there are 178,365 possible four-card draws. The majority, 118,413 of them, bring no payoff. The next biggest share, 45,324, get us our money back—five coins on a five-coin maximum bet—with a pair of Jacks or better. (The biggest share of those are Queens, of course, but we will also sometimes find pairs of Jacks, Kings and Aces in our draws.) We’ll also get five-coin returns on 9,033 possible two-pair hands, 15-coin returns on 4,177 three of a kinds, 20 coins on 573 straights, 25 coins on 492 flushes, 45 on 297 full houses, 250 on 49 four of a kinds consisting of 5s through Kings, 400 on each of three four of a kinds consisting of 2s, 3s or 4s, and 800 on the one four-Ace hand.

Average all that out, and you’ll find that you’ve had winners on 33.6 percent of hands and averaged a 2.20-coin return for every five coins wagered.

What if you hold the pair of 7s instead? That narrows the possibilities. There are only 16,125 possible three-card draws. Again, the majority, 11,559 hands, bring no return. There are no flush or straight possibilities, so our paying hands will include 5 coins on each of 2,592 two-pair hands, 15 on each of 1,854 three of a kinds, 45 on each of 165 full houses and 250 on each of 45 four-seven hands.

We have winners on only 28.3 percent of all possibilities, but our average return leaps to 3.67 coins per five coins wagered.

Why? Because a much higher proportion of our winners get us more than our money back. Hold just the Queen, and 54,357 of 59,952 possible winners, or 90.7 percent, are either high pairs or two pairs that just get our money back. Hold the 7s, and the 2,592 two-pairs in our 4,566 winners mean we get the bottom-end five-coin returns on only 56.8 percent of our winners.

We win less often when we hold the pair, but we also win more money.

There’s a compromise option that Janet and I didn’t discuss, but which came up in January in an email exchange with a reader.

“Would a reasonable compromise be to hold both the pair and the high card,” he asked,  “so you have a chance at the pair winners and the pair of Jacks?”

Holding both the pair and the high card does bring a higher return than holding just the high card, but not as much as holding just the low pair. In our sample hand, holding 7-7-Queen brings winners on 25.3 percent of possible draws, with an average return of 2.63 coins per five coins wagered. That beats the 2.20 for holding just the Queen, but is far below the 3.67 for holding 7-7 and discarding the other three.

Incidentally, in the compromise option, holding 7-7-Queen is no better than holding 7-7-10 or 7-7-5. Since all winners given those starts will be at least two pairs, high pair winners don’t enter the equation and rank doesn’t matter. But the best play is to hold the 6s and discard everything else.

When I went back to practicing and Janet went back to her book, I asked  if she was now sufficiently bored. She probably didn’t expect a lecture on numbers when she booked the flight.

She laughed. “Sometimes small questions get big answers,” she said. “But I learned something. I’ll be holding those pairs.”

Get maximum bang for your buck by playing the right number of lines

By Bill Burton

As the number of coins needed for maximum bets increased, it was only logical that the denomination would have to be lowered if the casinos expected to get much action from the average player.

When I first started visiting the casinos, playing a slot machine involved a fairly simple decision. The slot machines were reel-type machines, and you had the choice of playing quarter or dollar machines. Then, when you sat down at the machine, you could choose to play one to three coins per spin. It was easy to calculate which denomination to play and how many coins to play per spin, based on the amount of money you had to play with for your playing session.

Decisions became a little harder around the turn of the century with the introduction of the multi-line, multi-coin video slot machines.  Aristocrat Leisure from Australia was one of the first companies to introduce these types of machines. More slot makers started offering multi line/coin machines. As the popularity of these machines grew, the slot makers tried to outdo each other with more elaborate designs. More pay lines were added, and more coins could be bet on each line.

As the number of coins needed for maximum bets increased, it was only logical that the denomination would have to be lowered if the casinos expected to get much action from the average player. Playing a machine with nine pay lines that accepted five coins per line would cost the quarter player $11.25 per spin.

This led to the mass introduction of the nickel slot machines. A 45-coin bet on nickel machine would cost a player $2.25 per spin. The casinos found out that many players were willing to increase their bets on the nickel machines, because in their minds, they were still playing nickels. A player used to playing two or three coins in a quarter slot machine would not hesitate to sit down and play one coin per line on a nine-line machine for forty-five cents. Many will increase the number of coins bet per line after a winning spin. These same players would not think of switching over to a dollar machine after a winning spin, but with the push of a button they can up their bet without a second thought.

The success of the nickel machines prompted the slot makers to add even more lines and increase the number of coins that could be wagered on each line. Some of these games again became too expensive for the average player to play maximum coins, even at the nickel level. The next logical step was to drop the denomination down again to the penny denomination.

Around 2004, penny slot machines started appearing on the casino floors. In the last few years, the majority of new slot machines added to casinos floors have been the penny denomination machines. The number of pay lines vary on the machines from nine to 200, or even more. You can wager one to 150 coins per line. There really is no standard number of lines on these new slot machines. Each game is different, even if they are made by the same manufacturer.

How Many Lines?

At some point you have to wonder how many lines are enough. With each additional line that you play, you increase your chances of lining up the right combination of symbols to give you a “winning spin,” but this does not necessarily mean that you will earn a monetary win.

One thing that makes the new machines so popular is the excitement of the high hit frequency. Because there are more lines on which the symbols can appear, there are more chances of hitting a winning combination. The hit frequency will be higher, although sometimes a “win” will be less than the coins you played for that spin. Many times, your initial wager is more than you will collect for a winning spin. If you are wagering 25 credits per spin but only get five or ten back for a winning spin, it won’t take long for the machine to eat up your credits.

Most of us realize that we’ll never get rich playing the nickel or penny slot machines, so our main objective is to get the most enjoyment out of playing the games and to make our playing time last as long as possible.

Unless you are playing a progressive machine, there is no reason to play the maximum coins on every available line. If you choose to play all of the lines without trying for the progressive jackpot, then you should play a single credit on each line. There really is no point in playing any number of credits between a single credit and the maximum (such as two or three credits per line).

Ideally, you should search for a machine that offers the maximum number of pay lines that you can afford to play. If you find a game you really want to play that has more pay lines than you’re comfortable with, you can simply reduce the number of lines that you wager on. Take a look at the pay table in the help screen and look for the minimum pay out for a winning spin. If the minimum is five credits, you can reduce the number of lines you play to five. This will guarantee that you will break even if you have a winning spin.

When you play the slots, you want to get the most entertainment as possible for your money. Playing the minimum, or reducing the number of lines, can help you achieve this.

Until next time, remember: Luck comes and goes, but knowledge stays forever.

Bally mines cable TV’s hottest reality series with “Pawn Stars”

by Frank Legato

For many decades, the pawn shops of Las Vegas were a familiar site to tourists—the “Cash for Gold” signs have always been a common site in the Downtown area, and Vegas has always been a prime location for pawnbrokers.

But when Rick Harrison opened the World Famous Gold & Silver Pawn Shop on Las Vegas Boulevard in Downtown Las Vegas in 1988, he probably didn’t expect that the shop would one day be, well, world-famous. Enter reality TV. In 2009, Harrison’s shop made reality TV history with the debut of Pawn Stars. Since that debut, the shop’s employees—Harrison, his father Richard “Old Man” Harrison, his son Corey “Big Boss” Harrison and Corey’s childhood friend, Austin “Chumlee” Russell—have become international stars, and the shop itself has become a major tourist attraction Downtown.

And the show? Well, it not only has been the History Channel’s most-watched show; it has become the No. 1 cable TV show in the world.

The premise is simple: Viewers are invited into the world of pawn-shop negotiations involving a variety of fascinating items brought in by customers off the street. Most of the items have some historical significance, and are typically brought into the shop by people looking to cash in on their family treasures. The banter among the staff is a sideline to tough negotiations with customers over price, and Harrison has a stable of experts on whom he calls to verify the authenticity of things like a gun once used in the Hatfield-McCoy feud, a 1930s toy, an antique guitar, a classic muscle car—you name it.

Viewers have gotten to know each of the pawn shop’s characters—the no-nonsense Rick Harrison, the grumpy Old Man who heaps verbal abuse on everyone, the tough negotiator Corey, and the goofy comic relief, Chumlee. Along with the fascinating items up for sale from people off the street, it all makes for great entertainment.

It also happens to be a perfect theme for a video slot machine.

Jean Venneman, vice president of product management and licensing for slot-maker Bally Technologies, knew Pawn Stars would be a slam-dunk as a slot. “Our general philosophy at Bally when looking for brands is to meet a couple of objectives,” Venneman says. “One is that it be something the player knows and loves. Two, there should be something about the brand we think can make an interesting slot experience. Pawn Stars hit the nail on the head both ways.”

On the popularity front, it helped that the show is known worldwide. “It’s a very, very popular show,” Venneman says, “not just in the U.S., but globally. It’s popular in Latin America; it’s popular in Europe. It has a broad reach.” She says the fact of the show’s popularity was driven home at the recent Global Gaming Expo trade show, when three of the four “Pawn Stars” made an appearance at the Bally booth. “They were mobbed,” she says. “It was fun and crazy how many people wanted their autographs and pictures.”

Venneman’s team at Bally mined the popularity of the show itself with a lot of help from the four stars themselves—all of them agreed to film full video segments for the slot machine. (It was handy that the now-famous shop is about 15 minutes from Bally headquarters in Las Vegas.)

“They’ve been a joy to work with,” Venneman says. “Chumlee, who is definitely a fan favorite, is also game for a lot of fun and craziness. We had him dress up in various costumes. For instance, if the player gets a certain slice on the bonus wheel, they’ll see Chumlee dressed up like an Egyptian. He’ll say, ‘Oh, you’ve won a bonus,’ and hand the player a gold bar. Players will get a chuckle and win money at the same time.”

It was all part of an effort to capitalize on the fact that Pawn Stars has all the elements of a great slot game—elements of risk, entertainment and gambling that are inherent in the show were easy to translate into slot features.

“What goes on in the game is very similar to what happens on the TV show,” Venneman says. “In the game, the player collects objects, brings them into the store, and meets one of the cast members. Then, they either sell the object, or they may negotiate. The play experience is very similar to what goes on in the actual show.”

Negotiating Bonuses

The Pawn Stars slot calls on some great Bally technology to recreate the TV show. It’s on the Pro Wheel cabinet, which houses two 22-inch video screens in a curved ergonomic setup with an integral bonus wheel on top.

The five-reel, 25-line base game can be changed to reflect your favorite character from the show. Similar to what Bally did with the “NASCAR” game, you can select Chumlee, Rick, the Old Man or Corey at the outset and the colors, pictures and symbols will change to reflect that character. Also, all line wins formed by that character’s reel symbol in the base game are doubled.

Also during the base game, an “Item Selection Feature” allows the player to pick one of 20 spots to reveal a credit award and an item to be pawned later. The player stores any items collected in an “inventory” for use in the main bonus event.

The game is packed with bonuses, chosen during a spin of the central wheel. When “Diamond Wheel” symbols land on the first and fifth reels, the player spins the wheel. (You can either touch the screen to spin the wheel or use the “iDeck” LCD button pad.) The slices on the wheel relate to all the various bonus events—Free Games, the Chumlee Video Bonus, the Treasure Bonus, or the core feature of the game, the Negotiation Feature.

The Treasure Bonus displays a video from Pawn Stars, and then awards a multiple of the player’s total bet, from 4X to 60X. The Chumlee bonus features Chumlee in one of his costumes awarding a multiplier from 2X to 20X. The Free Games feature awards 10, 15 ort 20 free games with a random multiplier from 3X to 6X.

The Negotiation Feature is where the show really comes alive within the slot game. One of the Pawn Stars appears on the screen, and invites the player to pick one of the items earned during the base game. If no items have been earned, one appears for the bonus.

“In its simplest form, the character says, ‘Hey, that’s a great-looking item; I’ll give you 10,000 credits for it,’ and you’re done,” Venneman explains. However, it’s usually much more fun: The Pawn Star will say the line with which fans of the show are very familiar: “How much were you looking to get out of it?” The player is shown several amounts, and picks one. Then, the negotiation begins. “Oh, I can’t pay that. I’ll give you….” The player has the choice to accept the amount, or offer an alternative from several choices on the screen. Eventually, you’ll reach a bonus award somewhere in the middle.

Another possibility drawn directly from the show is verification by an expert of an item’s authenticity. If the Pawn Star says, “I’ll call in an expert,” the player has a choice to accept the previous offer or allow the expert to come in. If the expert decides the item is authentic, the player is awarded double the last offer. If the item is bogus, the player gets nothing—a classic gambling feature drawn directly from a typical Pawn Stars episode.

“One of the exciting things about the game is that the outcome is so varied,” Venneman says. “The player never knows how far he’s going to get into the bonus, or what’s going to happen. There’s a lot of player decision-making. Do I want to take my grand piano in, or my guitar or diamond necklace?”

The game is approved in several markets, and according to Venneman, Pawn Stars should be out in the casinos by the time you read this. “We thought this would be a good game, but we were pleasantly surprised at the reaction it’s getting,” she says. “It is really resonating with people; so many people have come up to me and said, ‘I’m really a fan.’ I think we have something really good on our hands.”

By all indications, Chumlee agrees. •

by H. Scot Krause

New Megabucks Jackpot Winner at M Resort

A Las Vegas woman is the latest Megabucks winner.  The big winner, who wished to remain anonymous, stopped by the M Resort Friday, Dec. 14, to redeem some dining coupons and use her free play credits.  Needless to say, she used them well by hitting the gigantic Megabucks jackpot for over $17.3 million!  According to International Game Technology (IGT), the lucky slot player didn’t even realize she had won the top prize until another player pointed it out.  The total jackpot was $17,329,817.  After the big payout, the Megabucks system was reset to its starting jackpot total of $10 million.

To claim the top prize, customers must play the maximum number of coins and line up the three Megabucks symbols.  Prior to mid-December, the last time the Megabucks progressive hit in Nevada was at the Grand Sierra Casino in Reno, where a player hit for $10.3 million June 15, 2011.  Earlier that year it hit twice within three months at Aria in Las Vegas.  The recent prize was well below the record $39.7 million Megabucks jackpot won by a California software engineer in March, 2003 at the Excalibur.

According to the rules laid out by IGT, the slot machine manufacturer and owner of the Megabucks brand, the winner has two months to decide whether to opt for a reduced one-time payment or to take the jackpot in 25 annual installments.  IGT operates the Megabucks system, which is located on a series of linked progressive slot machines throughout Nevada’s casinos.  The recent winner had yet to announce her decision as of press time.  Whatever she decides, the Las Vegas resident told IGT that she plans to use the money to pay off her house and take care of her family.

Rolling on the River – New Millionaires in St. Louis

It was a happy holiday season in St. Louis for two River City Casino guests.  The first, who wished to remain anonymous, won $2,734,893.37 playing a Wheel of Fortune penny slot machine Christmas night.  Another guest was set to become a millionaire on Dec. 30 during the casino’s “Mychoice Mymillion” drawing finale.  The winner had yet to be announced as this issue went to press.

Massive Christmas Eve Jackpot At Four Queens

If you happened to be in downtown Las Vegas on Christmas Eve and saw a strange object streaking across the night time sky, rest assured it wasn’t a UFO. More likely it was a hefty visitor from the Great White North, carrying the perfect Christmas gift for one lucky gambler.

Indeed the man received his special present while playing a Millionaire Sevens slot machine at the Four Queens Hotel and Casino in downtown Vegas.  He placed a $3 wager on the $1 machine and hit the jackpot for $1,352,715.  The man chose to remain anonymous but was said to be enjoying the best Christmas of his life.

Michigan Man Hits For $744,966 Jackpot To Kick Off 2013

It was a New Year’s Eve to remember for one lucky patron at Michigan’s Four Winds New Buffalo casino.

Timothy T. from Buchanan, MI, came to the Four Winds for the New Year’s Eve celebration and walked out into the new year with three quarters of a million dollars.  He had been playing the The Great and Powerful Oz penny slot machine when the jackpot struck. He said he plans to invest his winnings.

Four Winds New Buffalo features a 130,000 square foot gaming floor and is home to 3,000 slot machines, a smoke-free slot room, and 66 table games. The casino also has wide-area progressives, which link to other Native American casinos around the country and produces some of the highest jackpots in the region.

Long-running Show Begins Third Decade on Strip

Legends in Concert lives on at Flamingo Las Vegas

by Steve Kieva

 “Las Vegas is the Entertainment Capital of the World and in such a dynamic city, we considered Flamingo Las Vegas the perfect location to present our enhanced show, and concluded the experience will be the ultimate ‘total reward’ for our incredibly talented cast, legion of loyal fans, and new guests,” said Brian Brigner, chief operating officer of On Stage Entertainment, producers of Legends.

After a record-breaking four-year engagement at Harrah’s Las Vegas, Legends in Concert will celebrate the beginning of its third decade on the Las Vegas Strip with a new long-term home at Flamingo Las Vegas beginning in February, 2013.  The most acclaimed tribute show in entertainment history held its last performance at Harrah’s Las Vegas Sunday, Dec. 30, 2012.

“Many shows come and go in Las Vegas, but we are thrilled to keep Legends in Concert in the Caesars Entertainment family and help the show celebrate 30 extraordinary years in Las Vegas with a new experience for its fans and our guests,” said Rick Mazer, president of Flamingo Las Vegas.  “This show is a unique and favorite Las Vegas institution and will be an amazing addition to the stellar entertainment lineup at Flamingo Las Vegas, which includes Donny & Marie, George Wallace, Vinnie Favorito and X Burlesque.”

“Las Vegas is the Entertainment Capital of the World and in such a dynamic city, we considered Flamingo Las Vegas the perfect location to present our enhanced show, and concluded the experience will be the ultimate ‘total reward’ for our incredibly talented cast, legion of loyal fans, and new guests,” said Brian Brigner, chief operating officer of On Stage Entertainment, producers of Legends.  “We are delighted to expand our relationship with Caesars Entertainment, move the flagship version of our production into the Flamingo Showroom, and share the stage with Donny & Marie and George Wallace in entertaining audiences at Flamingo Las Vegas.”
Featuring re-creations of superstars of yesterday and today, backed by a live rockin’ band and the Legends singers and dancers, Legends in Concert is a one-of-a-kind experience.  Performances feature such gone-but-not-forgotten greats as Elvis Presley, Marilyn Monroe, Liberace, Michael Jackson, Whitney Houston, and many others.  The show began injecting more current pop culture in recent years by also paying tribute to living superstars of the day with re-creations of Rod Stewart, Elton John, Stevie Wonder, Steven Tyler, Lady Gaga, Whoopi Goldberg, Cher, Madonna, Adele and Britney Spears, among others.
With an ever-changing line-up, elaborate theatrical sets and costumes, and a full array of incredible special effects that include three dimensional multimedia and state-of-the-art lighting and sound systems, Legends in Concert is truly a must-see show for Las Vegas visitors and locals alike.

Legends in Concert will begin performances in the Flamingo Showroom in February.  Initial show times will be Sunday and Monday at 4 p.m. and 10 p.m., and Tuesday-Friday at 4 p.m.  More details will be announced after the first of the year regarding additional scheduled performances and special events as Legends in Concert ramps up for a year-long series of momentous festivities and incredible performances.

Fremont Street Experience Reveals SlotZilla Plans

Fremont Street Experience has announced plans to build a new, permanent zipline attraction, SlotZilla.  A six-foot model of the attraction was unveiled during a late November press conference.  With a price tag of $11 million, the 11-story slot-machine themed takeoff platform located near the intersection of Las Vegas Boulevard and Fremont Street will forever alter the downtown Las Vegas skyline.

Construction on the new project was expected to begin immediately after New Year’s with an anticipated opening during the first half of 2013.  SlotZilla will be a major new icon for downtown Las Vegas and the Fremont Street Experience, a five-block entertainment district that attracts nearly 16 million visitors annually.
“We wanted to take a ride typically found in the jungle, give it amusement park features and qualities, and build it in the middle of downtown,” said Jeff Victor, President of Fremont Street Experience.  “Designing a zipline to go across 1,700 feet with only a slight incline was a real challenge and required us to think outside the canopy and develop new technologies.  To meet this challenge, we designed a first-of-its kind propulsion launch system, and created a steeper incline that will actually take riders through the Viva Vision canopy, giving them the thrill of their lives.”

SlotZilla will feature two levels of thrills.  Riders on the upper Zoomline will take off over 100 feet above ground while lying flat in a harness.  They’ll be launched at a speed that will blast them 1,700 feet through and under the Fremont Street Experience canopy.  Riders on the lower Zipline will take off about 70 feet above ground and zip 850 feet to a mid-point landing platform.  Both levels deliver a ride experience that is truly unique –the experience of flying above thousands of people on Fremont Street and under the Viva Vision canopy, the world’s largest video screen.
“The launched zipline will provide an incredible experience for riders and is a first for the zipline industry,” said Danny Boren, President of Skyline.  “Additionally, this attraction will have increased guest capacity as a result of the integrated ride controls and automated safety features, which are exciting new developments for the zipline industry.”
The take-off platform is a multi-level, 11-story structure designed to look like a giant slot machine, complete with a lever and reels.  Each time riders launch from the Zoomline platform, the lever will engage, the reels will “spin” and a beacon will illuminate.  The slot machine is adorned with two Vegas showgirls standing 37 feet tall and will include a 20-foot wide, 10-foot tall “Welcome to Fabulous Downtown Las Vegas” sign, providing a great photo op for tourists.

SlotZilla will have two landing platforms.  Zipline riders will land on a platform near the intersection at 3rd Street and Casino Center.  Zoomline riders will land on a platform located on top of a new Main Street Stage.

To make way for construction of this amazing ride, the current temporary zipline, Flightlinez, had to be closed for a short time.   SlotZilla is scheduled to open in June.  Fremont Street Experience anticipates hiring approximately 100 employees to operate the new permanent ride.

Ticket prices are expected to be $20 for the Zipline; $30 for the Zoomline; and $40 for both.  For those who want to book a time window for their ride and avoid the lines, advanced ticket sales and reservations will be available.

Off-Broadway musical Nunsense continues successful Vegas run

The award-winning, hilarious, Off-Broadway musical and comedy hit, Nunsense, begins its third successful year at the LVH – Las Vegas Hotel & Casino this year.  The hysterically funny show can be seen in the Shimmer Cabaret Saturday-Thursday at 4 p.m.

The comedy, about a group of nuns putting on a fundraiser, has entertained people from around the globe.  After it’s record-breaking, 10-year run in New York, Dan Goggin’s musical comedy has been performed in more than 8,000 productions.

The show’s ensemble consists of five talented singers, dancers, and a live band.  There are minimal props and set changes, putting the spotlight on the performers and their spunky portrayal of each nun in this comical quintet.  They may all be dressed the same, but their personalities are distinct, creating some humorous scenarios when all five nuns are on stage.

Ticket prices start at $29.95 (plus tax and service charge) and can be purchased at the Las Vegas Hotel box office, online at WWW.THELVH.COM, or by calling 702-732-5755 or 1-800-222-5361.

Dinner and show packages, which include Benihana or The Buffet, are available for $69.95 and $59.95, plus tax, respectively.

IN OTHER LAS VEGAS NEWS

Congratulations are in order for Wolfgang Puck.  His restaurant, Spago, recently celebrated its 20th anniversary in the Forum Shops at Caesars Palace. Puck is considered the father of the culinary revolution in Las Vegas.

There’s a new show at the Plaza in downtown Las Vegas that is garnering some very good reviews.  The show, Grand Ole Vegas Revue, was created by Jonathan and Marisa Gorst who worked in Phantom which ended its run at the Venetian in September of last year.  The new show features experienced Broadway and Las Vegas Strip performers, is family-friendly, and takes the audience on a nostalgic journey.  Performances are 5 p.m., Saturday-Mondays, and Wednesdays.

World renowned, multi-platinum recording artist Matt Goss will continue to entertain audiences with his smooth vocal styling at Caesars Palace with extended dates through March.  Transforming The Gossy Room at Cleopatra’s Barge into a vintage-like Vegas lounge every Friday and Saturday evening, the British crooner’s show offers maître d’ seating, tableside cocktail service, and specialty cocktails.

Michael Mina, who closed his Seablue restaurant at the MGM Grand in August, will open a gastropub named 1842 Pub.  Menu emphasis will be on craft beer, snacks, shellfish, sausage, and burgers.

     Kate’s Korner, the long-time snack bar and ice cream shop at the Gold Coast, has closed.  Construction is underway on what will be a Subway.

The Golden Nugget has introduced 74 “Gold Club” rooms to its Rush Tower inventory.  The new rooms feature an elevated level of luxury and room amenities.  A special card is needed to access these rooms.

The Amazing Johnathan has had enough of Las Vegas it seems.  The magician and comedic entertainer recently closed his show after 13 years of performing at various Vegas venues.  According to posts made on his Facebook page, Johnathan was not happy at Bally’s.

Bingo’s now a Drag at Circus Circus.  On the first Wednesday of every month, you can find a session called PRIDE Family Bingo.  Sessions take place in the hotel’s Grand Ballroom and are hosted by drag queens, Diana Prince and Norma Llyaman.  The sessions start at 7 p.m.  There’s also a happy hour that starts one hour prior that must surely be a blast!

The Bingo sessions include special games, prizes, and discounted eats and drinks.  Bingo packets are $10 for 11 games.  Raffle tickets are $5 for ten.  All proceeds from PRIDE Family Bingo benefit SNAPI, the Southern Nevada Association of Pride, Inc.

Australian sensation Human Nature has announced a new headlining residency at The Venetian Las Vegas.  The vocal group’s new show, Smokey Robinson presents Human Nature, opened in January.

The “new” Rockhouse is set to open in The Grand Canal Shoppes at The Venetian.  Rockhouse closed at the Imperial Palace back in May,

The D Grill is now open.  Located inside its namesake recently transformed downtown property, the casual restaurant serves an extensive menu of contemporary American classics and signature dishes daily around the clock.      Just steps from the iconic Fremont Street Experience, the new restaurant serves an array of satisfying meals for early birds, night owls, and everyone in between.  Housed in the space formerly occupied by the Courtyard Grill on the D’s second floor adjacent to the Vintage Casino, the D Grill offers convenient dining inside a freshly remodeled venue.  Each meal at the D Grill is prepared completely from scratch using only fresh, never frozen ingredients.  With a diverse menu offering more than 75 breakfast, lunch, dinner, and dessert items, there’s something to please every appetite.

The name “Imperial Palace” is no more.  The property is now officially The Quad Resort and Casino, or simply “The Quad.”

I mentioned the popularity of former American Idol winner Taylor Hicks‘ show at Bally’s in a previous column.  It looks like it was more popular than I realized.  Hicks’ contract has been extended until the end of 2013.  Tickets remain $39.99.

The buffet at Aria has reopened.  It’s currently serving breakfast, lunch, dinner, weekend brunch, and what’s being called a “bottomless beverage” service.

The Skybox Sports Bar and Grill at the Aria sports book has closed.  A “new concept” will take its place, but has yet to be announced.

The Plaza is the first hotel in Nevada to offer its guests free luggage service to and from McCarran International Airport.  The service is offered by other resorts, but for a fee.  The company providing the service is called Bags, Inc.  Guests can have their bags transported if they’re flying Southwest, Delta, United, American, US Airways, JetBlue, WestJet, or Virgin Atlantic.  Personally, I’m not so sure that I want to be separated from my bags during a trip.

Hidden Treasure

CAFÉ MARTORANO at the RIO

Martorano’s serves simple, old-school Italian-American home cooking in a chic after-dark environment.  The dining experience is enhanced by an atmosphere that includes the sounds of Frank Sinatra, Dean Martin, and Bobby Darin.  As the night progresses the music gets louder and you’ll hear the sounds of classic R&B and disco with a touch of slow jams and classic rock.  If the mood should strike you, dancing is encouraged.

Recently, owner/chef Steve Martorano revamped the menu at both his Florida and Vegas restaurants.  “I’ve always done things my way,” he explained.  “I’m old-school Italian and I’ve always cooked what I love to eat, but my tastes have grown and my new menu reflects what and how I’m eating now.”

The restaurant’s signature item is their meatballs which are described as “the best in the world.”  The meatballs are offered in a variety of ways that include the following:  Homemade Meatball with the south Philly salad – $18; Homemade Meatball with gravy and ricotta cheese – $14; Spaghetti and Meatball served old school with ricotta cheese – $25.  The meatballs are the size of a baseball so there is only one per serving.

Pasta dishes on the menu at Martarano’s include:  Spaghetti Marinara with San Marzano tomatoes & fresh basil – $18; Bucatini Carbonara with pancetta, egg, cream, lots of Parmigiana-Reggiano cheese and fresh black pepper – $24; Fusilli Pollo with diced, breaded chicken cutlet, hot and sweet peppers, San Marzano tomato sauce, and finished with Parmigiano-Reggiano cheese – $28.

Other standard entrees include:  Chicken Cutlet Martorano, a lightly breaded chicken breast with hot and sweet peppers, tomato, and provolone – $26; Veal Cutlet Parmigiana with tender cutlet of veal and fresh mozzarella – $30; and Chicken Cutlet Parmigiano – $24.

My wife, Dorene, and I dined at Martorano’s last July and were treated to a wonderful meal from start to finish.  Specials and menu items were explained in detail and the service (Scott) was excellent.  Restaurant manager, Jeffery Smith, stopped by our table and introduced himself.  Jeffery has been with Martorano’s over seven years and was a wealth of information.  He told us about the history of the restaurant and provided us with a plethora of insight on food selection and preparation.  There was nothing about the restaurant he didn’t know!

Martorano’s hours of operation are Sunday-Thursday from 5:30-10:00 p.m.; and Friday and Saturday 5:30 – 10:30 p.m.  The restaurant is located on the second level in the Masquerade Village section of the Rio.  I recommend adding Martorano’s to your Las Vegas “To Do” list.  Just like us, I know you’ll enjoy the experience.

SAVE MONEY EATING IN LAS VEGAS

The Eastside Cannery, 5255 Boulder Highway, is offering an All-Day Buffet Pass for only $7 on Wednesdays.  Yes, you read that correctly.  This is probably the best buffet bargain ever offered!

Buffet hours are 11 a.m. until 8 p.m.  The Eastside Cannery does not have a breakfast buffet.  The buffet offers fresh cuisine from around the world with seven delicious serving stations.  Present a Can Club Card to receive this special price.

Other food specials at the Eastside Cannery include:  Beef Stroganoff, for just $5.99, served at Snaps restaurant from 11 a.m. to 10 p.m.; a Ham and Eggs breakfast that includes hash browns and toast for only $3.99 from 6:30 to 10 a.m.; and at the Deli, you can get a BBQ Pulled Pork Sandwich served with French Fires for only $5.99.  A beverage purchase is required with all three of these meals.

The Courtyard Café at The Orleans and Café Siena at Suncoast are offering a steak and lobster dinner special for only $7.11 for B Connected members.  It’s available nightly from 7-11 p.m.  This special has been ongoing since November, but I suggest calling ahead before you go to make sure it’s still current.

Cabo Wabo Cantina inside the Miracle Mile Shops at Planet Hollywood has introduced a new $5.99 breakfast that features two eggs, potatoes, choice of any meat, and toast daily from 8-11 a.m.  Bottomless mimosas are available for an additional $5.99.

Station Casinos continue great dining deals

All Pasta Cucina restaurants (Boulder Station, Palace Station, Sunset Station, and Texas Station) have an entirely new menu with many entrees staring at just $6.99 with your Boarding Pass card.  All entrées include garlic breadsticks with Alfredo and marinara dipping sauces, plus your choice of homemade minestrone soup, or a house salad.

If you like Baja Shrimp Tacos, Cabo Mexican Restaurant has them for only

$6.99 and they’re served with rice and beans.  Show your Boarding Pass card and purchase a beverage to take advantage of this deal.  It’s available at Cabo Mexican Restaurants at Boulder Station, Palace Station, Santa Fe Station, and Sunset Station, as well as, Amigo’s at Fiesta Henderson and Garduno’s at Fiesta Rancho.

In addition to the items mentioned above, Station Casinos continually offer the lowest buffet prices in Las Vegas.  Breakfast is only $4.99; Lunch is $6.99; and dinner is just $7.99.  Note:  Prices may vary by property – for example, the dinner buffet at Green Valley Ranch and Red Rock Resort is $13.99.  Just show your Boarding Pass card.

At the Red Zone Sports bar inside the Gold Coast, you can get a great burger and fries for just $5.25.  You can also get a huge order of chicken wings for $5.95.  Specials for $3.99 are available from midnight-2 a.m.

     The Gold Coast offers rock bottom prices for their buffets.  Breakfast is just $5.99; lunch is $7.99; and dinner, featuring prime rib, is a low $9.99.  The Dinner buffet on Friday is a Seafood extravaganza for $19.95.  There’s also a Sunday brunch for just $10.99.  Show your B Connected card for these great prices.

In addition to inexpensive buffets, the Gold Coast is currently offering rooms starting at $25.  Visit www.goldcoastcasino.com for details.  Downtown, the Plaza is offering rooms for just $15 per night on select dates.  Get the details at www.plazahotelcasino.com.

For items like these and more, visit Steve’s award winning website at:  www.everythinglv.com.  Have a question for Steve about Las Vegas?  You can email him at mrvegas98@aol.com.

Legends in Concert lives on at Flamingo Las Vegas

Revel introduces enriched recognition & rewards program for 2013

By H. Scot Krause

Atlantic City’s newest resort, Revel, has launched a new and exciting rewards program that takes perks for players to the next level. Guests can earn resort dollars property-wide and enjoy free Wi-Fi and complimentary offers just for playing, staying or partying at Revel.

The new club features 3 tier levels: Ocean, Beach and Pearl, each with increasing benefits as you move up the ladder. The Revel Card is unique to Atlantic City because members earn resort dollars in nearly every area of the resort including the hotel, restaurants, nightlife spots, and of course, the gaming floor. Additionally, Revel Card members never have to worry about conversion. Every resort dollar is worth the same dollar for dollar at every venue including retail and entertainment.

Upon sign up, players open the door to benefits by becoming an Ocean Card level member. (If you were previously a member of the club, your former available “resort dollar” balance is unaffected.) This first level offers guests immediate complimentary Wi-Fi access, special offers, discounts and events—and based on your play, some special surprises might be in the making.

Accrue 50,000 tier points between Jan. 1 – Dec. 31 this year, and you will become a Beach Card level member. When upgraded to Beach status, members receive all Ocean benefits as well as these additional benefits:

—Complimentary self and valet parking

—2X base resort dollar multiplier every day

—Access to two Daily Dining Passports ($10 each/$30 value)

—Entrance to the Annual Beach Tournament

At Pearl Card level, things really become exciting. By earning 350,000 tier points between Jan. 1 and Dec. 31, you’ll reach this elite status and unlock superior benefits and priority VIP treatment—including all of the Ocean and Beach level benefits, plus:

—Two complimentary Daily Dining Passports per day

—Suite upgrades (based on availability)

—Complimentary Bask Spa day pass

—Entrance to the Annual Pearl Tournament

—A 1-hour slot machine hold

—Dedicated Pearl hotline

—Preferred Ovation Hall seating

—Late check-out

In addition to dozens of gaming offers and events, Revel Card users receive exclusive opportunities that bring the resort experience to life, such as access to the SkyGarden for parties and events, private cocktail parties at O2, and VIP access to cabanas on The Mezz level.

Resort guests currently enrolled in the Revel Card program will be automatically entered into the new program. To sign up, or to inquire about your current Revel Card status, visit the Revel Card Desk from 9:00 a.m. – 10:00 p.m. Sunday through Thursday and 9:00 a.m. – 2:00 a.m. Friday and Saturday.

Revel is smoke-free and features more than 1,800 rooms with sweeping ocean views. A member of the American Express Gold Hotel Collection, the resort houses a 130,000-square-foot casino with more than 2,000 slot machines, nearly 100 table games, electronic tables and a poker room. The resort features a 32,000-square-foot spa and an outstanding collection of 14 restaurant concepts from award-wining chefs and restaurateurs. Live entertainment includes marquee acts and international artists plus nightclub entertainment.

Revel was recently named one of Gogobot Travelers’ “Top 50 Hotels in the World” in 2012, as well as being chosen as one of the Best Hotels in the Northeast by Arrive magazine. It was also named one of the Top 10 Best New Hotels in the U.S. by Gayot.com. For additional information about the new slot club and all of Revel’s amenities, visit www.revelresorts.com.

Winter Promotions

Pala Casino Spa & Resort will give away a brand-new car every Friday in 2013 as part of its $2 Million Cash and Cars Giveaway promotion.  Winning a car can be as easy as signing up for a player’s club card (free to join). In February, one lucky guest will win a 2013 Toyota Avalon. Swipe your Privileges cards at the Toyota Avalon kiosks located adjacent to the car display in the casino.

Regular Privileges card holders will receive one free entry daily; Gold card members receive two; Platinum, three, and Elite, five.  Entries can be earned daily until 4 p.m., Friday, Feb. 22. Players who use their Privileges card at any slot machine or table game will receive 10 bonus entries into the Grand Prize Drawing for every tier point earned during the giveaway. Visit the club booth for drawing days, times and complete details. Winners must be present to claim prizes.

In February at Beau Rivage, make plans to watch the Super Bowl February 3 at Coast and EIGHT75.  The kickoff is at 6:30 p.m. and there will be prize giveaways throughout the game. At Coast try $8.50 Bacardi buckets for $8.50 or $12.50 for buckets of domestic beer. Scarf down 25 cent wings or go for the $15 tailgate appetizer sampler. At EIGHT75 will also offer $12.50 buckets of domestic beer and 25 cent wings. On Feb. 9, don your apparel for the “Coast Carnival Masquerade Mask & Costume Party.”  The guest with the best mask wins $500. Live entertainment will be provided by Triggerproof and DJ Avelon.

Señor Frog’s Las Vegas at Treasure Island Hotel & Casino will host the “Kiss a Frog” singles fiesta on Thursday, Feb. 14.  True to the old saying, “You have to kiss a few frogs before you find your prince,” single señoritas will be encouraged to fiesta their way through the usually romantic day with themed drinks and numerous giveaways. Starting at 8 p.m. on Valentine’s night, patrons will set the tone for the night with a ladies first one-hour open bar with well vodka cocktails. The party bar will also offer sexy signature fishbowl drinks including the Frog’s Kiss, Frogasm, Hot Pants and Horny Cupid, all priced at $18. Ladies will be entered to win bar tabs, Señor Frog’s merchandise, dinner for two at the restaurant, Mystère tickets and the grand prize will be a Tiffany’s necklace. The party bar is a participating location of the 2013 Las Vegas Singles Festival where sexy singles will be wearing colored wristbands, making it easy and fun to meet other singles who are ready to mingle this Valentine’s Day. More information about wristbands and the festival can be found by visiting http://lasvegassinglesfestival.com/.

H. Scot Krause is a gaming industry analyst, researcher and journalist. He is a former entertainment director and an 18-year resident of Las Vegas.  His work is regularly featured in Casino Player, Strictly Slots and Gaming Today as well as other gaming publications, including the annual American Casino Guide Book. Questions or comments for Scot may be addressed to: krauseinvegas@cox.net

Are you up for the challenge?

By Henry Tamburin

The truth is, most typical blackjack players are suckers. Their knowledge of the odds is poor, their logic is worse, and they want to blame their losing on everybody else.

I have composed and read many “blackjack quizzes” during my career but the one that I found to be the most challenging was prepared by my friend Fred Renzey, a contributing writer to my Blackjack Insider (BJI) e-newsletter and author of Blackjack Bluebook II. Renzey’s quiz is below, including his blunt comments about blackjack players. Try the quiz—but be forewarned, it’s not easy.

From BJI issue #105 with comments by Fred Renzey

(Note: Assume a six-deck game with s17 and das.)

The truth is, most typical blackjack players are suckers. Their knowledge of the odds is poor, their logic is worse, and they want to blame their losing on everybody else.

Even though a simple basic strategy chart will dictate all the correct plays, it still doesn’t explain them. As a result, even players who have mulled over a basic strategy chart don’t always play by it. They just don’t trust all those little multi-colored squares.

That’s what this basic blackjack IQ quiz is all about. It has nothing to do with card counting; it merely asks what you think you’ll accomplish if you play this way, or that way. You then choose an answer from a list of multiple choices.

Hopefully, the quiz will get the average ham’n-egger to see why he must play a certain way. So here ya go. A perfect score is 28 points. The answers are at the end of the quiz.

1. When the dealer has a 4 up, she will bust: (1 point)

A)  4 times out of 10 – you’re an underdog to win unless you have 18 or better, but you still lose less money by standing with a stiff than by hitting it.
B)  5 times out of 10 – you’re a 50-50 shot to win with a stiff if you stand.
C)  6 times out of 10 – you’re a moderate favorite to win by standing with any stiff.
D)  7 times out of 10 – she has very few ways to complete a hand with such a confining card as half her hand. Any time your stiff loses against a 4-up, you took a bad beat. That’s just the nature of gambling.

2. When you have blackjack against an Ace up, if you don’t take Even Money, you’ll collect the 3-to-2 payoff: (2 points)

A) 7 times for every 6 times you push – a bird in the hand is worth two in the bush. Take Even Money and never look back.
B) 8 times for every 5 times you push, making it a tough call. If you need the win, take Even Money.
C) 9 times for every 4 times you push – you make more long-term profit by gambling it out than by taking Even Money. If you need the win, you have overbet.

3. By doubling down for just one-fourth of your bet, you’re often: (2 points)

A) Reducing your average profit to less than it would be by just hitting the hand. That’s because you’ve shrunk your edge on the hand by limiting yourself to one hit, without maximizing the size of your bet.
B) Maximizing your average profit by increasing your initial bet size only moderately. In this way, you don’t become overly aggressive with any one hand.

4. You have a frustrating 3-5-5-3 against the dealer’s 7. If you hit again, you’ll avoid busting only 3 times out of 8 — but any card that doesn’t bust you will put you in fair-to-terrific shape. If you stand with your 16, you’ll win the hand: (2 points)

A) 2 times out of 8, which puts you in worse shape than hitting and probably busting.
B) 3 times out of 8 – you’re simply damned if you do and damned if you don’t.
C) 4 times out of 8, making it better to let the dealer bust.

5. Playing alone against the dealer, your first hand off the top of the shoe is 7-5-4 against a 10. You should: (3 points)

A) Stand on this very close decision because two of your key bailout cards (the 4 and 5) are dead. It’s a ”next level” refinement to the fundamental basic strategy.
B) Hit, because 7 times out of 12, the dealer will already have a pat hand – and even if she doesn’t, she can still make one.

6. When you have Ace-7 against a 9, if you stand, you’ll win the hand 8 times out of 20. If you hit, you’ll win it: (3 points)

A) 7 times out of 20 and worsen your chances.
B) 8 times out of 20 — about the same as if you stood.
C) 9 times out of 20 and improve your chances.

7. When you have Ace-4 against a 3, the dealer will bust just 3 times out of 8. If you double down instead and take one card, you’ll end up with a “stiff” or an Ace-4-Ace, which is just as bad as a stiff: (3 points)

A) 3 times out of 8, and will usually be in a strong position.
B) 4 times out of 8, making doubling a modestly better play.
C) 5 times out of 8, and will usually need a dealer bust – or you lose.

8. You’re playing two spots at a full table. Off the top of a fresh six-deck shoe, the dealer has an Ace up. Among all 14 players’ cards, there’s not a single 10 on the board. You have 8-4 on your first hand and Ace-9 on your second. You should: (4 points)

A) Decline Insurance on both hands because the odds that the dealer has a 10 in the hole do not justify the 2 to 1 payoff that you will receive.

B) Insure your 20 to protect your good hand, but pass on the 12 since insuring a bad hand is an inferior strategy.
C) Insure both hands, good or bad, because a 10 is now due.

9. There are only three cards left in the shoe before the cut card comes out. They are a 7 and two 10s – but you don’t know their order. The dealer has a 4 up, but has clumsily exposed her hole card, a 10, giving her 14. Third base has 16. If he stands, the dealer will have two out of three chances to bust. But how often will the dealer bust if third base takes a card? (4 points)

A) 1 time out of 3
B) 2 times out of 3
C) 1 time out of 2

10. You’re a “streak bettor” using a 10-20-30-40 progression. You like it because if you win four hands in a row, you’ll win $100 — whereas losing four in a row costs you only $40. When you win two and lose two (which is six times as frequent), your averaged result will be a: (4 points)

A) small loss – going 1 and 3 also loses more money than going 3 and 1 wins.
B) break even outcome, assuming there were no blackjacks, doubles or splits involved.
C) small gain – going 3 and 1 also wins more money than going 1 and 3 loses.

Answers:

1) A

2) C

3) A

4) A

5) A

6) C

7) C

8) A

9) B

10) A

———————————————————————————————————

Henry Tamburin is the editor of Blackjack Insider Newsletter (www.bjinsider.com), the lead instructor for the Golden Touch Blackjack Course (www.goldentouchblackjack.com), and host of smartgaming.com. For a free three-month subscription to his blackjack newsletter, go to www.bjinsider.com/freetrial. To receive his free Casino Gambling Catalog, call 1-888-353-3234 or visit www.smartgaming.com.

Our picks for the country’s greatest casinos from coast-to-coast

By J. Phillip Vogel

Casino Player is celebrating its 25^th year in print, and what better way to herald this landmark anniversary than a yearlong series of features detailing the 25 greatest casino properties nationwide. Throughout 2013 we’ll be highlighting an eclectic mix of the country’s best gaming resorts, 25 properties that have taken the term casino and morphed into something wholly unique and amazing. Think of this as a sort of casino bucket list—25 of gaming’s greatest resorts that you should see before you, well, cash in your chips.

We’ll begin with four of the hottest new properties to emerge on the gaming scene: Revel Resort & Casino, Resorts World NYC, Winstar World Casino, and The Cosmopolitan of Las Vegas.
 

Revel Resort & Casino

Atlantic City, NJ

Resorts World Casino

Queens, NY

Winstar World Casino

Thackerville, Oklahoma

The Cosmopolitan of Las Vegas

Las Vegas, NV

In the next issue of Casino Player, we’ll explore more of America’s most amazing casino-resorts. If these first four are any indication about what we’ll see this year—and over the next 25 years—casino resorts promise to only get bigger and better.

————————————————————————————————————————–

The 25 Best Casino Resorts

Our picks for the country’s greatest casinos from coast-to-coast

By J. Phillip Vogel

In celebration of our 25^th year in print, Casino Player has taken on the daunting challenge of featuring the nation’s 25 greatest gaming resorts.  Last month, we saw four stunning examples of casino grandeur and near perfection.  Picking up where we left off, this month we’re featuring three no less impressive properties: Seneca Niagara Casino & Hotel, Red Rock Casino, Resort, and Spa, and Biloxi’s own Beau Rivage Resort & Casino.

Seneca Niagara Casino & Hotel

Niagara Falls, NY

Red Rock Casino, Resort, and Spa

Summerlin, NV

Beau Rivage Resort & Casino

Biloxi, MS

There’s no question that each one of these properties affords casino patrons something unique and exciting, and sometimes even inspiring.  From trendy desert getaways to Gulf Coast charm to majestic Northeastern wonders, I think I speak for casino goers everywhere when I say they’ll be tough to beat.

————————————————————————————————————————–

The 25 Best Casino Resorts

Our picks for the country’s greatest casinos from coast-to-coast

By J. Phillip Vogel

April may house the holiday for fools, but this month’s Top 25 selections are anything but a joke.  In previous issues we’ve visited desert playgrounds and grand southern treasures, but this month we’re sticking a bit closer to home, uncovering the properties dominating the Las Vegas scene.  If you’re going to Sin City anytime soon do yourself a favor and visit at least one of these megaresorts: MGM Grand Hotel & Casino and Planet Hollywood Resort and Casino.

MGM Grand Hotel & Casino

Las Vegas, NV

Planet Hollywood Resort and Casino

Las Vegas, NV

————————————————————————————————————————–

The Top 25 Casino Resorts:

Foxwoods Resort & Casino and Atlantis Casino Resort Spa

By J. Phillip Vogel

Some of the greatest gaming properties aren’t in the casino capitals like Las Vegas and Atlantic City—they slightly off the beaten path. In this installment of our Top 25, we travel from one side of the country to the other, first exploring the northeast’s premiere mega-resort then shifting gears to one of the hottest stops in the heart of “The Biggest Little City in the World.”  Indeed, this month’s Top 25ers are some personal favorites not simply for their great gaming but for their exceptional offerings to guests of all tastes.

Ready?  Let’s take a tour of Connecticut’s favorite Foxwoods Resort Casino and Reno, Nevada’s own Atlantis Resort Casino & Spa.

Foxwoods Resort Casino

Mashantucket, CT

Atlantis Casino Resort Spa

Reno, NV

————————————————————————————————————————–

Triple Double Bonus gives video poker players a very wild ride

By John Grochowski

I once had a lengthy conversation with a team of casino executives who wanted to get my thoughts on video poker players. They knew that I hear often from video-poker-playing readers, and they knew from their own experiences that it was difficult to woo video poker loyalists to new games.

Comparisons were made among slot, video poker and table games players, and one exec finally boiled the question at hand down to basics. “Just what do video poker players want?” he asked.

Video poker players, I suggested, want to feel they’re getting a fair shot at the casino’s money. They’re less jackpot-oriented than slot players; a $1,000 jackpot for a royal flush on a quarter machine, which occurs only about once per 40,000 hands, is fine with them, as long as they feel they’re staying in action long enough to have a chance.

Video poker also was about interactivity and time on device, I told them. Player decisions that matter make the game interactive, and the lower jackpot levels mean the games can offer frequent small wins that extend time on device. When a game makes players feel they’ve got a reasonable shot at winning, encourages interactivity, and gives them a fair amount of time on device, it should build a loyal following.

Immediately after the meeting, I walked onto the casino floor, and the first three video poker players I came across were playing Triple Double Bonus Poker. So much for my grand theory of video poker players, I thought. Triple Double Bonus is less about time on device than nearly any other video poker game

It’s an odd little game. Some video poker games are a nice, quiet ride, designed to extend time on device to the max—Jacks or Better or Bonus Poker, for instance, with their 2-for-1 payoffs on two pair helping to keep us in action.

Other games are roller-coaster rides, dropping the two-pair payoff to 1-for-1, but offering more chances at big wins such as the 2,000-coin jackpot for a five-coin bet on Double Double Bonus Poker (four Aces with a 2, 3 or 4 as a kicker) or Super Aces (four Aces, no kicker needed).

Then there’s Triple Double Bonus Poker. It’s not a roller-coaster ride. It’s a bungee jump. A leap into the Grand Canyon. Not only is the two-pair payoff reduced to 1-for-1, the three-of-a-kind return is 2-for-1 instead of the standard 3-for-1 on most games.

With short payoffs on frequent winners, Triple Double Bonus is a quick trip. Either you hit the big hands, or you’re out of action fast.

So why do players take the plunge? Because the big hits can be really big. Bet five coins, and four Aces with a 2, 3 or 4 kicker pays 4,000 coins—that’s $1,000 on a quarter machine, as much as you’ll get for a royal flush. And with four 2s, 3s or 4s, a 2, 3 or 4 as a kicker will bring us a 2,000-coin bonanza.

The full pay table on the full-pay version of the game looks like this: Royal flush 250-for-1 (jumps to 4,000 with a five-coin wager); straight flush 50-for-1; four Aces with a 2, 3 or 4, 800-for-1; four 2s, 3s or 4s with an Ace, 2, 3 or 4, 400-for-1; four Aces with 5 through King, 160-for-1; four 2s, 3s or 4s with 5 through King, 80-for-1; four 5s through Kings, 50-for-1; full house 9-for-1, flush 7-for-1, straight, 4-for-1; three of a kind, 2-for-1; two pair,1-for-1; pair of Jacks or better, 1-for-1.

With expert strategy, that version pays 99.6 percent, making it one of the highest-payers around while also being one of the most volatile. With the flush reduced to a 6-for-1 payoff, the overall return drops to 98.1 percent.

The big attraction, of course, is the quads with kicker. With expert strategy, royal flushes come up about once per 45,358 hands. Aces with the low kicker come up better than three times as often, at once per 14,214 hands. Waits between those 4,000-coin bonanzas are a lot shorter than on other video poker games. The 2,000 coin hit per five coins wagered for four 2s through 4s with a kicker occurs about once per 5,795 hands, in the vicinity of once per 10 hours of play at a moderate but steady pace.

Let’s try out a little strategy for Triple Double Bonus Poker. Let’s say you’ve got this hand:

Ace of clubs, Ace of hearts, Ace of diamonds, 4 of spades, Jack of hearts.

You might think we’d model our Triple Double Bonus strategy after Double Double Bonus. After all, in Double Double Bonus is the earliest and most popular game to use fifth-card kickers to increase bonuses on certain four-of-a-kind hands. But we play this hand the opposite of the way we’d do it in Double Double Bonus. In Double Double Bonus, we would hold just the three Aces to maximize our chances of drawing the fourth Ace. But in Triple Double Bonus, the jackpot on four Aces with a low card as a kicker is so large that we have to go for it, so we hold the 4 with the Aces.

2 of clubs, 2 of hearts, 2 of diamonds, 4 of spades, Jack of hearts

See what we’ve done here? Just substituted deuces for Aces, with the same extra cards. Is the 2,000-coin jackpot for four 2s with a kicker enough for us to keep the 4, or do we discard both the 4 and the Jack to give ourselves an extra chance at drawing the fourth deuce? The answer isn’t what a Double Double Bonus player would expect. Even with a jackpot no higher than the Aces-plus-kicker payoff on Double Double Bonus, in Triple Double Bonus we hold the kicker along with the three 2s. Just discard the Jack.

Ace of clubs, Ace of hearts, 2 of diamonds, 2 of spades, 7 of clubs

How far do we push our desire to pursue the kicker hands? To the point that we hold a kicker with three Aces or three low cards, and no farther. With two Aces or fewer, we do not hold a low-card kicker. Average return per five coins wagered in the 9-7, full-pay game is 10.17 coins on the pair of Aces, but drops to 9.29 coins if we also hold one of the 2s.

Ace of spades, Ace of clubs, Ace of hearts, 2 of diamonds, 2 of spades

Just as in Double Bonus and Double Double Bonus, we break up a full house that includes three Aces. In Triple Bonus we also keep a deuce. The average return on Ace-Ace-Ace-2 is about 96 coins per five wagered, compared with 78 if we hold just the Aces. Keep the full house and we get 45 coins. Triple Double Bonus pays 9-for-1 on full houses.

Ace of clubs, Queen of hearts, Jack of diamonds, 8 of spades, 3 of spades: In many video poker games we’d hold Queen-Jack and dump the Ace, because the Ace is a limiting factor on straight draws. But in Triple Double Bonus, you have to give yourself a chance, no matter how much a long shot, at drawing the big jackpot hand.

Ace of clubs, Queen of hearts, Jack of diamonds, 8 of clubs, 3 of clubs: Our desire to go for the big hit is mitigated by the 7-for-1 payoff on flushes in the full-pay game. If you’re able to find the full-pay game, you’ll want to hold all three clubs in this situation. But on the 9-6 version, this is a hold the Ace, toss the rest hand.

Whichever version you play, enjoy the wild ride if you’re a thrill-seeker, and look for a different game if you’re timid of heart and bankroll. May the Aces be with you.

Be wary of changes in your casino’s video poker policies

by Henry Tamburin

Lately, it seems that some casinos are changing their policy toward video poker players, and this often is not good news for us. I’ll give you a few examples so you will be aware of these revised casino policies.

A Mississippi casino recently posted a banner on their web site which announced: “9/6 VIDEO POKER MACHINES…36 NOW AVAILABLE.” I got excited and paid the casino a visit to see for myself. Sure enough, I found 36 slant-top video poker machines that had 9/6 Jacks or Better games on them. However, as I glanced over the entire pay table, I noticed something that made me sick to my stomach: they had shorted the max-coin royal flush payout from 4,000 coins to only 2,500 coins at all denominations (25 cents, 50 cents, and dollar).

This reduction in the payoff for the royal flush decreases the Expected Value from 99.54% to 98.39%. Now, you might think a reduction in ER of 1.15% is not a big deal— but for serious players, trust me, it is. I had a short meeting with the casino’s slot manager to voice my displeasure over their shorted royal flush payout. Casino management revisited this issue and subsequently changed the payout to 4,000 coins on their quarter denomination 9/6 Jacks or Better machines (at 50 cents and dollar denomination, the payout is still 2500 coins). The point is this: you need to be diligent and check the entire video poker pay table to be sure none of the payouts have been shorted.

Many casinos have also changed how they determine a player’s monthly mailer (specifically, the amount of bounce back cash, free play, and other comps in the mailers). The amount of perks that players got in their monthly mailers used to be based on either their coin in over a period of time, or their daily average coin in. Nowadays, casinos are basing a player’s mailer on theoretical (or “theo”), meaning how much average profit the casino expects to earn from a player based on the specific machine they play. So video poker players that play, say, 9/6 Jacks or Better, will get much less bounce back free play and  comps in their mailers compared to a player who plays a video poker game with a worse pay schedule.

Here’s another policy change that blows my mind: some casinos now factor a player’s win/loss history into their equation that determines how much a player will get in their mailers. Get lucky and hit a royal flush (or a jackpot on a slot machine), and the amount of bounce back and comps in your mailers will dramatically decrease.

Here’s a real-world example that happened to my wife and I in a casino that adopted this policy. We had been playing video poker for several years in a local’s casino in Las Vegas that based their mailers on the amount of coin in over a month. Then, suddenly— and without any notice to players—the casino changed their policy to include the amount a player won. Coincidentally, my wife and I hit each hit a royal flush the following month in this casino, and the amount of weekly bounce back free play and comps in our mailers dropped to almost nothing (even though our monthly coin in stayed the same).

A few months later, my wife hit another royal flush, and her mailers were discontinued. (Slot players in this casino have also seen the quality of their mailers decrease after getting lucky and hitting a jackpot.) Needless to say, my wife and I do not play video poker at this casino any more, and I know of many more players who walked away as well.

Some casinos decrease the rewards a player receives for playing a full pay video poker machine. Instead of having to wager 1,000 coins to get a point on their slot card, signage on the machine will state that you need to wager 4,000 coins for a point (thus it takes more coin in to get a point). Several casinos have even gone so far as to post signage on their full pay video poker machines that state when you play this machine,  you will get zero points and you won’t be eligible for any promotions. (No, I’m not kidding…absolutely no incentives for the player!)

Many casinos actively promote bonus point promotions to video poker and slot players. Unfortunately, when some video poker players took the casino up on their offer while playing full play video poker games, their mailers were discontinued.

So what should a smart video poker do if their favorite casino changes their policies for the worse? My friend Jean Scott recently addressed this issue on her blog on lasvegasadvisor.com, and had this to say (which I wholeheartedly endorse):

“Wise recreational players, with experience, will know approximately how much, on average, this entertainment (playing video poker) will cost them and adjust their time in this business to fit into their entertainment budget. If their favorite casino has cut the pay tables on the games they want to play or aren’t sending  them as much bounce-back free play, or have reduced the comps, they will look for another casino. Or, if there isn’t another casino conveniently located, they may just cut the number of times they choose this leisure-time activity.

A video poker player who wants to cut his “cost” for this entertainment will need to do more studying–fine-tuning his strategy skills with practice on tutorial software and perhaps learning new games. He will do more research and scouting. And he will vigorously ramp up his use of promotions to make up for a loss of EV when casinos downgrade pay tables. He may look for ways to increase his gambling bankroll so he can play at denominations higher than his usual ones when he finds good plays there.”

Tamburin’s Tip of the Month

The game is Jacks or Better. Which cards would you hold in these two hands?

You should hold the three unsuited cards in the first hand and the unsuited King and Jack in the second hand. The reason you discard the unsuited Ace in hand #2 (and not one of  the unsuited picture cards in hand #1) is because there are two ways to make a straight when you hold unsuited J-Q-K (i.e., 9-10-J-Q-K or 10-J-Q-K-Ace) whereas only way if you hold unsuited K-J-Ace (i.e., 10-J-Q-K-A).

Remember this rule: when you are dealt a hand containing three unsuited high cards including an Ace, discard the Ace and only hold the other two unsuited high cards.

—————————————————————————————————————————-

Henry Tamburin is a blackjack and video poker expert. He is the host of the smartgaming.com website and the editor of the Blackjack Insider newsletter (for a free three-month subscription, visit www.bjinsider.com/free). For a free copy of his Casino Gambling Catalog, which contains books, strategy cards, and software for video poker players, call toll free 1-888-353-3234, or visit the web store at smartgaming.com.

Tips for playing  smarter, and winning more often, in 2013

By Bill Burton

This year, you could make a New Year’s resolution to “have more fun in the casino.” That sounds simple enough, but if you’re like me, the real fun in the casino comes from winning.

I remember hearing one of my older family members say years ago, “The days are long but the years are short.”

Now that I am quite a bit older, I have learned the relevancy of that statement. Each year seems to go by faster and faster. It seemed like it was only a few months ago when we celebrated the beginning of 2012 and wondered about the Mayan prophecy that predicted that the world would come to an end on December 21, 2012. Since we are still here, we can file that one away with the Y2K prediction in 2000, when some people worried that all the computers in the world would crash.

Now we’re headed into the year 2013 and that may cause some concern for those people who think the number 13 is unlucky. Triskaidekaphobia is the name of the phobia for people who fear the number 13, and they will have 365 days to worry about it until 2014 rolls around. For the rest of us who are not superstitious about the number 13, a new year brings hope and promises of new beginnings, new opportunities and hopefully a better year than the one before.

Every year, many of us start by making resolutions to improve ourselves or change some negative behavior. You know the ones I’m talking about. We all have made and broken them year after year. They sound good on New Year’s Day, but most resolutions are broken within a week or two.

Some psychologists theorize that the reason this happens is because we don’t have the passion required to give it our full effort in order to make it work. The resolutions and goals that do get accomplished are the ones that we enjoy doing and find pleasure in accomplishing.

This year, you could make a New Year’s resolution to “have more fun in the casino.” That sounds simple enough, but if you’re like me, the real fun in the casino comes from winning. In order to become a consistent winner, you have to start playing smarter. So let’s change the resolution from” have more fun in the casino to “I resolve to play smarter in the casino!”

Several years ago, I made a list of some resolutions to help me get the most enjoyment from my casino visits. Over the years, I have changed some and modified others. Here are some resolutions you might consider for the New Year.

I resolve to set aside a few extra dollars each week to spend on my casino visits. Even if you don’t know the next time you’ll be visiting the casino, now is a great time to start setting aside a few dollars each week into a casino fund. This way, you will have the money on hand if you receive a great promotional offer, or if you just want to get away for a trip to the casino.

I resolve to always use my player’s club card. Not using your player’s card is the equivalent of turning away free money. The casinos give you comps for your play, and the only way they know how much to give you is by tracking your play. If you don’t use your card, the casino can’t track your play. Using your card does not affect how the machine will pay out, as some players falsely believe. It does, however, affect the amount of comps that you earn.

I resolve to keep a gaming log. Smart players keep a log book. The law allows you to deduct gambling loses up to the amount of your winnings. You can only do this if you have documentation of your losses. Keeping a diary or logbook is the way to do this. It’s the beginning of a new year,  so NOW is the time to start your log. There is even an iPhone app named “Gamblers Anonymous” that will let you keep your log on your iPhone.

I resolve to take advantage of casino promotions. Casinos are constantly running promotions to attract players. These may include special drawings, tournaments or double point days. Taking advantage of these promotions is a smart way to get a little something extra. Many promotions are listed here in the pages of Strictly Slots.

I resolve to learn a new game.  Table games have a lower house edge than slot machines when you learn to play based with the correct strategy. If you’re a slot player, why not give a table game a try? And if you already play table games, why not learn a new game for a change of pace? If you prefer to stick with slots exclusively, then try a new slot machine for a change of pace.

I resolve to learn the correct video poker strategy. Video poker is one of the best games you can play. The house edge is low if you learn to play the correct strategy for each particular game. Many players sit down and rely on hunches for playing their hands, which increases the house edge. Instead, I suggest you learn the game at home using tutorial software.

I resolve to have a game plan. Many players simply go to the casino with a pocket full of money and jump from game to game until all their money is gone. You can have a much better time if you just spend a few minutes to make a plan for your next casino visit. Know ahead of time how long you will play, how much money you want to risk, and what other activities you will do there.

Those are a few of my suggestions for playing smarter, and winning more, in the casino. If you have no desire to try your hand at table games, you can still keep a gambling log or have a game plan when you enter the casino. Pick one or two of these tips that sound appealing to you, and give them a try over the coming year.

I wish you all a very happy and prosperous New Year. And until next time, remember: “Luck comes and goes…knowledge stays forever!”

Bill Burton writes for the Casino Gambling Guide section of About.com. (www.casinogambling.about.com) He is also the author of 1,000 Best Casino Gambling Secrets and Get the Edge at Low Limit Texas Hold’em. In addition, he is an instructor for Golden Touch Craps.(www.goldentouchcraps.com)

Multimedia Games’ “Moneyball” puts the pinball theme into a world of its own

by Frank Legato

There are a lot of slot machines coming out these days which at least purport to let players use skill to some degree—not necessarily to gain an advantage on a game, but to increase their chances of doing well.

In the vast majority of games like these, the appeal is for a game to simulate the experience of a home or arcade video game: a joystick to shoot space ships, animated characters facing off on a video screen. For a whole lot of players, though—particularly those who count themselves part of the massive Baby Boomer generation—the thought of a “skill game” goes back much farther in time than the video arcades. It goes to pinball.

The problem with pinball for a casino, though, is not only that any Baby Boomer worth his salt will be able to beat it, but that pinball is a mechanical game with a lot of parts that can wear out or break. A few years ago, game designers at Multimedia Games got the idea to simulate the fun aspects of pinball within an animated video slot.

It would be called “Moneyball.”
The original concept for Moneyball was a community-style game in which players on a bank would each get one shot of a simulated pinball, with prizes resulting from the ball bouncing around on each screen going to the entire bank. However, as Multimedia Vice President and Executive Producer Clint Owen says, that was before Highrise.

Highrise is the Multimedia game style that features an upright cabinet equipped with the tallest top box in the business—a 37-inch vertical video monitor. The tall display makes for an imposing bonus board.

“Moneyball was a perfect fit for the Highrise cabinet,” says Owen. “We got more excited about the concept as a Highrise game than we were about it as a community game. That’s how it evolved—I had been looking at casual games and online versions of pachinko (the Japanese pegboard pinball game), and really wanted to figure out how to make our own game with a skill element that had little or no effect on the pay percentage.”

The solution was a game that would employ a real element of skill—the player can actually aim the virtual pinball—but not enough so as to gain an advantage on the game that was not available to those less skilled at pinball. Moneyball is a perfect “quasi-skill” game, done with a masterful touch. (A patent is pending.)

But the fact Multimedia had a clever pinball-style bonus in which the player controls the direction the ball is launched was only the beginning. Owen says his team at Multimedia wanted more than a one-trick pony. The idea was to create a game around the pinball feature that would contain enough variety so the player would never become bored.

“We wanted it to fit with any number of different base games,” Owen says, “with a bonus at least as frequent as the free-spin bonus in most games. Then, there are four unique layouts of pegs and bumpers on the top box.”

“The variety we’ve added into it is one of the big benefits of this product over anything else in the market,” says Brad Johnson, Multimedia’s vice president of product management and marketing. “There are four different game boards, and within those game boards, there are additional types of bonus features, where you can get a ball lock and go into another secondary screen, where you get to spin a wheel or spin multiple reels.

“The player is never going to get the same experience twice, just because there are so many little things within each game board and between game boards that are different enough so players are going to want to come back and see all the different aspects of the game.”

Games in Games

The first versions of Moneyball provide variety in their formats alone. There is one version with a new base game created specifically for the series, but other versions use Multimedia games that are already popular in their own right, like the great “Invasion From Outer Space.”

In that version, the hilarious “Alien Attack!” bonus remains with the base game. Each base game also has its own free-spin bonus.

However, unlike other games with various base games and a themed bonus event, the common top-box Moneyball bonus itself takes on many different forms, and different outcomes. When the bonus is triggered, the animated top-box pinball game takes on one of four different scenes—a tree with the pegs and bumpers as fruit, a desert scene with UFOs, a hotel, or a classic pinball layout.

In each game, the player manipulates a button to “aim” the pinball’s direction as it is fired to the top of the bonus board. “Every peg gives you a small award,” explains Owen, “and every bumper gives you a bigger award. Then, when the ball hits the bottom of the board, it lands in a prize slot or bucket, and that gives you an even bigger award.”

One very cool feature: Any pinball player knows the danger of a ball falling through the board and not hitting anything—it used to be called going down the “drain,” with no points registered. That doesn’t happen here. You will at the very least get the bonus award for the bucket into which the ball falls. “Even if you don’t hit the multipliers or ball features or ball lock, you’re still guaranteed a prize on every shot,” Owen says.

Ah, but there’s more. As the virtual ball rolls down the big video screen, it can hit classic pinball features for completely new games. A “ball lock”—the video equivalent of the physical pinball hitting a spot and staying there—triggers one of two secondary events. In one, a prize wheel appears, which the player spins for an extra bonus prize. In another, a set of three bonus reels appears, and the player gets three spins for bonus awards. In either case, after the mini-game, the feature reverts to the regular pinball bonus.

Another possible extra feature on the Moneyball board is a “ball split.” In another nod to classic pinball, the ball will split into three balls, and all will bounce down the board simultaneously, registering a cavalcade of bonuses. Yet another possibility on the big board is a “Fireball” feature. This multiplies all awards—every peg hit, every bumper hit, any ball-lock prize—by three.

At press time, the Moneyball series had been launched in Louisiana and points in the Midwest. By the time you read this, it will be spreading throughout the U.S.

And that’s just the beginning. Owen says Moneyball is definitely going to be a long-term series. “Now that we’ve got the basics under our belt,” he says, “we can go back and add all kinds of additional interesting features to the Moneyball board—different progressives, different kinds of ball locks… any number of things. This series will definitely go on for a while.”

Adds Johnson, “The most exciting part is that we’ve created an experience with enough variety that the player is getting a unique experience every time he goes into the bonus. The value of that is that we can put it on lots of different games without players getting bored with what they see.

“We can come out with a lot of different base games with this bonus on top, and it’s not going to get old for the player. We designed it to have a lot of legs.”

That should keep pinball players occupied for a long time to come. •

Local casino offers Casino Player readers plenty of perks

by Steve Kieva

At the Skyline you won’t see water fountain shows, volcanoes, party pits, and most of that other fancy stuff you see on the Las Vegas Strip. However, it does have something the Strip casinos don’t have: it feels like home. 

You’re probably familiar with the story of The Little Engine That Could.  Well, the Skyline Casino in Henderson, Nevada, just 15 minutes from the Strip at 1741 North Boulder Highway, should probably be known as “The Little Casino That Could.”

At the Skyline you won’t see water fountain shows, volcanoes, party pits, and most of that other fancy stuff you see on the Las Vegas Strip.  However, it does have something the Strip casinos don’t have: it feels like home. (General manager Mike Young calls the Skyline the “Cheers” of local casinos.)

“We are one of the few places still doing ‘old Vegas.’  Our customers still get comps, and we know them by name,” Young said.  He also emphasized a big part of the Skyline’s success is the familiarity that patrons have with the property and its friendly employees, as well as, its generous promotions.

The Skyline Restaurant and Casino was built by John Kish in 1965.  In the past 47 years the property has changed hands several times.  In 1971 Kish sold the Skyline to his son, John Jr., and his partner, Jack Plevo.  In 2002, Kish Jr. sold the Skyline to Jim Marsh, an auto dealer.  Marsh is a prominent businessman that owns several other smaller casinos in Nevada.  He can often be seen strolling through the casino, greeting his patrons.  You can’t miss him.  He’s the guy with the white shirt and saddle shoes.  Be sure to say “hello” if you see him.

The Skyline has 9,000 square feet of gaming space and has always been known as the place to stop on the way to or from the Boulder Dam.  Antique slot machines from the early 1900′s adorn the casino.  Marsh is an antique collector who loves to display his works.  The Skyline offers over 400 gaming machines in an assortment from the old to the very new.  It’s the only casino in Henderson to offer some of the old “coin-drop” machines.  You remember them, don’t you?

Even though the Skyline doesn’t offer some of the luxuries that larger casinos provide, Young says that customers are impressed by its generous payouts.  “We are a small and intimate casino that truly has the loosest slots on the Boulder Strip.”

A full-service sports book is available seven days a week.  There are television monitors throughout the casino to watch all the games, too!  In addition to sporting events, there are nine $25 drawings daily for “cash or gas” – the choice is yours.  Tickets are given out to customers while they are playing slots.  A “drop bin” is located near the main cashier’s cage.  There’s also a wheel promotion that features gift certificates to P.F. Chang’s, Olive Garden, and other Las Vegas restaurants.  Even if you don’t win a daily drawing, those losing tickets are placed into a large drum and on the first Saturday of each month, are included in the Skyline’s MEGA drawing for $12,000.  The MEGA drawing is very popular, so get there early.

Skyline is not just known for its promotions and loose slots, it’s also known for its inexpensive, quality food which includes homemade, mouth-watering yeast rolls made from scratch twice daily.  Executive Chef Sam Kiki and his staff serve up the menu which features his award winning Prime Rib ($10.95), a Skyline staple for over 35 years.  Ownership may have changed, but you can be sure the food you enjoy today is the same good quality it’s always been, thanks to Chef Kiki.

The casino’s restaurant, the Skyline Room, has a beautiful banquet room perfect for a private birthday, anniversary, rehearsal dinner, or business meeting.  To plan an event, call the Banquet Manager, Marty Pecora.  He’ll make you feel welcome and create the perfect menu for your event.

Kish gave the Skyline its name in the 1960′s and its origins are tied to his investments in Skyline Homes.  That company provided affordable housing units popularly known as mobile homes or house trailers.  These units evolved into today’s manufactured and modular housing.  During its 50 years of operation, Skyline Homes has built more than 870,000 homes and 460,000 RV’s.  Located in Elkhart, Indiana, the company was founded in 1951.  At the time of this writing, Skyline Homes has a strong cash position, no corporate debt, and is publicly owned and traded on the NYSE (ticker symbol SKY).

Here are some coupons for your Skyline visit.  There’s no expiration date!

Casino Player Special

Just mention this column (Strip Search) any Tuesday-Saturday at the Skyline, and for any menu item you order, you’ll get one of the same free.  This is a practically unbeatable deal!  No choice on the menu costs more than $12.95, and almost all of the items are under $9.95.  How can you beat two T-Bone Steak Dinners for $12.95?  Also, remember Wednesday’s feature is Marty’s Famous Meatloaf.  Get there early as this special tends to sell out quickly.  Drinks are not included in this special.

With the new year comes an amazing group of new games from all the slot-makers.

by Frank Legato

Now that you’ve made all of your New Year resolutions, it’s time to get down to some slot play.

For slot machine enthusiasts, every new year brings with it a new crop of games on the slot floor. Back in October, all of the slot manufacturers displayed their wares for the coming year at the annual Global Gaming Expo trade show. This month, you will see those games roll steadily out to the nation’s casino floors.

For those of you who may have missed the October issue of our sister publication, Strictly Slots, here are the highlights of what’s in store on the slot floor in 2013—divided alphabetically by manufacturer.

AC Slots

AC Slots rolled out a new slot platform, called “Axcess,” last year. This year, the new games will begin appearing in casinos around the country.

In addition to all the normal slot styles, watch for a group of games based on internet play-for-fun games. Re-created in slot form are games like Took’s Timber, a popular internet game with cartoon woodland creatures surrounding five logs—which serve as the reels. The reels  spin sideways—as a log would—and give out pays on 25 paylines in addition to a variety of side games.

American Gaming Systems

AGS is one of the most creative slot-makers out there, thanks to its own new slot platform, called “Roadrunner.” If you’re a Strictly Slots subscriber, you may have read about Blackbeard’s Treasure, an intricate pirate-themed slot that’s packed with bonus events.

This year, expect a group of games with a feature unique to AGS—the knowledge-based bonus game. In Ripley’s Believe It Or Not!, AGS offers a fun theme based on the legendary comic strip that for decades treated newspaper readers to a collection of interesting facts and oddities. Central to the game is a trivia bonus—you get a multiple-choice question, and just like the “lifeline” on the game show Who Wants to Be A Millionaire, through primary game play, you can earn various forms help if you don’t know the answer to a question—a “Redo,” which puts up a new question; an “Eliminator,” which eliminates one of the wrong answers from the choice; and “Stats,” which works like “Ask the Audience” on TV question shows—the player is shown how most other players answered the question.

Next up for AGS knowledge-based games—“Are You Smarter Than A Fifth Grader?” and “Family Feud.” Can’t wait.

Aristocrat  Technologies

Aristocrat’s big game launches this year include several themes based on movies and even literature.

Superman The Movie, which debuted this summer exclusively at the Station casinos in Las Vegas, is packed with video clips from the first modern Superman film, 1978’s Superman: The Movie starring Christopher Reeve, Margot Kidder and Gene Hackman. This year, watch for a new Superman game, based not on any of the multitude of Man of Steel movies, but on the classic Superman comic book.

Also this year, Aristocrat enters the game-show business with Let’s Make A Deal, based on the modern version of the iconic game show starring host Wayne Brady.

Among the great home-grown game franchises from Aristocrat, Cash Express Gold Class brings back the four-level train-themed progressive that was one of Aristocrat’s most popular games around a decade ago. A multiple progressive with a top jackpot resetting at $10,000, the new link features seven popular Aristocrat base games, including standouts like “More Chilli,” “Buffalo” and “Pompeii.”

Finally, expect more games in the Legends series, each of which offers a choice between the original version of a classic Aristocrat slot machine and a new, improved version.

Aruze Gaming

Aruze continues to roll out the new version of its great fishing game, Amazon Fishing. Like its predecessor “Paradise Fishing,” it uses a technology called “Reel Feel”—you use a joystick to fish on a giant video screen, and you can actually feel the fish tugging at your line.

But the big news this year is the Innovator Deluxe series of interactive top-box bonus games.

The first two Innovator Deluxe games are Aladdin & the Magic Lamp and Alibaba. The Aladdin game employs a sculpted object located just above the reels—Aladdin’s Lamp, which the player rubs in the bonus round to call forth the genie, who then performs various acrobatics between the top screen and the reels.

Once the genie is released, the show switches to the video screen and the physical reels. The “rub” can release multiple genies to the top screen, and they fly down to the physical reels to transform them into wild reels.

Alibaba, its theme dedicated to the medieval Arab adventure tale “Alibaba and the Forty Thieves,” uses a physical device that combines with the LCD top-box monitor to achieve various special effects. The technique, called “RVL Technology” (it’s pronounced “reveal”), adds a physical “Random Visual Layer” to the interactive top box containing physical devices that slide in front of the LCD monitor in various game situations. Watch for the “Forty Thieves,” who peek out from holes in the “door” over the screens in a great bonus event.

Bally Technologies

Bally is rolling out several great themes, not the least of which is NASCAR, a stock-car racing experience featuring a who’s-who of racing. The progressive video slot uses the V22/32 cabinet (that’s the one with the 32-inch vertical screen) and Pro Series Sound Chair to recreate the sights and sounds of NASCAR and the Daytona International Speedway.

The Sound Chair roars and vibrates with the engines of the cars belonging to five of NASCAR’s brightest stars. All game events are “hosted” by Eli Gold, TV and radio’s “voice of NASCAR.”

The player can pick any of the five featured NASCAR drivers—Dale Earnhardt, Jr., Jimmie Johnson, Kevin Harvick, Jeff Gordon or Clint Bowyer—before play. The driver’s bio pops up, and all colors and icons on the game match that driver’s “brand.”

Bally delves into reality TV this year with Pawn Stars, a slot based on the History Channel show that features a Las Vegas pawn shop. The machine captures the essence of the show—bargaining over prices of various objects, in this case in the form of an interactive bonus game featuring one of the stars from the show— Richard “The Old Man” Harrison, his son, Rick Harrison, Rick’s son Corey and Corey’s friend, Austin “Chumlee” Russell.

Similar to the NASCAR slot, the player starts by choosing his favorite character from the show. That character is featured in the “Negotiation Bonus,” when the player selects one of five items to sell, then negotiates with the Pawn Star. All of the Pawn Stars cast members contributed video performances and audio for the slot.

The other branded theme mastered by Bally this year is one close to any Baby Boomer’s heart—The Beach Boys, with the legendary band and its music presented in a video slot. Five of the most beloved songs from the classic surf band—currently celebrating its 50^th anniversary—are featured in various bonus events.

Incredible Technologies

One of the newest companies on the slot scene this year is Incredible Technologies, the company that happens to be the largest manufacturer of coin-operated amusement games in the U.S. IT is responsible for games like “Golden Tee Golf,” its franchise product released to arcades in the 1980s.

This year, IT is parlaying its expertise in making fun and immersive amusement games into slot games like The Munsters Family Portrait, based on the hit 1960s series The Munsters and including a wealth of video clips and audio from the popular series about a family of monsters trying to fit into suburban America.

Bonuses include bonus features like “Grandpa’s Dungeon,” in which players select a favorite Munsters character to become wild during 10 free spins; an the clever “Slide N’ Win” feature, in which nine reels (three symbols each) appear across the screen, and a frame isolating five as paying reels slides across the screen, awarding repeated wins for payline combinations.

IT also is launching a proprietary brand with the video slot Johnny Steel: Operation Heist, a game themed as a secret-agent thriller featuring mini-games involving safe-cracking, and “Multi-X” symbols that multiply symbol values for larger payouts.

International Game Technology

IGT is launching some of the very best games in the slot-maker’s history this year. Heading the list is Dolly Parton, a masterful nod to the “Queen of Country Music,” combining photos and videos of Parton at every stage of her career.

There are 10 complete Dolly Parton songs loaded into the base game, and unlike other music slots, the player isn’t stuck listening to one or two songs during the reel-spinning. A “Player Jukebox” feature allows you to pick one of the 10 songs that will play during the reel-spinning, and change it whenever you like.

There are several random bonuses and four regular picking and free-spin bonus features calling on various stages of Parton’s career.

Right behind Dolly is a sequel to one of IGT’s most popular current video slots, Candy Bars. Called Take the Cake, the game employs bright, colorful animation—this time it’s cupcakes instead of candy bars—and stacked symbols in the primary game. There also is a three-level progressive (“Snack Size,” “King Size” and “Giant Size” prizes) that features a dynamic pay table. The progressive reset amounts adjust according to the wager: the top jackpot starts at $300 at the cost-to-cover single credit per line; at three credits per line, it switches to $900; at the maximum 10 credits per line, the top jackpot rises to $3,000.

And don’t miss Reel Edge, launched last year with “Centipede.” Tulley’s Treasure Hunt and Blood Life Legends each use a joystick to run a skill-based bonus round on a horizontal 32-inch screen that looks like a movie screen.

Tulley’s Treasure Hunt—which uses the MLD technology to create its 3D images—involves “Tulley the Turtle,” who is sent on an underwater journey through caves to pick up various treasures. In the bonus, the player uses the joystick to guide the turtle on its journey, moving the title character around as it swims to capture coins, treasure chests and other objects in a very Nintendo-like sequence. Repeated bonus rounds improve the player’s skill at negotiating the bonus­.

Blood Life Legends” applies the same concept to a sequel of the first “Blood Life” game. The player assumes the role of a bat as it flies through catacombs and tombs—again, grabbing objects along the way.

Fans of the TV show Sex and the City get a new game this year Sex and the City: Out On The Town. It is in IGT’s “Center Stage” movie-style format, with players picking a character from the show and following her or him (“Mr. Big,” aka Chris Noth, hosts the game) through a number of activities.

Another IGT game not to be missed on the Center Stage format: Star Wars Trilogy, the first game in the series based on all three films in the original film trilogy, Star Wars (A New Hope), The Empire Strikes Back and Return of the Jedi. In the bonus, each player pilots a ship through a planetary trench in an epic star battle.

The other big Center Stage entry this year is Judge Judy, which puts the players in front of the reality-show judge in her courtroom.

Multimedia Games

From Texas-based Multimedia Games, you should watch not only for new games but new slot tournaments.

Other featured games in Multimedia’s standard video series include Starry Night, an ode to the earliest days of motion pictures. In a nickelodeon-style picking bonus—players pick stars for multipliers—the animation includes images reminiscent of early science fiction films.

Other new video slots introduce new play features for Multimedia. The 50-line Desert Sky features “Straight Shot Multipliers,” in which the reels slow down in anticipation before awarding one of several multipliers for base-game wins, up to 10X. Wild Pixies is a trippy theme that introduces a feature called “Sticky Stacks.” During the free-spin round, pixie characters turn into wild symbols, and even to entire wild reels.

Multimedia is launching new games in what has been its hottest series lately—High Rise. One of the games leading the category will be Smokin’ Hot Jackpots, a high-denomination reel-spinner (a three-reel, five-line stepper designed for dollars) which features an 11-tiered progressive jackpot.

The High Rise series also has been a big hit in the low denominations—refreshes to the popular High Rollin’ game and MoneyBall, with its pinball/pachinko-style bonus over a “money tree” in the top box, stand to be big hits this year.

Multimedia’s other big story this year is TournEvent, the instant tournament system. This year, the slot-maker is running what is called the TournEvent of Champions, a national slot tournament covering nearly 100 casinos across the country using its unique TournEvent product, which makes the tournament into a cross between a game show and a sporting event.

Spielo International

Spielo is launching a new game in its popular “Deal Or No Deal” franchise, based on the internationally known game show—and now, more specifically, on the U.S. version of Deal Or No Deal, hosted by Howie Mandell.

Deal Or No Deal Join’N Play 2 is a player-friendly version of the game that features shorter times between bonuses, frequent mystery bonuses, and a more lucrative “Briefcase Bonus,” the risk-based core of the game show.

Also this year, Spielo is introducing three slots under a license with PopCap Games, owner of some of the most popular social games available on the internet. Spielo will launch slots based on three PopCap titles known around the world—Plants vs. Zombies, Zuma and Bejeweled.

WMS Gaming

WMS this year takes the slot machine into the world of rock music with KISS, featuring the music, images and performances of the legendary theatrical rock band. The famous Immersion Sound Chair sends the music throbbing through BOSE speakers in a game that will please any fan.

Also from WMS, don’t miss Cheers, based on the long-running TV sitcom set in a Boston bar. Actor John Ratzenberger reprised his role as know-it-all mailman Cliff Claven to do all the voice-overs to host a full contingent of bonuses based on clips, gags and situations from the show.

Next up among licensed themes is Spider-Man, which uses the Sensory Immersion 2.0 setup with the motion chair. Don’t miss this one. The chair works in concert with video from the film trilogy that began with 2002’s Spider-Man starring Tobey Maguire. The player is taken from rooftop to city streets and bridges on Spidey’s “web” as he battles the Green Goblin in virtual-reality bonus events. It is major cool.

Another popular brand is renewed in Wizard of Oz Haunted Forest, which debuts a new display format for WMS, called Gamefield xD. The format combines two large LCD video monitors into a huge “game field,” on which animation flows seamlessly between top and bottom screen to provide a remarkable treatment of movie clips depicting the Wicked Witch of the West’s forest from the classic 1939 Wizard of Oz film.

Other WMS highlights include Monopoly Legends, which is the first game in the more than 40-game Monopoly series to combine the theme of the classic board game with several legendary WMS brands.

The Monopoly theme is integrated into bonus rounds from each of the classic WMS brands “Reel ‘Em In,” “Zeus” and “Jackpot Party.”

Finally, Willy Wonka & the Chocolate Factory, based on the classic 1971 film starring Gene Wilder, turns a rich theme into rich bonuses. “Oompa Loompas,” Wonka’s diminutive assistants in the story, provide all manner of mystery bonus events by leaping onto reel spots. The base game employs another new play mechanic, in which one bonus event has the reels expand into the top box to a maximum of 12 symbols per reel for lucrative free-spin events.

The step-by-step process of becoming an expert blackjack player

By Henry Tamburin

There is no magic bullet when it comes to winning at blackjack. It’s not like playing slots, where one lucky spin, no matter how long the odds, can result in a life-changing payout. It’s a slow grind and a journey that begins at what I call Stage 1.

A reader sent me an email the other day that contained this question:

“You always say that winning at blackjack is a process and a journey. Can you explain what you mean?”

I’m happy to explain why I chose those particular words, especially since this is an important topic.

There is no magic bullet when it comes to winning at blackjack. It’s not like playing slots, where one lucky spin, no matter how long the odds, can result in a life-changing payout. Blackjack isn’t like that. It’s a slow grind and a journey that begins at what I call Stage 1.

Stage 1

There are two types of players in this stage. The majority are novices that are new to the game, and the rest are experienced players who always depend on luck when they play. Players in this stage know only the rules of the game and nothing about the basic playing strategy. They use intuition when it comes to playing their hands. In addition, some experienced players, who might know something about basic strategy but insist on playing bad blackjack games (e.g., blackjacks paid at only 6-5, or worse, even money), fall into this category. Stage 1 players face a house advantage between 1.5% to 2.0%. This means they can expect to lose roughly $15 to $20 every hour they play blackjack. (For simplicity, I assumed a $10 bettor playing 100 hands per hour. If you bet more, you’ll lose more; if you play fewer than 100 hands per hour, you’ll lose less.)

Stage 2

Many players in Stage 1 will advance to Stage 2 at some point in their playing career. Stage 2 players have discovered the basic playing strategy but haven’t quite mastered the entire strategy. Therefore, they still use intuition to play some of their hands, even though they know that basic strategy says otherwise. For example, Stage 2 players may not split 8s against a dealer 10 or Ace, not hit 12 against a dealer 2 or 3, or not hit a soft 18 against dealer 9, 10, or Ace. Most use a progressive betting system, thinking that it will help them win (it won’t). Players in Stage 2 are smart enough to avoid playing any 6-5 games; therefore, they face a house edge of about 1%. This means a $10 bettor can expect to lose about $10 every hour he plays blackjack.

Stage 3

Most players in Stage 2, who eventually get tired of losing money, will finally buckle down, master the entire basic playing strategy, and become Stage 3 players. Players at this stage will only play games with good rules, so combined with their mastery of basic strategy, they’ve reduced the house edge to a minuscule 0.3% to 0.5% (rule dependent). This is a great start towards becoming a winning player but even at this stage, a player still has a negative expectation (meaning, over the long haul, he will lose more than he wins). Many players in this stage use a progressive betting system, but that does nothing to reduce the house edge against them. Facing a 0.3% to 0.5% house edge, players in Stage 3 can expect to lose about $3 to $5 per hour playing blackjack.

Let me pause for a moment, on our journey, to make two comments. Some players in Stage 3 can decrease, and quite possible wipe out, their monetary loss from playing by being rated when they play and then asking for comps (which have value). Some players will also use the services of a casino host, which can boost the amount of their comps even more. If you want to remain a Stage 3 player for the rest of your life, then you should consider being rated when you play blackjack. At the minimum, you may be able to play a dead-even game against the casino; however, it’s doubtful that you will be able to turn a negative expectation into a positive expectation every time you play. Therefore, you should consider moving up to the next stage.

Even though players in Stage 3 have mastered basic strategy and can play every hand perfectly, they are still gamblers because they have a negative expectation. To turn their fortunes around, they need to become an advantage player, which requires learning card counting. In the past, recreational players were reluctant to do this because they viewed popular card counting systems (e.g., Hi-Lo and K-O) as too complex and difficult to use. They want to have “fun” when they gamble and are willing to pay the price. However, nowadays, recreational players have another option and that’s to advance to Stage 4.

Stage 4

Players in Stage 4 follow the basic playing strategy, but instead of using a progressive betting system, they use a simple card-counting system that tells them when to bet more (e.g., Speed Count, Ace-Ten Front Count, Rookie K-O Count, or the Ace-5 count). This gives them a slight edge over the house of about 0.1% to 0.5% (rule and bet spread dependent). This means a player who averages $10 per hand stands to win roughly $1 to $5 every hour. (This doesn’t seem like much but it can amount to as much as a $10 increase per hour over the Stage 3 player.)

Let me make two comments about Stage 4 players. By learning and using these simple systems, many players in this stage realize that card counting isn’t as difficult as they first thought, and after some experience using these systems, they will advance to Stage 5. On the downside, some players will take a step back to Stage 3 because, emotionally, they can’t handle losing streaks. (All card counters, no matter how big an edge they have, will eventually experience a losing streak. It’s the nature of the game. My advice to Stage 4 players is this: If losing money leads to anxiety and sleepless nights, then you need to drop down in your bet size or find a different hobby than playing blackjack.)

Stage 5

Players in Stage 5 have mastered a traditional card counting system, such as Hi- Lo or K-O. They increase their bets only when they have the edge, and they deviate from basic strategy based on the count. They fully understand the risk of ruin and the importance of Kelly betting (betting a fraction of their bankroll in proportion to their edge). Stage 5 players understand that their advantage manifests itself in the long run and they don’t get overly upset when those inevitable short-term losing streaks occur. They know about the risk of ruin and they maintain a maximum bet to bankroll ratio so the chance of losing all their money is no more than about 5%. Stage 5 players have an edge over the casino of about 0.5% to 1.5% (The precise edge depends on how aggressive the bet spread is, among other factors.) Betting an average of $10 per hand, these players stand to earn about $10 per hour playing blackjack. (As they begin to win money, many Stage 5 players will gradually increase their betting level in order to increase their hourly profits.)

There you have it … a road map you can follow on your journey to becoming a winning player. It’s a process that has many rewards for players who advance to Stage 4 or 5.

Tamburin Tip’s of the Month

How would you play this hand?

Many players split the picture cards, figuring the dealer has a good chance of busting and they’ll win double their initial bet. Even though you will make money when you split — and please pay attention to this — you’ll make more money if you stand with 20. For example, in a typical six-deck game with the standing on soft 17 rule, you’ll win 70 cents, on average, for every dollar bet if you stand with 20, and win only 57 cents if you split. And get this … players who split, draw another 10-value card, and then resplit once or twice, will make even less money (only 49 cents per dollar bet for one resplit and 45 cents for two resplits). Bottom line: Forget about splitting 10s against a dealer’s 6; instead always stand with 20.

———————————————————————————————————

Henry Tamburin is the editor of Blackjack Insider Newsletter (www.bjinsider.com), the lead instructor for the Golden Touch Blackjack Course (www.goldentouchblackjack.com), and host of smartgaming.com. For a free three-month subscription to his blackjack newsletter, go to www.bjinsider.com/freetrial. To receive his free Casino Gambling Catalog, call 1-888-353-3234 or visit www.smartgaming.com.

Casino Player runs down the last 25 years of gaming industry history

by Rob Wiser

Since this year marks the 25th anniversary of Casino Player, we’d like to take a stroll down Memory Lane and recap the highlights—as well as a few of the lowlights—of the gaming industry’s past 25 years.

1988, the year Casino Player published its first issue, doesn’t seem that long ago—yet in this hyper-competitive, innovation-driven business, a quarter century might as well be an eternity.  And the timing of this 25th anniversary story is almost perfect because 1988 was arguably the most important year the industry has ever seen. Seismic events were under way that would shape the industry into the juggernaut it is today.

1988

As a flamboyant casino operator named Steve Wynn constructs the Las Vegas Strip’s first “mega-resort”—a project that industry-watchers predict will be a colossal failure—a piece of    legislation is quietly introduced in Washington, that will have a similarly profound effect on the future of gaming.

The Indian Gaming Regulatory Act is enacted by Congress, creating a framework to govern Indian gaming. By entitling tribes to conduct gaming on their reservations, the U.S. government aims to promote their economic development and self-sufficiency. But the act’s vague wording opens financial floodgates beyond what anyone could have imagined.  Almost overnight, 150 tribe-owned casinos are greeting gamblers.

Rather than manage their own operations, some tribes choose to partner with non-            Indian casino companies thatare eager to invest capital in exchange for a chunk of the profits. While the politicians who approved the act probably envision low-stakes Indian bingo halls, tribes hammer out compacts with their home states to create full-scale resorts with thousands of slot machines and Vegas-style card games. Built on sovereign land and not subject to normal taxation, some of these casinos are enormously profitable and turn tribes into major industry players.

But the boom that Indian gaming triggered extends far beyond the reservations. Jealous state legislators around the country, trying to find ways to raise revenues without raising taxes, rush to legalize “limited” forms of casino gambling in their own states. Casinos soon sprout up in Colorado, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Louisiana, Mississippi, Missouri, and South Dakota.  As these casinos haul in revenue and become viewed as a generally harmless form of entertainment—defying the dire predictions of the anti-gambling crowd—other states hop on the bandwagon.

1989

On the night of November 22, The Mirage opens to massive fanfare. “The intent,” says Steve Wynn, “is to establish a feeling, an impression that The Mirage is something entirely new and different—a resort hotel which includes a casino, not a casino that includes a hotel. Something one certainly would not expect to find in Las Vegas.”

The 3,049-room, $630 million resort boasts white tigers, a rainforest, an erupting volcano and first-class amenities. Industry-watchers scoff that the project will need to bring in a million dollars a day in revenue to pay off its seven-year construction loan. The Mirage shatters industry records by winning more than $40 million from gamblers in its first month, and pays off the loan in just 18 months. Meanwhile, rival gaming companies race to build their own super-sized luxury resorts, in which gambling is just one of the amenities offered.

That same year, the innovative Rio “all suite” casino, breaks ground in Las Vegas. The colorful, high-energy resort is the first to bridge the gap between younger locals and tourists in a major way.  A decade later, Harrah’s Entertainment would close its purchase of the Rio for $888 million.

One of the media highlights of ’89 is motorcycle daredevil Robbie Knievel, son of Evel Knievel, successfully jumping the fountains at Caesars Palace. In 1967, Evel nearly died trying to perform the same death-defying stunt.

On a sadder note, larger-than-life casino boss Benny Binion dies on Christmas Day at age 85. One of the founding fathers of Las Vegas gambling, he opened the famed Binion’s Horseshoe casino in downtown Vegas in 1951 and summed up his business philosophy as “good food, good whiskey, good gamble.” Perhaps his greatest legacy is the World Series of Poker, which he founded at the Horseshoe in 1971.

1990

Donald Trump opens his lavish Trump Taj Mahal, which instantly dominates the Atlantic City market. A few months later in Las Vegas, Circus Circus Enterprises’ $290 million Excalibur Hotel Casino arrives as the largest resort in the world. The property’s 4,000 medieval-themed rooms are packed from the start.

One massive project             announced this year that still hasn’t come to fruition is a $5                  billion elevated rail line that aims to connect Southern California to Las Vegas. The original plan calls for high-speed trains to whisk tourists from Anaheim to Vegas at 280 miles an hour. For the price of a $110 ticket, you could be on the Vegas Strip in a mere 70 minutes.

In June 2008, the long-dormant project makes news when President Bush signs a transportation bill that allocates $45 million for the train—a tiny fraction of the total budget, but maybe enough to finally get things rolling.

1991

On April 1, gaming expands into the heartland when the President, the Diamond Lady and the Casino Belle riverboats open for business in Iowa.  Laws require the boats to leave shore and cruise, with gamblers restricted to a $200 budget per cruise. Later in the year, Illinois offers “no limit” betting on its first gambling riverboat, the Alton Belle, stealing the spotlight—and a ton of customers—away from Iowa.

Meanwhile, Kirk Kerkorian breaks ground on his billion-dollar MGM Grand Hotel and Theme Park in Las Vegas. The hotel’s three 30-story towers will bring Vegas’s room count to more than 75,000—ten times that of Atlantic City.

1992

On February 15, Indian gaming rockets to new heights with the arrival of Foxwoods in Connecticut just outside the rural town of Ledyard. Owned by the Mashantucket Pequot Tribe, the casino does not offer slot machines at first and is seen as an extension of the tribe’s popular high-stakes bingo facility. The Pequots are intent on making a big splash, however, as evidenced by Frank Sinatra christening the property’s theater with five sold-out shows.

As huge crowds flock to the East Coast’s first Indian gaming hall, the tribe manages to work out a compact with the state that allows the addition of slots. In just a few years, Foxwoods becomes the biggest and most profitable casino in the world.

In Mississippi, the state’s first floating casino, the Jubilee, opens its doors to eager gamblers. Prior to the legalization of gaming, the         economic situation on the Gulf Coast and in Tunica was bleak. Casinos then propel these regions into an era of rapid expansion and booming tourism. The growing ensemble of gaming properties provides an enormous influx of tax revenue, which counties and cities pour into improvements. The Gulf Coast’s renaissance becomes known as “The Mississippi Miracle.”

1993

Sports betting is officially made illegal in the United States, with the exception of Nevada, Oregon and Delaware. New Jersey is given a one-year window in which to approve sports betting, but efforts to get the measure passed ultimately end in failure.

On October 15, the “second wave” of Las Vegas mega-resorts kicks off with the opening of Circus Circus’ Luxor, a $375 million, 2,500-room, Egyptian-themed pyramid sheathed in black glass. Crowds marvel at the property’s bold design and unique layout, though it causes a number of operational problems at first. Four years later, after investing $250 million in renovations and expansions, the property begins to realize its full potential.

Circus Circus also debuts a $90 million pink-domed theme park behind its namesake property on the Las Vegas Strip. Its roller coasters, animated dinosaurs, and replica of the Grand Canyon indicate that Las Vegas is embracing a more “family-friendly” image.

This attempt to broaden the Vegas appeal goes to the next level with the opening of Steve Wynn’s $450 million Treasure Island, which boasts nightly pirate battles and            pyrotechnics in the “Buccaneer Bay” outside the casino entrance.  (When the “family-friendly” marketing strategy proves to be incongruous with Sin City, Treasure Island shifts toward a more adult, contemporary theme and renamed itself “T.I.” in 2003.)

Huge crowds gather to watch the fiery implosion of the Dunes, starting the trend of heavily hyped demolitions as “old school”  Vegas properties are brought down to clear room for newer, flashier resorts.  (The fall of the Dunes, known as the last of the mob-controlled casinos, is laden with symbolism; the Strip is now run by major public corporations.) Steve Wynn stages the event like a Hollywood production, with blasts from Treasure Island’s pirate cannons       accompanying the destruction.

Meanwhile, Louisiana officially introduces casino gambling on November 8, with the opening of the Showboat’s Star Casino on Lake Pontchartrain, just outside New Orleans. The Big Easy’s boats, however, are overshadowed by more successful operations in Shreveport and on the Texas border.

This landmark year for Las Vegas concludes with the opening of the 5,000-room MGM Grand. Barbra Streisand makes her return to the stage to perform for invited VIPs, ensuring a media circus. The colossal resort, however, is beset by logistical problems. It takes a few years and an additional $250           million investment for former Caesars boss Terry Lanni to get things running smoothly.

1994

Next to the U.S./Canadian border, across the river from Detroit, Michigan, Casino Windsor opens its temporary casino on May 17. Caesars, Circus and Hilton manage the enormous facility.  A riverboat is added to accommodate players, and the permanent casino opens four years later.

In Las Vegas, a series of overhead skywalks open on the “four corners” of the Strip, at the bustling intersection of Las Vegas Blvd. and Tropicana Avenue. This seamlessly connects Tropicana, MGM Grand, Excalibur and Luxor, ensuring that more foot traffic flows through each property.

Meanwhile, Las Vegas’ most popular locals-oriented casino, Sam’s Town, completes a $100 million expansion which adds 650 new rooms, an indoor park, a variety of restaurants, and a larger casino. This gives Boyd Gaming Corp. a megaresort-sized property several miles from the Strip, offering local gamblers, and tourists a budget-friendly alternative.

In Iowa, voters authorize reel spinning slot machines at state racetracks. $26 million is spent to outfit Prairie Meadows with a casino containing 1,100 slots. This “racino” (a hybrid racetrack/casino) opens for business the following year. Its machines generate $119.3 million in revenue within a 12-month period. This proves the viablity of the racino concept, which also rescues the ailing horse racing industry. Slot revenues enable the tracks to offer higher purses, which attract the best competitors in the sport.

Finally, 1994 was the year that Casino Player presented its first annual “Loosest Slots Awards.”  TropWorld in Atlantic City is awarded the “Loosest Overall Slots” award on the East Coast, while the casinos of downtown Las Vegas capture the top spot in Nevada.

1995

Peter Morton opens the Hard Rock Hotel Casino on Paradise Road in Las Vegas. The first gaming property geared to the “Gen-X” crowd, the Hard Rock and its young, hip attitude—exemplified by the rock music pumping in its casino—is an imme-diate success.

The $500 million Stratosphere Hotel Casino and Tower celebrates its grand opening at the site of the former Vegas World on the Las Vegas Strip. The 1,149-ft. observation tower is a hit, but the casino is a bust. Shortly after opening, the Stratosphere Corporation is forced to file for bankruptcy. Construction on the second tower is halted with only a few stories partially built. Corporate raider Carl Ichan gains control by buying a majority of the outstanding bonds. A billion-dollar addition will be completed in June 2001, turning the Stratosphere into a popular property—particularly among gamblers, who appreciate the player-friendly odds and loose machines.

Slot machine manufacturer IGT announces its plans to develop a “Wheel of Fortune”-themed slot machine, based on the world’s most popular game show. The machine goes on to become the most popular slot game of all time, inspiring numerous spinoffs (no pun intended).

In December, downtown Las Vegas unveils the $70 million Fremont Street Experience, featuring dazzling computer-generated graphics projected across a massive overhead canopy, set to booming music. The attraction serves to unify the casinos along the downtown corridor and creates a reason for tourists to venture off the Strip.

The same month, Indiana introduces casino gambling with the opening of Aztar’s City of Evansville, a 2,700-passenger riverboat with 35,000 square feet of gaming space.

1996

Mohegan Sun opens in Uncasville, Connecticut. The megaresort is based on 240 acres along the banks of the Thames River, and is the second largest in the country (right behind Foxwoods). The property features major sporting events and concerts in Mohegan Sun Arena, while its sprawling casino draws crowds to its thousands of slot machines and hundreds of gaming tables.  As with Foxwoods, the tribal-owned resort plows its immense  profits into a series of expansion projects.

On the Las Vegas Strip, the legendary Sands—once the stomping grounds of the Rat Pack—is imploded in November. This clears room for Las Vegas Sands Corp., run by mogul Sheldon Adelson, to begin construction on The Venetian.

The world loses another Vegas legend when George Burns dies at the age of 100.  The lights on the Las Vegas Strip are dimmed in his honor.

1997

The New York-New York resort celebrates its grand opening in Las Vegas on January 3. One of the most successful properties to open on the Strip since the debut of The Mirage, the $460 million, 2,000-room resort—with its wonderfully detailed Manhattan-themed skyline and interior—continues the trend of elaborately “themed” properties arriving on the Strip.

In April, Mike Tyson and Evander Holyfield square off in a rematch at MGM Grand’s arena. The heavyweight title bout is cut short when, in one of the most infamous events in sports history, Tyson bites a chunk out of Holyfield’s ear.            Unruly mobs of furious fans stampede through the casino afterward, making the evening a disaster.

On a more positive note, gaming arrives in North Carolina on November 13 with the opening of Harrah’s Cherokee Casino, an $85 million, 175,000-square-foot facility containing only slot machines. Owned by the Eastern Band of Cherokee Indians and operated by Harrah’s Entertainment, it’s another example of the successful synergy between veteran gaming companies and federally recognized Indian tribes.

1998

Another Harrah’s-operated casino, the Horseshoe Southern Indiana riverboat (formerly Caesars Indiana), debuts a complex featuring a four-deck riverboat called The Legend. The largest riverboat casino in the country, its amenities include a hotel, pavilion, multiple restaurants, a golf course, and a showroom.

But without question, the new gaming property of the year is Bellagio, Steve Wynn’s  pièce de résistance. The $1.6 billion Italian-inspired resort features luxury stores, world-class restaurants, a man-made lake filled with water fountains choreographed to music, and an art gallery worth hundreds of millions of dollars. Wynn outdoes himself with this ultra-sophisticated resort, which forever changes the city’s kitschy, gaudy reputation.

This is also the year of Frank Sinatra’s passing. Ol’ Blue Eyes succumbs to a heart attack at age 82. The next night, the lights on the Las Vegas Strip are dimmed in honor of the man who made it the most swingin’ town on earth.

1999

In March, the Beau Rivage (French translation: “beautiful shore”) opens its 1,780-room hotel-casino, making it the largest gaming property in the United States outside of Nevada. Local law requires its casino to be based on a huge floating barge,      connected to a land-based facility that contains its hotel, restaurants and other amenities.

On the Las Vegas Strip, the $1.5 billion Venetian debuts—only two years after breaking ground—with a flutter of white doves, sounding trumpets and singing gondoliers. Its magnificient design is inspired by owner Sheldon Adelson’s honeymoon in Venice.

Adelson breaks the rules of traditional casino-hotel design by making every room an oversized suite, gearing the property toward hosting conventions and business travelers.  The massive gatherings constantly being held in the attached convention center fill his hotel rooms midweek, making the resort extremely profitable. Today, the Venetian is part of a vast complex that includes the Sands Expo Convention Center and the $1.9 billion Palazzo Hotel and Casino Resort. It is the largest hotel and resort complex in the world, offering a staggering 7,128 hotel rooms and suites.

2000

Steve Wynn’s company, Mirage Resorts, sees it stock price drop and MGM Grand makes a takeover bid. The two sides eventually agree to a $4.4 billion deal, with MGM Grand also assuming about $2 billion of Mirage debt.  The resulting mega-corporation would be renamed MGM Mirage.

Wynn walks away with about $500 million. Rather than retire at age 58, the relentless entrepreneur tears down the Desert Inn and begins developing his most ambitious resort ever: Wynn Las Vegas.

2001

The September 11 terrorist attacks send Las Vegas’ economy into a tailspin. With travelers afraid to fly, tourism plummets, triggering a chain reaction of layoffs and bankruptcies. It will take more than two years for the local economy to fully recover.

It’s a less-than-ideal moment to open a new resort, but in November, the Palms opens a mile west of the Strip on Flamingo Road. Industry-watchers question the boutique-sized resort’s chances; with only 430 rooms and budgeted at a modest $285 million, it’s directly across the street from the much larger and well-established Rio. The bigger question mark is whether owner George Maloof’s strategy—targeting young, hip partiers as well as local gamblers—will pay off.

Maloof does an excellent job catering to locals with loose slots and generous promotions, while young tourists and celebrities flock to the nightclub Rain, the futuristic Ghostbar lounge, and a constant cavalcade of events and concerts. The following year, in a stroke of marketing genius, Maloof invites MTV to use his resort as the backdrop for its “Real World” reality series. To house the cast, he demolishes six rooms and spends $2 million to construct the      “Real World Suite.” Images of the Palms and its sexy, hard-partying atmosphere are beamed all over the planet. Soon other resorts are amping up their nightlife offerings to emulate its success.

2002

Celine Dion announces her three-year, 600-show contract to perform five nights a week at Caesars Palace. In a bid to reclaim its position among Vegas’ most elite properties, Caesars builds a state-of-the-art arena, the 4,000-seat Colosseum, to house Dion’s show.  The epic production, titled “A New Day,” opens the following year—featuring Dion performing her biggest hits against an array of dancers and special effects.

2003

In March, the first episode of the World Poker Tour airs on television, turning the game into a ratings-grabbing spectator sport. WPT creator Steve Lipscomb, a former documentary filmmaker, incorporates an             ingenious twist: tiny cameras are mounted in the table, enabling viewers at home to see the players’ hole cards. Computer-generated graphics and play-by-play analysis heighten the excitement and give the show the look and feel of a professional sports event.

The inaugural season concludes with the first WPT Championship, held at Las Vegas’ Bellagio casino. The show’s impressive ratings inspire NBC to air WPT’s “Battle of Champions” tournament the following year in a prized time slot, pitting it against CBS’ coverage of the Super Bowl XXXVII pre-game show. The WPT is a major catalyst behind the poker boom, attracting millions of newcomers to the game and turning top players into celebrities.

On July 2, the Borgata Hotel Casino and Spa arrives, bringing the first billion-dollar megaresort to  Atlantic City. This joint venture between Boyd Gaming and MGM Mirage is the first new hotel property to debut in the market in 13 years. Featuring 2,000 rooms, fine dining, hip nightlife, and a sexy, sophisticated image, The Borgata, an instant sensation, prompts numerous other Atlantic City properties to expand and reinvent themselves.

2004

The Tropicana in Atlantic City unveils “The Quarter,” a $280 million retail and entertainment complex that invigorates the overall market.  Forward-thinking Tropicana executives anticipated that Atlantic City would need to undergo the same shift that reshaped Las Vegas, with the emphasis shifting from gambling to high-end dining, entertainment, and nightlife. The Trop also adds the Havana Tower with 505 new guest rooms, 45,000 square feet of meeting space, and 2,400 new parking spaces.

Harrah’s Entertainment purchases the legendary Binion’s Horseshoe casino in downtown Vegas, then sells it to MTR Gaming Group—but retains the rights to the Horseshoe brand and the World Series of Poker. Later that year, Harrah’s closes on the purchase of Horseshoe Gaming Holding Corporation.

A much larger, industry-changing transaction begins to take shape when MGM Mirage proposes to acquire Mandalay Resort Group, formerly known as Circus Circus Enterprises. Mandalay Resort Group’s major properties include Mandalay Bay, Luxor, Excalibur and Circus Circus, as well as resorts in Tunica, Illinois,            Detroit and Reno. The deal is completed the following year, with MGM Mirage paying $4.8 billion and assuming $2.5 billion in debt.

2005

Hurricane Katrina strikes in August. The consequences are catastrophic. While the flooding of New Orleans garners most of the media attention, the damage to Mississippi’s Gulf Coast is worse. Entire neighborhoods are obliterated by 30-foot tidal waves.  All of its 12 casinos—which are required to float on water—are shut down,. More than half are destroyed. Mississippi’s vitally important gaming market—the third largest in the country after Las Vegas and Atlantic City—is wiped out overnight.

The laws are quickly amended to allow casinos to rebuild on dry land. This spurs massive re-investments in the region, as its gaming industry mounts a comeback. Eventually, the Gulf Coast’s casinos return even bigger and better         than before.

In Las Vegas, Steve Wynn completes his own comeback with the opening of Wynn Las Vegas. The amazingly opulent $2.7 billion resort boasts 2,716 rooms, 18 restaurants, a 45-foot waterfall cascading down a massive artificial mountain, and a shopping promenade featuring upscale brands like Chanel, Dior and Louis Vuitton.  A Ferrari and Maserati dealership is even located adjacent to the casino.

Harrah’s completes its takeover of Caesars Entertainment. The merger makes Harrah’s the world’s largest gambling company, with more than 40 casinos and almost 100,000 employees. Harrah’s announces that it will consolidate most of its casinos under the Harrah’s, Rio, Caesars and Horseshoe brands.

2006

The beleaguered Gulf Coast has cause to celebrate as The Beau           Rivage re-opens in Biloxi on August 29, exactly one year to the day after Hurricane Katrina struck. Rather than simply repair the damage to the property, MGM Mirage invests $550 million to renovate and upgrade its offerings, adding a gorgeous poker room (modeled after the famous poker facility at Bellagio), a world-class golf course, and new restaurants. In addition, the resort completely remodels its 1,740 hotel rooms.

The Seminole Tribe of Florida, the first U.S. tribe to get into the gambling business in 1979, announces its purchase of the famed Hard Rock brand, including its casinos, restaurants, hotels and huge collection of rock ’n’ roll memorabilia.  The Hard Rock Hotel in Las Vegas is not included in the deal. The $965 million deal with London-based Rank Group PLC is believed to mark the first time that an American Indian tribe has purchased a major international corporation. The Seminoles had already achieved great success by partnering with Hard Rock to launch gambling and entertainment complexes in Tampa and Hollywood, Florida.

In September, just before adjourning for midterm elections, the House of Representatives and Senate pass legislation that deals a crippling blow to the Internet gambling industry. The legislation is tucked into the SAFE Port Act, which is designed to prevent nuclear, chemical and biological materials from being smuggled into the U.S. in shipping containers. (If you’re wondering how playing poker online is related to thwarting a biological terrorist attack, well, we’re all wondering the same thing.)

While the act does not make gambling online illegal, it prohibits banks, credit cards and other financial intermediaries from transferring funds to online gaming sites, thereby making it difficult for most U.S. gamblers to fund their play.  The act is signed into law on October 13,  by President Bush, sending the online gaming industry into a tailspin.

2007

Peter Morton, co-founder of the Hard Rock brand and creator of the Hard Rock Hotel in Las Vegas, cashes in his chips as Morgan’s Hotel Group buys his casino-hotel for $770 million. (Morton opened the resort in 1995 at a construction cost of $80 million.) The purchase gives Morgan’s a foothold in the world’s largest hotel market. Morgan’s embarks on ambitious expansion plans, which will effectively double the size of the property.

On November 14, authorities charged 23 people in connection with an illegal sports gambling ring that was allegedly run out of the Borgata’s poker room. Six of the 23 were Borgata employees, and four             of the others were known mob associates.

In December, Celine Dion concludes her titanic five-year           engagement at Caesars Palace. Since opening in March 2003, Dion’s show, “A New Day,” grosses more than $400 million and is seen by nearly three million fans. Tickets for the farewell show fetch as much as $1,899 on eBay.  A few months later, Bette Midler takes center stage at the Colosseum with her own glitzy production, “The Showgirl Must Go On.”

2008

In January, one of the largest leveraged buyouts in history is completed as Hamlet Holdings, a private equity firm, buys Harrah’s Entertainment for just north of $15 billion. In April, Harrah’s Entertainment’s board of directors decides to change the name of the company to Caesars Entertainment Corporation. The name change is designed to capitalize on the international name recognition of the Caesars brand.

In June, Borgata opens its upscale boutique hotel, “The Water Club” adding 800 additional guest rooms to the complex.

At year’s end, Steve Wynn unveils Encore. The $2.3 billion property contains over 2,000 luxury suites, a casino encased in glass that overlooks several pools, penthouse baccarat tables geared toward the highest of rollers, and an array of other dazzling amenities.

2009

In August, the Tropicana’s new CEO, Alex Yemenidjian, announces a $165 million, multiphase plan to renovate the property in a colorful South Beach style. The third phase, which includes a Nikki Beach Night Club and Nikki Beach multimillion-dollar pool renovation, reaches completion roughly two years later.

On March 1, The M Resort in Las Vegas opens with a bang, after a 10-minute fireworks display over the resort’s pool.

Las Vegas Sands Corp. is granted one of five stand-alone casino liscenses and opens Sands Casino Resort Bethlehem in Pennsylvania on May 22.  Two years later, it opened its hotel on May 27.

Parx Casino and Racing, formerly Philadelphia Park Racetrack and Casino, opens as the largest casino gaming complex in Pennsylvania. Owned and operated by Greenwood Gaming and Entertainment, Parx’s casino—which is open for action 24/7—contains 3,500 slot machines, 140 live table games, a poker room with 60 tables, live racing and simulcast action, and several dining options and bars.

CityCenter (also known as CityCenter Las Vegas), the largest privately funded construction             project in the history of the United States, opens in the heart of the Las Vegas Strip. The gigantic project is connected by a people mover system to adjacent MGM properties Monte Carlo Las Vegas and Bellagio Las Vegas. The original cost estimate of $4 billion reportedly soars to over $9 billion due to design changes and rising construction costs. The complex includes a 4,000-room hotel-casino (Aria), along with residential condo towers, boutique hotels, and a retail and entertainment district.

2010

Casinos in Pennsylvania began operating table games in July, making the Keystone State a full-scale casino destination.

In September, SugarHouse Casino opens as the first casino in the city of Philadelphia. SugarHouse is based on the Delaware River’s waterfront, just a short cab ride from Philadelphia Int’l Airport. The casino boasts live table games and a huge assortment of slots.

On December 15, Cosmopolitan of Las Vegas opens just south of the Bellagio on the west side of the Las Vegas Strip. The glamorous $3.9 billion resort features 2,995 rooms along with75,000 square-foot casino; massive amounts of retail, restaurants options, a huge spa and fitness facility; and a 1,800-seat theater. It’s the only hotel-casino to open on the Strip this year.

2011

On March 15, Celine Dion makes a comeback and begins a three-year residency at The Colosseum at Caesars Palace. The new show, Celine,  features 31 musicians, consisting of a full orchestra and band.  Additionally, it was reported in January that ticket sales for the show had already passed the $10 million mark, the fastest sale in the history of the venue. Dion will perform an estimated 70 shows per year until 2014.

On May 25, Casino Monte Lago re-opens at Lake Las Vegas.

Elton John returns to The Colosseum at Caesars Palace on September 28 with The Million Dollar Piano.  The resident show plays through December 2013.

Resorts World Casino New York City opens in November.  A prime example of the “racino” concept, Resorts World has a casino packed with some 5,000 video slot and gaming machines(including electronic table games) attached to the famous Aqueduct Racetrack.

2012

This is a remarkable year for the gaming industry, highlighted by the arrival of brand-new gaming resorts, dramatic renovations to existing properties, and a series of high-stakes deals—including partnerships between Las Vegas properties and superstar entertainers.

Move over Atlantic City, you’re now No. 3.Gaming is now a $3 billion industry in Pennsylvania, making the state the No. 2 gaming market in the U.S. behind Nevada.

In February, Trump Entertainment Resorts announces that it has reached a sale agreement  with Landry’s Inc. The Houston-based company purchases Trump Marina for only $38 million and re-brands it as Golden Nugget Atlantic City. Later in the year, Landry’s purchases the Isle Casino Hotel in Biloxi, Mississippi from Isle of Capri Casinos for $45 million. Landry’s announces plans to renovate and rebrand the property as a Golden Nugget, with completion planned for 2014.

In April, Revel Atlantic City debuts on 20 acres of beachfront land adjacent to the Showboat Hotel & Casino. It is the first new resort to open in Atlantic City in nine years. Its hotel tower, which boasts more than 1,800 rooms and suites with sweeping ocean views, is the tallest structure in Atlantic City and the second tallest in the state of New Jersey. Beyond its vast 130,000 square-foot casino, the $2.6 billion resort features two nightclubs, 13 restaurants, two live entertainment venues, multiple swimming pools, and a two-acre landscaped outdoor deck overlooking the ocean. Beyonce performs during the resort’s opening             weekend.

In May, Margaritaville Casino opens in Biloxi, Mississippi.  The 68,000 square-foot property, located in the “Back Bay” area of Biloxi,, is owned by singer Jimmy Buffett in conjunction with other investors. Named after Buffet’s classic song “Margaritaville,” the franchise continues to expand. Today it has locations in tourist        destinations in the United States, Canada, Mexico and the Caribbean.

In June, Maryland Live! Casino opens its first phase. This casino and entertainment complex in Hanover, Maryland, owned and operated by The Cordish Company, features 3,200 slot machines and electronic table games. The second phase opens a few months later, bringing the total to 3,750 machines.

The D Las Vegas Casino Hotel (formerly Fitzgeralds Casino & Hotel) in downtown Las Vegas, opens in October.  This 34-story, 638-room hotel is owned and operated by Derek and Greg Stevens. The D’s hip, modern casino has approximately 940 slot machines and 29 table games located on two floors.

In September, the Golden Gate completes an almost $15 million expansion and renovation project that includes a new 35,000  square-foot, five-story luxury tower with 14 hotel suites and two penthouses that take up the entire fifth floor, bringing the property’s total number of hotel rooms to 122.

L’Auberge Casino & Hotel Baton Rouge makes a triumphant debut, extending the brand of Pinnacle Entertainment’s flagship property, L’Auberge du Lac in Lake Charles, Louisiana.

Antonio Esfandiari collects a record-breaking first prize of $18.3 million in July when he wins  The Big One for One Drop, a charitable WSOP event with a $1 million buy-in. He also holds the title for the most WSOP earnings, coming in at a staggering $19,385,048.

In August, Mohegan Gaming Advisors—a subsidiary of the Mohegan Tribal Gaming Authority which owns and operates Mohegan Sun in Connecticut and Mohegan Sun at Pocono Downs in Pennsylvania—announces that it will take over management of Resorts Casino Hotel in Atlantic City (pending regulatory approval). Shortly after the announcement, in a unique cross-promotion, Mohegan Sun in Connecticut, Mohegan Sun at Pocono Downs in Pennsylvania, and Resorts Casino Hotel in Atlantic City begin offering guests a new way to use and earn their rewards points. The three properties launch a cross-marketing promotion that allows guests to use their rewards points at any of the three properties.

In October, Hurricane Sandy strikes. Its impact on the Northeastern United States is devastating, flooding streets and tunnels and cutting power. Atlantic City suffers far less damage than much of nearby coastal New Jersey. Although the market’s 12 casinos are forced to close for several days.  Atlantic City’s casinos soon re-open for business.

On the entertainment front, no less than three superstars began residencies at Las Vegas Strip resorts during the month of December. Shania Twain began her headline run at the Colosseum at Caesars Palace, where she will perform several dozen shows over the next two years. Her Vegas show, “Still the One,” is heralded as a spectacular comeback; Twain had not performed in public since her “Up!” tour ended in 2004.

In the same month, a new  show featuring country superstars Tim McGraw and Faith Hill, “Soul 2 Soul,” kicks off its run at The Venetian Theatre in Las Vegas. The show features the married couple performing their solo hits, as well as duets. I n 2006, their “Soul 2 Soul” tour was the highest-grossing country tour of all the time.  At The Venetian, fans are able to see them in an unusually intimate setting.

On December 18, the Venetian brings Broadway to Las Vegas with the premire of the  Tony Award-nominated musical Rock Of Ages.

The ever-evolving gaming industry has undergone massive transformations over the last two and  a half decades.  As for what the next 25 years will hold, check back with us in 2038 for the full report. Blackjack dealers replaced by cyborgs? The debut of Wynn Mars, the first trillion-dollar casino?

It’ll be interesting, and a whole lot of fun. That much is a safe bet. ´

Riding the Wave

 25 years of covering one of the world’s most exciting industries

by Glenn Fine

Back in 1988, I never could have imagined sitting down to write an publisher’s letter for our 25th anniversary issue. At the time, our “business” consisted of a 32-page newsprint publication geared toward casino industry employees. I was working as a 21 dealer in Atlantic City, and I came up with an idea to start a newsletter for my fellow casino workers, to keep them informed of new developments and opportunities in the young casino industry.

In September of that year, the first issue of The Player (as this magazine was first known) in a square-shaped, no-frills format, on newsprint paper was printed with the help of my family and friends. Entertainer Engelbert Humperdinck was our cover story. Two years later, we switched to a more expensive, glossy cover—quite a bold move for us at the time. In 1991 that publication evolved into Casino Player, a full-fledged glossy magazine to teach gabblers proper strategies at all of the games in the casino. As a 21 dealer, I thought it was tragic how often people lost as they just didn’t understand how to play the game well. But Casino Player ended that for its readers!

What began as a homegrown trade industry newsletter grew to become the most popular and comprehensive source for gaming-related news, strategies and entertainment in the country. Casino Player is now a must-read for the moguls whose casinos we write about, as well as for the millions of players who want to avoid the “sucker bets” and make sure all their angles are covered when they take on the casino. (And of course if you want to know about the hottest new shows, restaurants, shops, player’s clubs, special events, and everything else casinos offer, we print that, too.)

If gambling had remained confined to Las Vegas and Atlantic City, our little industry newsletter probably wouldn’t have made it to a fifth anniversary, let alone a 25^th! But as it turned out, we hitched our cart to a horse that was about to explode out of the gate. 1988 was the year that Native American gaming was legalized, which triggered a chain reaction around the country and prompted many different states to permit their own “riverboat” and other types of casinos to be built.  Meanwhile, in Las Vegas, the “mega-resort” era began. This inspired casino companies from Connecticut to California to think bigger, build on a grander scale, and view gaming as just one element of an overall entertainment experience.

Today, millions of people from all walks of life—from millionaire high-rollers arriving on private jets, to families rolling up in their minivans—visit these properties to dine, shop, party, relax, and be entertained. As the industry becomes more competitive every year, the resorts are forever expanding and rolling out new incentives and perks. This is necessary, because today’s player is savvier than ever, and knows a rip-off—or a good value—when they spot one. (Some of the savviest experts of all are on the Casino Player staff; in addition to our talented journalists, our columnists include professional gamblers who’ve spent decades mastering the games they write about.)

One of the Casino Player’s most important sections is where we print the monthly Casino Slot Payback Percentages. This is where we show players which casinos have the loosest slots, from 1 cent slots to the $100 machines and which casinos have the tightest machines! Many casinos complain to us about printing this “sensitive” information. But they usually offer players the tightest slots!

Of course, this anniversary issue would not be possible without the support of you, our loyal readers who are passionate about gaming—and very vocal. You wouldn’t believe the stack of mail that lands on my desk every month (not to mention the flood of emails) from readers alerting us to a typo on page 73, or challenging one of our writers on the finer points of blackjack strategy.  Indeed, our readers have proven highly knowledgeable about gaming, which is why we created the Best of Gaming, our annual issue that lets readers vote on their favorite casinos, from the best rooms to the best restaurants, customer service and even their luckiest casino. The results of this issue become major bragging rights for the casinos that win.

So to those of you who’ve been faithfully following our magazine for years, we know you hold us to a high standard as well, and we promise to keep fulfilling our obligation. Like many popular magazines, you can now read your magazine on your computer, tablet or even your smart phone. Our digital editions are available on our web site, www.casinocenter.com. You’ll find weekly news, surveys and soon a Bulletin Board where you can ask questions and voice your opinions. Check it out. I promise you’ll enjoy our growing digital products!

The coming years are already shaping up to be some of the most exciting this business has ever seen. And we’ll be right there to report on it, and we hope you’ll continue to enjoy reading Casino Player as much we enjoy carrying on the 25-year tradition that we celebrate in this very special issue.

Understanding the differences between these two types of games

By Henry Tamburin

I’ve received a lot of questions about video poker machines in casinos on Native American reservations. To get the answers on how these machines work, I interviewed Jim Coleman, Senior Product Manager at IGT (a company that manufactures the majority of video poker machines for Class III casinos).

Before I begin, let me give you a brief history lesson on how Class I, II, and III gaming came about. The federal Indian Gaming Regulatory Act established the three classes in 1988, which defined what Indian tribes in a given jurisdiction can and can’t offer in their casinos. “Class I gaming” is defined as “traditional Indian gaming and social gaming for minimal prizes.” Since Class I doesn’t involve commercial gambling, I’ll ignore it for this article.  “Class II gaming” means the game of chance commonly known as bingo, whether or not electronic, computer, or other technologic aids are used in connection therewith, including, if played in the same location, pull-tabs, lotto, punch boards, tip jars and other games similar to bingo, as well as various non-house-banked card games (but for this article, we’ll ignore these other types).

“Class III gaming” is full-scale gambling (e.g., Las Vegas or Atlantic City), including table games (blackjack, craps, etc.), slots, and video poker. Tribes must negotiate compacts with the states to conduct Class III gaming; otherwise, they are limited to Class II gaming, providing bingo is offered in other forms or venues in that state.

The following table summarizes the major differences between a Class II and Class III video poker machine. I’ll explain the information in each row in more detail so you can fully understand the differences.

How the Outcome is Determined

A Class III video poker machine has a Random Number Generator (RNG) software program that randomly selects cards from a virtual 52-card deck (assuming no wild cards). When you press the deal button, the RNG selects five cards at random, which is the initial five cards that you see on your screen. The RNG continues to shuffle the remaining 47-card deck until you decide which cards you want to hold. When you hit the draw button, the shuffling stops and the replacement cards are selected from the top of the shuffled 47 cards. By law, each card has to have the same probability of being selected on the deal and draw; therefore, the probability of selecting any card is the same as it would be if you randomly drew cards from a freshly shuffled deck of cards. The probability of getting a winning hand by this random selection process is well known (e.g., the probability of getting a royal flush is roughly once in 40,000 hands).

A video poker hand in a Class II video poker machine is not the result of an RNG outcome at the terminal level. Instead, the machine is connected to a central computer server whose function is to draw bingo balls (randomly as with an RNG.) The result of the bingo game is a “game-ending pattern.” This is a pattern of numbers on a bingo card, such as five-in-row, four corners, round robin, etc., that ends the bingo game with a winning result and a prize. There is a specific timeframe (e.g., 20 milliseconds) in which a player who hits the start button on a bingo machine with a poker entertaining display (i.e., the deal button on his video poker machine) is entered into an electronic bingo game for that common ball draw. Each player has their own bingo card, which they can see on the interface of their player terminal (see photo of display below). The player that has the winning bingo pattern will win a monetary prize.

In addition, other patterns may award interim prizes for the corresponding bingo patterns. For example, the game of Jacks or Better has nine winning patterns (corresponding to the nine winning hands in Jacks or Better). If the winning bingo pattern results in a prize for the bingo game of, say 10 credits, then the player will end up with a poker hand that is presented as two pair on the entertaining display (which is the payout for two pair with max credits wagered).

A key point: Class II player terminals using a video poker entertaining display must involve player participation in an electronic bingo game. Therefore, you must be playing bingo against one (or more) players. You could be playing against other players playing on a video poker entertaining display or even other terminals with varying entertaining displays such as spinning reels (i.e., slot machine).

It really doesn’t matter what the player interface terminal is that will display the results of a bingo game (for video poker, it’s cards on a screen; for other entertaining displays, such as a slot machine, it’s spinning reels). If you happen to be the only player in a location, you can’t play (if you try, a message will appear on your screen, stating “waiting for more players”). However, in some gaming jurisdictions, Class II machines in one location could be linked to another Class II bingo server in another location, so it’s possible you could be playing a game of bingo against a player in a different location using a common ball draw.

Odds

In a Class II terminal using a video poker player interface, the odds of getting a winning hand are determined by the odds of the bingo pattern. Mathematicians at IGT can calculate the odds for millions of different bingo patterns on a bingo card. Therefore, theoretically, they can choose a bingo pattern that mimics the odds of getting any winning hand from a RNG in a Class III machine.

For a Class III video poker machine, the odds of selecting the winning hands from a 52-card deck can be accurately calculated. If you multiply the odds times the payout for each winning hand and sum the results, you can compute the Expected Return (ER) for the game. The ER for different video poker games and pay tables is readily available.

Playing Strategy

If you are playing a video poker machine where the cards are randomly selected by the RNG (e.g., Class III), the skill of the player can influence the outcome.

In a Class II terminal using a video poker interface, playing skill is futile because the result of your hand is already predetermined by the pattern of the winning bingo game. Therefore, deciding what cards to hold prior to hitting the draw button does nothing to improve your chances of winning. For the game of bingo, the result of the bingo game is a certain prize (i.e., payout), and you must get that prize in your video poker entertaining display outcome even if you make a “bonehead play.” For example, suppose you are dealt the following hand:

Let’s say the result of the bingo pattern is a prize of 4000 credits, which translates to a typical royal flush in video poker. However, on the draw, if you decide (knowingly or unknowingly) to hold all the cards instead of going for the royal flush, fear not. A genie will appear on the IGT entertaining display and change the 9 of spades to a 10 of clubs, giving you a royal flush hand and corresponding 4000-coin payout. (The latter payout was determined as the winning outcome of the bingo game.)

Some folks might think the “Genie” feature on Class II video poker machines is good for novice players because it will correct a playing mistake and show them the optimum strategy (i.e., the winning hand created by the “Genie”). Personally, I think this is an expensive way to learn the playing strategy for a video poker game. (It’s better to learn the playing strategy at home on your computer using video poker training software, and then bring a strategy card with you when you play a Class III version.)

Expected Return

Players can look at the Pay Table for any Class III video poker game and know what the ER is for the game (there is plenty of information available that lists the ER for different video poker games). However, on a Class II machine, you have no idea what the ER is for the game (that’s because the results are predetermined based on the game of bingo).

In addition, keep this point in mind. In many states, traditional casinos must report their return percentages to state gaming agencies and this information is often reported to the public. Since Native American tribes are a sovereign nation, their casinos are not subject to state regulation or public reporting of the return percentages on their machines.

Is it a Class II or III Machine?

You’ll know if the video poker machine you are about to play is a Class II machine if you see a display of a bingo card (such as the one below) on your video poker machine.

The Bottom Line

Class II video poker machines are bingo games that give players an entertaining display of video poker that they can relate to. There is no skill involved in playing them and the return on the game is unknown to players. Play these machines for entertainment. Class III video poker machines are a skill-based casino game where the skill of the player can influence the outcome. With a Class III video poker machine, it’s relatively easy to determine the ER of the game.

Acknowledgement: I want to thank Jim Coleman from IGT for the time he spent on several phone conferences with me, and the face-to-face discussion we had at the Global Gaming Expo in Las Vegas, explaining how Class II video poker machines work.

————————————————————————————————————-

Henry Tamburin is a blackjack and video poker expert. He is the host of the smartgaming.com website and the editor of the Blackjack Insider newsletter (for a free three-month subscription, visit www.bjinsider.com/free). For a free copy of his Casino Gambling Catalog, which contains books, strategy cards, and software for video poker players, call toll free 1-888-353-3234, or visit the web store at smartgaming.com.

WMS brings the fairy-tale story of Rapunzel to life in an interactive bonus game

by Frank Legato

Slot-maker WMS Gaming has made a habit of taking us back to our youth, games like “The Wizard of Oz,” “Aladdin & the Magic Quest” and “Alice” using animation, sound and even motion to conjure images of beloved stories from our collective childhood.

All have resonated with players, and “Wizard” has numerous popular sequels to prove it. “Aladdin” showed us the WMS Motion Chair, a gadget being used again with astounding effect in the upcoming game “Spider-Man.” But certain features of the “Alice” game are so popular with players that WMS decided to reprise them in a similar game.

“Rapunzel” is that game. This time, the Bonus Bank series, in which an ante wager qualifies the player for a collection of bonus events, is used to conjure up the image of the Grimm’s Fairy Tale that once had us all imagining climbing a ladder made of a maiden’s hair.

Shawn Collette, the principal game designer of both Rapunzel and Alice (not to mention “KISS,” “The Wizard of Oz Wicked Witch of the West” and “Double Money Burst”), says he considers Rapunzel the follow-up to Alice. “For people who have enjoyed our Alice game, I took some of those elements to the next level,” Collette says of Rapunzel. “When I designed Alice, there were a lot of things I thought I could improve on. With Rapunzel, I had the chance to do that, and I like dipping into the fairy tale aspects again.”

The story, for those whose childhood didn’t include fairy tales, involves  an enchantress named Dame Gothel who makes an evil bargain with a couple that ends up forcing the couple to hand over their baby to be raised by the enchantress. Gothel names the baby Rapunzel and locks her in a tower with no stairs or entry points—just, as Rapunzel grows, her long golden hair, which Gothel uses as a ladder. Eventually, a prince uses the hair to climb up and save Rapunzel.

Actually, you don’t necessarily have to have a book of the Grimm brothers’ 19^th century German folk tales to be familiar with the Rapunzel theme. Anyone with young children will probably recognize the character from Tangled, the 2010 animated Disney film based loosely on the fairy tale. Rapunzel also appeared with several other fairy-tale characters in 2007’s Shrek the Third. “It’s kind of gotten a new life in recent pop culture,” says Collette, “so this seemed like a good fit, theme-wise.”

Two-Pack

As WMS did with Alice, there are two game themes, each available in either five-reel video or a mechanical reel-spinning version with the “Transmissive Reels” video overlay, which provides animation over the reels. The two themes are “Rapunzel” and “Gothel.” Each contains its own dedicated free-spin and re-spin bonuses, but both games include three common “Bonus Bank” bonus features, activated by a 10-credit ante wager. (It is a 40-line game; the minimum wager is 50 credits, covering the lines and the ante.)

Once activated, the common bonus features  can occur randomly on any given spin.

What really will draw you to this slot, though, is its presentation. The games are in the format and cabinet the manufacturer calls “Bluebird xD.” Housed in a comfy slant-top cabinet, the video or mechanical reels sit under a “Metascreen”—basically, a 32-inch portrait screen on its side for a horizontal presentation (used to great effect in “Pirate Battle”).

The Metascreen hosts beautiful visuals and animation in high-definition video—taking you into the fantasy world of Grimm at the same time characters reach down to the main game screen to implement various bonus events, wild symbols and multipliers. “We draw heavily from the old fairy tale,” Collette explains. “We have Rapunzel up in the tower with Gothel, and Gothel has her evil little cat that sits on the top screen. As the player plays, those characters will interact with the player’s base game and do mystery bonuses to enhance the player’s experience.”

The base game features a four-by-five reel configuration—four symbols on each of five reels instead of the standard three. This is a unique configuration for the mechanical reel-spinning version in particular, which, thanks to the Transmissive Reels video overlay, has all the lively animation that the video version has.

Each base title has its own free-spin and re-spin bonus event. In the Rapunzel version, Rapunzel’s Free Spin Bonus awards up to 40 spins with three or more bonus symbols. During the free spins, Rapunzel hair symbols expand downward to add wilds to each reel on which they appear. Rapunzel’s Re-spin Bonus triggers in the base game when the first reel is filled with Hair symbols. The player is prompted to select a mouse to reveal one re-spin, two re-spins, one re-spin plus an additional Hair symbol to be placed at random, or an end of the bonus round with all Hair symbols changed to one like symbol.

In the Gothel version of the game, Gothel’s Free Spins Bonus awards five free spins with three scattered bonus symbols. In this version, Gothel sprinkles a lock of Rapunzel’s magic hair from the top screen down to the game screen to combine the three middle reels to form one large middle reel. The large middle reel actually serves as 12 of the same symbol—three reels, four symbols high—and any Hair symbols change to match that symbol. “This is the first time this has ever been done on a mechanical reel-spinner,” comments Collette.

In the “Gothel’s Re-spin Bonus,” eight hair symbols on adjacent reels 1 and 2, 2 and 3 or 3 and 4 combine into an oversized symbol, and the reels are re-spun.

“The re-spin features really enhance the player’s feel of the game, and gives the player a goal to get as many of the oversized symbol as they possibly can, to trigger that big win,” says Collette.

The free-game and re-spin features are accompanied by three base-game “Bonus Bank” features that appear at random, independent of the symbols lining up on the reels. The “Rapunzel Wilds Bonus” randomly changes up to 15 symbols on the reels into wild symbols. In “Big Kitty’s Wheel Feature,” a bonus wheel juts out from the top of the reels and spins either to a multiplier of up to 25X (applied to the triggering spin) or five free spins.

In the “Gothel’s Revenge Bonus,” the player is awarded one pick on each reel, to reveal either a single wild symbol or an entire wild reel.

Spanning the Globe

Rapunzel is a truly global game. According to WMS Producer Nathan Bird, creation of Rapunzel was a cooperative effort between game design studios in Las Vegas and Sydney, Australia. “A lot of the game design and math was done in Las Vegas, but the art and engineering were done in Sydney,” Bird says. “It meant the time put into this game was a lot greater than what is normally put into development.”

It is a game design method that has resulted in success for a number of games worked on by both Collette and Bird—the two also collaborated on “Epic Monopoly,” on the original games in the Colossal Reels series, Double Money Burst, KISS and The Wizard of Oz Wicked Witch of the West.

It is one reason for the widespread appeal of slots like Rapunzel, which is slated to be rolled out in a few U.S. jurisdictions this month. The majority of U.S. jurisdictions will see the game early in 2013, and according to Collette, it will be rolled out to all of WMS’ worldwide jurisdictions next year as well.

“For me, a lot of sheer love and passion went into creating this game,” Collette says. “The theme is right, the mechanic is right and I think the players are really going to enjoy it. The ingredients are there to make this game last a long time.”

A Reader Reveals His “Method” For Winning Jackpots

By John Grochowski

The search for surefire ways to beat casino games is eternal, and there’s certainly no exception with slot machines. Whether by mail or email, Facebook or the phone, there’s no shortage of sharpies peddling their strategies to “beat” the slots.

But nearly all slot-beating systems are worthless. There is nothing players can do to change the results being spit out by random number generators. If someone tries to sell you a system to beat the slots, the best response is to keep your hand firmly on your wallet as you stride quickly away. You’d be far better off taking the money it costs to buy a system and put it a slot machine instead. There’s no less chance of hitting the jackpot without the system, and the least you’d get in the exchange is a few player rewards points.

Nevertheless, every now and then a player comes up with an idea that doesn’t sound too bad, on paper. Whether the idea is valid after further thought, or whether it’s at all practical, is another matter.

So it went with a reader named Ned, who made contact by phone, saying I’d want to talk to him for sure.

“I know how to beat the slot machines,” he said.

I’d heard that claim a few hundred times before, and they’ve never really delivered. They can’t. Except for an ever-decreasing number of games with banked bonuses, slot machines can’t be beaten in the long run. All casino games make money by paying winners less than the true odds, and there’s nothing you can do to shift the odds on most slots. Even on games with skill-based bonuses, the math of the games are set up so that even the most skilled players can’t make enough on the bonus to completely offset the house edge on the base game.

Still, Ned claimed he had a method that involved charting games with big progressive jackpots. Best of all, his advice was free. He wasn’t selling any system. Ned just offered his strategy advice for those willing — and bankrolled – enough to take it.

“I have four casinos that are within a 20-minute or half-hour drive of my apartment,” he said. “I drop in at all of them at least a couple of times a week and check out the jackpots at a few games I like. They’re all dollar, three-reel games with one progressive jackpot. I don’t like to complicate things with four-level progressives or anything like that, and to me the video games are for a little fun, not for gambling.

“Over a few weeks or a couple of months, I get a sense of how big the jackpots are when they hit. If I don’t see them hit, I ask an attendant how big they were. I chart that all out. If I see that a machine that starts with a $10,000 jackpot and I see jackpots clustered around, $14,000, $15,000, then I start playing at $15,000. I never play for a smaller jackpot on that machine.”

I suggested to Ned that his method would require a very large bankroll. Dollar slots can eat up the cash in a hurry, and there’s no guarantee that he’d be the one to hit the jackpot, even if he’s selective about when he plays.

“Oh, that’s true enough,” he said. “I’ve had some monumental losses. But when I hit the jackpot, that makes up for a lot.”

It all sounds good in theory. Ned’s trying to do the same thing video poker players have done for a couple of decades. In video poker, where we know the probabilities of a randomly shuffled electronic deck, we can calculate break-even points. We can calculate that a 9-6 Jacks or Better game pays 99.5 percent with expert play with a royal flush worth 4,000 coins for a five-coin wager, and that it reaches 100 percent with a 4,880-coin wager. An expert who played only when a progressive royal jackpot was more than 4,880 coins would have an edge on the game.

But players aren’t privy to the odds on slot machines, and can’t calculate jackpot levels. Furthermore, past results don’t affect future outcomes on slot machines. When the jackpot on one of Ned’s favorites is at $15,000, the odds of hitting the top jackpot are exactly the same as when it’s at $10,000.

Finally, the house edges on slot machines are much higher than those on the best video poker games. A 9-6 Jacks or Better machine returns 99.5 percent with expert play, and even a lower-paying 8-5 Jacks or Better game with reduced returns on full houses and flushes returns 97.3 percent to experts. On the three-reel slots Ned favors, we’re looking at returns of about 90 to 93 percent on quarter games, and 93 to 95 percent on dollars, depending on the individual casino and the state of competition in its area.

Let’s say Ned is playing a machine that has a starting jackpot level of $10,000 for a three-coin on a dollar machine where the top jackpot turns up an average of once per 100,000 plays. Let’s also say that at that jackpot level, the game pays 93 percent, broken down into 2 percent of total wagers paid on the top jackpot, and 91 percent on smaller hits.

If the progressive reaches $15,000, is Ned paying a positive game? No, it’s just turned that 93 percent game into a 94 percent game. It’s still a losing proposition.

If we knew the break-even point on progressive slot machines, it would be possible for players to have a mathematical edge, though it would take an extremely large bankroll and a willingness to take big losses. But that requires inside information—you’d need to take a look at the par sheets manufacturers give casinos detailing all the probabilities of each game.

Players don’t have access to par sheets. We don’t know which version of a game is offered in any given casino. Machines can look identical, but have different payback percentages, and different jackpot frequencies.

There are other considerations. If you play three coins a pull in a dollar slot at 500 pulls an hour, that’s a $1,500-an-hour risk. That’s an awful lot of money to put in play when you’re chasing something as elusive and rare as the top jackpot on a slot machine.

Also, on any jackpot of $1,200 or more, you must sign an IRS form W2G before the casino can pay you. Those who itemize taxes and who keep careful records can deduct gambling losses up to the amount of winnings. However, many states do not permit any deductions for gambling losses. If you’re playing in a state that does not allow you to deduct losses, and you’re chasing big progressive jackpots, then state income tax on winnings is part of the cost of playing.

Nonetheless, if you discipline yourself to play only when the jackpot reaches a certain high level, then you’ll be playing a game with a higher payback percentage than the same machine at its base level. Whether it reaches break-even level, or whether you hit the jackpots needed to profit is another matter, and it’s problematic at best. As always, the best approach is to make sure you stay within your bankroll, don’t bet money you can’t afford to lose, and play for fun.

by Steve Kieva

SAVING MONEY IN LAS VEGAS

Comme Ça, the French brasserie inside the Cosmopolitan has a new daily happy hour.  The menu features 50% off the cocktail menu and various food items, including the popular Comme Ça Burger.  Happy hour pricing is available Monday-Thursday, 5:30-7 p.m. and Friday-Sunday, 5-7 p.m.; in the bar and lounge only.

Carla Pellegrino is now offering a 3-course price fixed dinner for $29.95 at her Bratalian restaurant at 10740 S. Eastern Ave. #155 in Henderson.  Diners can choose from seven appetizers, nine entrees and four desserts.

The All Stage Pass offered by Caesars Entertainment entitles you to see as many shows as you can in 48 hours for $104.  There are 20 selections to choose from.  If you manage to attend two in the afternoons and two in the evenings, you’ll pay an average price of $13 per ticket.  You can purchase the pass at any Caesars box office.

P.J. Clarke’s in the Forum Shops at Caesars Palace has $1 oysters available during happy hour from 2:45-6 p.m.

Lawry’s the Prime Rib, 4043 Howard Hughes Parkway, is offering $10 daily lunch specials Monday-Friday.  The special features a different sandwich each day and includes either a cup of soup or their prime rib chili.

The Coronado Cafe at South Point offers two $12.95 House Specials from 11 a.m.-11 p.m.  Choose from either a 10-oz prime rib or a 16-oz porterhouse steak.  Both come with onion rings and garlic bread, as well as, a garden salad and choice of baked, mashed or French fried potatoes.

Bill’s Gambling Hall, in the middle of the Las Vegas Strip, offers late-night specials that include a three-egg breakfast served with bacon and sausage, hash browns, and toast served from 11 p.m. until 6 a.m. for only $4.99.  There is also a Steak and Egg special served during the same timeframe that includes hash browns and toast for only $6.99.

Station Casinos are offering three-course $24.00 specials in their steakhouses.  Specials include:  Slow roasted Prime Rib of Beef with Au Jus and Creamy Horseradish; Grilled Atlantic Salmon; Herb Marinated Chicken; and Prime Top Sirloin.  All are served with seasonal vegetables, soup or salad and choice of dessert.  These specials are available at Boulder Station, Fiesta Henderson, Palace Station, Santa Fe Station, Sunset Station and Texas Station steakhouses.

The food court inside Casino Royale has foot-long hot dogs for just $1.99. There are also $1.00 drink specials at the bar.

Bougainvillea Cafe at Terrible’s Casino offers numerous Chinese lunch specials for $7.99.  They’re served from 11 a.m. until 2 p.m.  The specials are served with egg drop soup, steamed rice, and fortune cookies.

The Garden Grill Cafe at Circus Circus has two all-you-can-eat specials for $16.95.  Choose from either prime rib or BBQ ribs.  Sides are served with the first plate.

IN OTHER LAS VEGAS NEWS

In the short time it’s been open the Bacchanal buffet at Caesars Palace has become the most talked about buffet in Las Vegas history.  After a few price increases, it’s also the most expensive.  Lunch is now $28.99 and dinner is $44.95.

     Bite, the topless-vampire rock n roll show, is now confirmed for the Plaza in downtown Las Vegas.  The long-running show held its last performance at the Stratosphere Halloween night.

Sin City Comedy, which closed earlier this summer after a long run in the V Theater, has reopened in the Sin City Theatre inside Planet Hollywood casino.

The Broadway Theater at New York New York is host to a new erotic show; “Shades of Temptation.”  Performances are Tuesday-Sunday at 10:30 p.m.  The cast includes American Idol vocalist David Hernandez.  Tickets start at $49.95.

Pink’s Hot Dogs will open a second Las Vegas location at Red Rock Resort this winter.  The iconic hot dog stand opened its first Las Vegas location at Planet Hollywood’s Miracle Mile Shops in 2009.  The Red Rock location will replace Turf Grill, located near the poker room and race and sports book.

This month’s biggest rumor is that DoubleTree by Hilton will be taking over hotel booking operations at the Tropicana.

Mizumi restaurant’s Executive Chef Devin Hashimoto has been named “Best Chef on The Strip” by Vegas Seven in the magazine’s 2012 Restaurant Awards’ issue.  Since opening in May, Mizumi – the premier Japanese restaurant at Wynn Las Vegas – and the rising young chef have received numerous accolades from guests and food critics.  The notable weekly publication, Vegas Seven, said, “This chef does it better than anyone in the city… All hail this new star!”

     After more than a decade of revelry, Rain Nightclub, which opened with the Palms in 2001, is being closed to make way for a multimillion dollar renovation scheduled to begin next year.

Ruth’s Chris Steak House will open early next year at Harrah’s Las Vegas, replacing the casino’s The Range steak house.  This makes the second closure of a major steakhouse operated by Caesars Entertainment.  Bill’s Steakhouse was recently closed at Bill’s Gamblin’ Hall.

Francois Dupuis, a Cirque du Soleil performer who entertained millions of “Mystere” show-goers as the “big baby” in the diaper and bonnet has died, the company announced.  Dupuis was an original cast member of “Mystere,” which opened in late 1993.  In March the show celebrated 18 years and 8,600 performances.

We can now confirm the rumor that Priscilla Queen of the Desert is coming to Las Vegas.  The location is said to be either the Venetian or the Palazzo.

Actress and restaurateur Eva Longoria plans to reopen the shuttered space that formerly housed her restaurant, Beso, and nightclub, Eve, at Crystals in CityCenter.  The space is being converted into an erotic theatrical dining experience known as SHe.  Jeff Kutash, best known as the producer of “Splash,” is producing the four-night-a-week, midnight-to-3 a.m. show.

Confirmed tenants at Caesars Entertainment’s Linq include:  Sprinkles Cupcakes; Brooklyn Bowl restaurant; Yard House; an Asian restaurant called F.A.M.E; Flour & Barley; a brick-oven pizzeria from Block 16; Chayo Mexicano; Off the Strip Bistro, an upscale casual eatery; and the return of The Tilted Kilt, a Celtic-themed bar and grill.

Tom Colicchio will open a second Las Vegas restaurant at The Mirage next summer.  The 250-seat restaurant will specialize in meats prepared entirely over an open flame.  The new restaurant will take over the location occupied by Kokomo’s, which will close in early 2013.

     Tea House Asia Grill & Sushi will open at South Point in December.  The restaurant will feature sushi, sashimi, dim sum, and large plates.

The Buffet at Wynn Las Vegas has been named the Best Buffet in Las Vegas by USA Today readers.  More than 2,700 buffet connoisseurs cast their votes online to determine the winner.  The Buffet beat out six other Vegas all-you-can eat buffets to garner the title. Note:  The Bacchanal buffet was not open at the time the voting took place.

“We are thrilled that guests enjoy the world-class experience, variety, and service found at The Buffet at Wynn,” said Marilyn Spiegel, president of Wynn Las Vegas.  “We are proud to deliver the same freshness and highest quality ingredients in our buffet that our guests have come to expect in our finest dining venues.”

For items like these and more, visit Steve’s award winning website at:  www.everythinglv.com.  Have a question for Steve about Las Vegas?  You can email him at mrvegas98@aol.com.

Shining a light on some great (and not so great) blackjack games around the country

By Henry Tamburin

I have several reporters who visit casinos in different areas of the U.S. and then file reports on the blackjack playing conditions, which are published in my Blackjack Insider e-Newsletter. Based on these reports plus information I glean from Current Blackjack News (www.bj21.com), and comments I receive from players, here are some tips on where you will find some good (and bad) blackjack games.

Gulf Coast region

The big news in Mississippi was the opening of Jimmy Buffet’s beached-themed Margaritaville Casino & Resort in Biloxi. According to a report filed by Riverboat Flyer (www.bjinsider.com, August issue), the rules specify that dealers stand on soft 17 (s17) on all their blackjack games. This is a pleasant surprise because most of the blackjack games in this area have changed from s17 to h17. (The house edge is lower by 0.22% when the rules are s17 compared to h17.)

Margaritaville has two-, four-, and six-deck blackjack games, with modest betting limits of $5 and $10 up to $500 (good for players with a limited bankroll). According to Riverboat Flyer, “The casino is fun and relaxing. They play feel-good music, with words that you can understand. Of course, everything is new and clean. There are no cigarette burns in the table felt or sticking buttons on the machines. The employees are eager to please and they leave a good impression.”

The facility features a buffet, the sit-down Margaritavlle Restaurant, the Landmark Landing, where you can dock your boat, and an outdoor area for entertainment and dancing. Riverboat Flyer adds, “The casino doesn’t have a Player’s Club booth location, instead you see casino staff equipped with iPhones and they can sign you up for their players promotion club very quickly.” Thumbs up to Margaritaville for offering s17 on all their blackjack tables, and for eliminating the long lines at Player’s Club booths.

NY State

A disgruntled blackjack player emailed me about an incident that happened to him at the Turning Stone casino. He decided to play the casino’s double-deck game, and when he attempted to double down after splitting a pair (das), the dealer told him he couldn’t because of “house rules.” The agitated player spoke to a supervisor about the fact that the casino doesn’t post their playing rules on the tables (if he knew DAS was not allowed in their double-deck game, even though it is allowed on their six- and eight-deck games, he wouldn’t have sat down and played).

By not allowing players to double down after splitting, the house advantage against a player in a double-deck game with das increases from

0.19% to 0.32%. Thumbs down to Turning Stone for not posting their playing rules, and for not allowing das on their double-deck game.

Pennsylvania Casinos

I’ve received good reports from players, and from my Pennsylvania BJI reporter Mark Gruetze, on the blackjack playing conditions there. The state’s Gaming Control Board has mandated that all casinos must offer blackjack games with s17, das, and ls (late surrender). This is an excellent game for blackjack players, with a

0.33% house edge against a basic strategy player. Furthermore, the Gaming Control Board recently proposed to allow double-deck pitch games with the same rules. Thumbs up to the Pennsylvania Commission for offering a player-friendly blackjack game to their players.

Barona Casino

Last year, I rated the single-deck game at Barona casino (San Diego) as the best blackjack game in the country (2011 May issue Casino Player). The reason was the liberal playing rules, which included h17, das, ls, rsa, with a 3-2 payoff for a blackjack. This game gave the basic strategy player a tiny edge over the casino without card counting. Unfortunately, this great single-deck game was replaced with the lousy single-deck SuperFun 21 game with h17 (house edge 0.94%). Thumbs down to Barona.

Las Vegas

It’s no secret that the big-name casinos on the Strip have some of the worse blackjack games for recreational players. Just about all of them have single-deck blackjack games where the payoff for a blackjack is reduced from 3-2 to 6-5 (which increases the house edge to a ridiculous 1.4%).

As bad as this is, some greedy casino managers have upped the ante on bad games by paying 6-5 on their multi-deck games. Depending upon the number of decks, this increases the house edge even more, up to 1.78% to 2.04% (the greater the number of decks, the greater the house edge). According to the July issue of Current Blackjack News, 14 casinos on (or just off) the Strip, and another four casinos downtown, offer 6-5 multi-deck games. So before you sit down and play blackjack in Las Vegas, make sure you know what the payoff is for a blackjack (if it’s 6-5, say “Adios”).

Then there are the new “party pits” that you’ll find in many Las Vegas casinos. Many feature scantily clad, well-endowed, female dealers (you get lots of cleavage with your cards), who deal the cards with loud rock music playing in the background. This eye candy comes at a cost—these are some of the worst blackjack games you’ll encounter. (The pits often have names, such as Wicked 21, Fetish Pit, and Hell’s Belles.)

According to BJI contributing writer Stu D Hoss (August issue BJI), Caesars Palace has recently taken the party pit to a new level with their Pussy Cats pit, featuring go-go dancers in cages with blaring music. Hoss states, “This pit features arguably some of the worst blackjack games you will ever see. Nine of the twelve tables in the pit are six-deck games that pay only 6-5, dealers hit soft 17, players can double down on only 10 and 11, and double after splits is not allowed.” Ouch!

One final caveat: Playing conditions in casinos often change. You can stay current by subscribing to the Blackjack Insider Newsletter (www.bjinsider.com), Current Blackjack News (www.bj21.com), or viewing the Las Vegas Blackjack Survey on www.wizardofvegas.com. (Note: For a limited time, you can get a free three-month trial subscription to the BJI by going to www.bjinsider.com/trial.)

Tamburin’s Tip of the Month

How Would You Play This Hand?

If you stood on your 18 in a typical 6-deck, s17, das game, you would win 57.5% of the resolved hands. If you doubled down, you would win only 54.5% of them. (That’s because if your single draw card is a 4 through 9, you’d wind up with a hand worse than 18. So nine cards make your hand worse, only three cards, the ace, 2, and 3, make it better, and the four tens give you the same result.) Even though you win slightly fewer hands, doubling down is the preferred strategy because you’ll win more money by winning 54.5% of the time on a doubled bet compared to 57.5% of the time on a single bet. The next time you are dealt a two-card soft 18 and the dealer shows a 3, make the right play and double down.

Greg Merson conquers final table for World Series of Poker Main Event title

by Sean Chaffin

ESPN’s cameras were poised and ready to capture an exciting final table in the 2012 World Series of Poker (WSOP) Main Event in late October as the remaining three players settled in to battle it out on live television for the $8.5 million top prize and a gold championship bracelet valued at $150,000.  When play began on Oct. 30 shortly before at 6 p.m. at the Rio All Suites Hotel and Casino in Las Vegas, who would have guessed that 11 hours later the same three players would still be at that table?

This year’s Main Event played host to an epic final table.  The large and raucous crowd at the Penn and Teller Theater witnessed an almost 12-hour battle that finally came to an end when 24-year-old poker pro Greg Merson’s Kc Qs held up against Jesse Sylvia’s Qh 10h.  Merson’s accomplishment is the biggest in the poker world.  He had to overcome a field of 6,598 players who plunked down $10,000 each for their shot to win poker’s premier event en route to the title.

An added bonus for Merson is that his victory assured him a WSOP Player of the Year title.  The honor would have gone to “Poker Brat” Phil Hellmuth if Merson finished in any other place except as champion.  Merson had a huge WSOP even before the Main Event.  He earned a bracelet in the $10,000 No Limit Hold’em Six-Handed Championship and brought home a cool $1.1 million for his victory in that event.

“I’ve played a lot of long cash games in my career which helps you prepare for something like this.  But this whole stage is something you can’t ever really prepare for,” Merson said shortly after winning the tournament and tearfully placing his gold bracelet on the wrist of his mother.  “I couldn’t feel better for everyone who I’m sharing this victory with.”

THEN THERE WERE THREE

     The final nine players returned to action in Las Vegas on Oct. 29.  The near-live coverage by ESPN has added an even more dynamic element to the annual poker spectacle and as play resumed under the bright lights, the biggest mover at the table was 21-year-old Jake Balsiger.  He came to the final table in seventh place, but managed to control his chips and move into the final three the following day.  Balsiger battled gallantly throughout the final three-handed action, even taking the chip lead at one point.

Balsiger, a political science student at Arizona State University, would have become the youngest Main Event champion in history had he emerged victorious.  As it turned out, he would have to be satisfied with a third-place finish and $3,799,079.  Facing a table full of experienced players, Balsiger adjusted his game and made some great plays.

“Really, all I hoped to do was make it to fifth place,” Balsiger said at the WSOP news conference.  “I’m freerolling this.  I came here feeling like I had already won.”

The chip leader entering the final table, 26-year-old Jesse Sylvia played fantastic poker throughout and battled back and forth with Merson for the chip lead after surrendering it.  Sylvia, a native of Martha’s Vineyard, MA, found himself at a 2-to-1 disadvantage in chips when heads-up play began after 11 grueling hours of three-handed play.

About 30 minutes into heads-up play, Merson was crowned the champ and Sylvia took home almost $5.3 million for his second place finish.  With a few diehard fans still cheering on the players, the final hand was played about 5:45 a.m. local time (PST).  From nine players to champion, the entire final table lasted 18 hours.

ROAD TO THE TITLE

The road to poker stardom has been an interesting one for Merson.  A native of Laurel, MD, Merson is a self-admitted former drug abuser who has been through rehab twice and now credits yoga with keeping him balanced and down to earth.  He spoke of his past battles with drugs and alcohol addiction and recovery after his victory.  He hopes his own story will inspire others.

“That’s where a lot of emotion comes from.  I could possibly not even be alive right now; and that’s no exaggeration,” he said.  “I did not bring that story out to the public to get pity.  I just felt comfortable releasing that information; sharing my story and trying to help other people.  I have had a lot of people private message me.  Anything I can do to help the community with this problem, because we live such a crazy lifestyle, it’s easy to get caught up in that stuff.  So, this is something I look forward to ­­­­­- to helping more people with whatever I can do.”

Merson admits he got caught up in the “poker lifestyle;” a young man with quite a bit of money who was ready to party.  Does he worry about the possibility of a relapse now that he has a major cash infusion?

“No.  Not at all,” he said. “That’s the first thing I think of every day when I wake up.  I never want to do any of that again, ever.  And now coming out in public about it makes me even have to act more responsibly.  I mean, if I did something it would have to be in hiding and it’s going to be pretty hard to hide anything now.  I feel very good about my recovery.”

Merson is a huge fan of Baltimore’s sports teams; especially the baseball Orioles and he wore one of their jerseys both days at the final table.  Unlike the Orioles magical season that ended just short of the World Series, Merson’s run didn’t come to an end until he had joined the growing list of poker “young guns” to achieve greatness on poker’s largest stage.  The last five bracelet winners in the Main Event have been 24 years of age or younger.  Despite the long hours at the table, Merson says he was able to stay focused and alert.

“You can’t let fatigue get in the way.  This is a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity,” he explained.  “I have pushed myself through tons of hours of poker in the past.  Obviously, you have to get through it somehow and don’t do anything dumb because odds are you’re never going to have an opportunity like this again.  I just thought I had to keep grinding it out, you know?”

“People either play too tight or too loose short-handed, but for the most part, this three-handed match was pretty solid.  I mean, Jake (Balsiger) struggled in certain spots, perhaps from lack of experience.  But Jesse (Sylvia) played really well,” Merson commented.  “I couldn’t really do much because Jake was having problems in certain spots, and I was out of position with Jesse (to my left) so I couldn’t really do anything.  That made me have to go in limping, and so, from there, I just started grinding away.  I picked my spots and ran good when I needed too.  I built up a stack on a key hand where I had K-K to A-K.  I was winning a bunch of pots before that.  You just can’t give up.”

That will to win certainly paid off for Merson.  He instantly became recognized as the world champion of poker and an ambassador to the game.  The cash doesn’t hurt either.  As for what’s next, this poker pro has no intention of slowing down after so much recent success on the felt and already has plans to return to playing the game he loves.

“I’m ready to go to Macau.  I had already planned on going there,” he said.  “Obviously, this gives me some more opportunities.  That’s what I am looking forward to the most, which is getting into the biggest cash games in the world and not blowing all my money.”

2012 World Series of Poker Main Event final table results:

1st – Greg Merson, $8.5 million

2nd ­– Jesse Sylvia, $5.3 million

3rd – Jake Balsiger, $3.8 million

4th – Russell Thomas, $2.85 million

5th – Jeremy Ausmus, $2.1 million

6th – Andras Koroknai, $1.6 million

7th – Michael Esposito, $1.3 million

8th – Robert Salaburu, $971,000

9th – Steve Gee, $755,000

Sean Chaffin is a freelance writer in Rockwall, Texas.  His new book, RAISING THE STAKES:  True Tales of Gambling, Wagering and Poker Faces, is available as an eBook and in paperback at www.RaisingtheStakesbook.com, Amazon.com, and BarnesandNoble.com.  He is also editor of www.PokerTraditions.com; all about poker history, lore, and people.  If you have a gambling or poker story idea, email Sean at seanchaffin@sbcglobal.net.

Surprising stats & percentages

By Frank Scoblete

Gamblers have a natural fascination with odds. Sometimes the odds discourage us from making a bet; other times, we bet on extreme longshots in the hopes of scoring a gigantic win.

Of course, the odds don’t only apply to games of chance—they apply to all areas of life. I thought I’d put together a short list of some of odds you might find interesting, in and out of the casinos.